Volume 3 - LAFD Training

MANUAL OF OPERATION
VOLUME III
DRILL MANUAL
PURSUANT TO THE AUTHORITY VESTED IN CHIEF ENGINEER BY THE RULES AND
REGULATIONS, THIS DRILL MANUAL IS ESTABLISHED AS A PART OF THE PRACTICES AND
PROCEDURES OF THE LOS ANGELES CITY FIRE DEPARTMENT. IT HAS BEEN COMPILED
AS ADJUNCT TO THE RULES AND REGULATIONS AND SHALL HAVE EQUAL FORCE AND
EFFECT IN DEPARTMENTAL ADMINISTRATION.

The maintenance of peak efficiency in a fire-fighting organization is
dependent upon the knowledge and skills exercised by members of that
organization.
This Manual describes the apparatus, tools, and equipment used by the Los
Angeles City Fire Department and further provides basic techniques in the
use of hose lines, ladders, breathing apparatus, and other equipment.
These techniques are offered as a guide. When conditions arise where they
are not applicable, it is the duty of the officer in charge to take such action
as may be necessary to effectively handle the situation. Every member is
obligated, however, to become thoroughly familiar with all material found. in
this Manual.
DONALD O. MANNING
Chief Engineer and General
Los Angeles City Fire Department

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6/1 APPARATUS
-01. Fire-Fighting Apparatus
-02. Specialized Apparatus
-03. Support Apparatus
6/2 TOOLS EQUIPMENT
-O1. Description-General
-02. Appliances
-03. Extinguishers
-04. Fittings
-05. Medical Equipment
-06. Nozzles
-07. Valves
-08. Squad Equipment
6/3 SELF-CONTAINED, BREATHING APPARATUS (SCBA)
-01. SCBA-General
-02. Donning SCBA
-03. Lessons Learned
-04. Emergency Conditions Breathing Procedure
-05. Signal Line
-06. Inspection and Maintenance
6/4 ROPES AND KNOTS
-01. Ropes and Knots-General
-02. Lifeline/Rescue Kit
-03. Equipment Line
-04. Dropline
-05. Knots
-06. Coiling and Throwing

6/5 ENGINE COMPANY
-01. Hose--General
-02. Hose Combinations
-03. Loading Hose
-04. Hydrants
-05. Fire Department Connections
-06. Hose Packs
6/6 ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
-01. Engine Company Operations
-02. Basic Operations
-03. Modules
-04. Hose Evolutions
-05. Hose Evolutions-Above Ground
-06. Hose Evolutions-Two-Piece
6/7 LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
-01. Ladders-General
-02. Basic Operations
TABLE OF CONTENTS
-03. Straight Ladder-16- and 20-Foot -04. Straight Ladder-24-Foot
-05. Extension Ladders-General
-06. Extension Ladder-12-Foot
-07. Extension Ladder-14-Foot
-08. Extension Ladder-20-Foot
-09. Extension Ladder-24-Foot
-10. Extension Ladder-35-Foot
-11. Extension Ladder (Bangor)-50-Foot
-12. Roof Ladders
-13. Hoisting and Bridging
6 / 8 SALVAGE
-01. Salvage-General

-01. FIREFIGHTING APPARATUS
.01 Engines
The triple combination or "TRIPLE" (as it is commonly
called) is the basic firefighting apparatus. The term
"triple combination" (Figure 1 indicates that this
apparatus has three components; water tank, high
capacity water pump, and hose. The triple can be found
as a one-piece engine company or as two engines
assigned to a Task Force station.
L.A.F.D. triples have. series-parallel main pumps of
varying capacities; 1,000 gpm, 1250 gpm, 1500 gpm,
and 2000 gpm at 150 psi. Depending upon the area
served, this apparatus may carry a combination of any
or all of the following sizes of hose; 31/2", 21/2", 13/4",
11/2" and 1". The water tank carrying capacity ranges
from 300 gallons to 500 gallons.
Figure 1
.02 Aerial Ladder Trucks
The aerial ladder truck (Figure 2) is assigned to a Task
Force station. It provides the Department with a quick,
efficient means of operating above ground by use of a
hydraulically operated aerial ladder. A "Truck" (as it is
commonly called) carries ground ladders, specialized
tools and equipment used for rescue, ventilation,
forcible entry, salvage, and overhaul operations.
L.A.F.D. aerial ladders are 100' in length. They consist
of three or four sections and are constructed of metal
with beams of a truss bridge type construction. In
addition, trucks carry a complement of ground ladders
exceeding 200 feet in length.
Page 1
APPARATUS
Figure 2
6/1-01.01
.03 Task Force
A Task Force (Figure 3) is normally comprised of an
engine company, a 200 series engine and a truck
company. All three pieces of apparatus are housed
together.
A Task Force provides a high degree of flexibility and
efficiency since it allows for the coordinated use of
personnel and equipment.
Figure 3

6/1-01.04
.04 Light Force
A Light Force (Figure 4) is normally comprised of a
Truck company and an engine.
Figure 4
.05 Aerial Platform
An aerial platform (Figure 5) is a triple combination/
aerial platform, with a 50' articulating beam.
The "SNORKEL" (as it is commonly called) may operate
as an engine company or may be used as either engine
of a Task Force. The aerial platform portion of the
apparatus is a completely self contained, hydraulically
operated articulating boom unit. It consists of a turn
table, two piece elevating boom and an operating
platform or "basket." Hydraulic outriggers are used to
stabilize the apparatus during aerial operations. The
apparatus is equipped with a large capacity monitor (750
GPM) mounted on the basket and small spray nozzles
which provide a protective water* curtain for the
operator.
Figure 5
APPARATUS
.06 Water Tower
This apparatus (Figure 6) is a triple combination/ water
tower with either an articulating or telescoping 50' boom.
The "SQURT" (as it is commonly called) may operate as
a single engine, or be used as either engine of a Task
Force.
The water tower portion of the apparatus is a completely
self contained, hydraulically operated two piece,
articulating or telescoping boom unit. Hydraulic
outriggers are used to stabilize the apparatus during
aerial operations. The apparatus is equipped with a
large capacity hydraulically operated nozzle (1000
GPM).
Figure 6
.07 Hazardous Material/Squad
This apparatus (Figure 7) is specially designed to fill a
variety of Department needs. If carries personnel and
equipment to fulfill fire fighting tasks and the handling of
hazardous materials. Special equipment includes; entry
suits, hazardous material monitoring equipment, and an
extensive chemical library enabling members to identify
chemicals and their hazards.
Figure 7

.08 Fire Boats
The L.A.F.D. operates five fireboats which are
strategically located in the Harbor area. Fireboats are
invaluable in fighting ship and wharf fires. They are
capable of providing a coordinated attack from both land
and water sides of the fire. Fireboat operations are not
confined to ship and wharf fires, but afford protection to
property adjacent to the waterfront. This is particularly
true of the large boats because of their increased
pumping capacity, which can augment land water
supplies.
NOTE: Before the heavy streams of a boat are directed
toward a fire, four short blasts are sounded on the
airhorn. This is a signal for members in the fire area to
take cover, as these streams are extremely powerful
and can be dangerous.
Fireboats 1, 3, and 5 (Figure 8) have a rated pumping
capacity of 750 gpm @ 150 psi. They are equipped with
two gasoline engines for propulsion and one gasoline
engine for pumping. These boats all have the same hull
design and are 34' in length. They are equipped with 1
1/2" hose, 50 gallon tank of ATC (Alcohol Type
Concentrate) and a limited supply of AFFF. Each boat
has monitor mounted on the bow, Fireboats 1, 3, and
have scuba divers assigned and necessary scuba
equipment.
Figure 8
Fireboat 2 (Figure 9) is 99' in length and has a pumping
capacity in excess of 16,000 gpm @ 150 psi. It is
equipped with 3 diesel propulsion engines (2 of which
can also be used for pumping) and 4 pumping engines.
In addition, there are 2 diesel generators. It carries a
large amount of equipment, including several monitors
with tip sizes up to six inches, a supply of 31/2", 21/2",
and 11/2" hose, breathing apparatus, a large capacity
acetylene cutting torch, siphon ejectors, 50 gallon tank
of ATC and a 200 gallon supply of AFFF. Boat 2 is
equipped with an articulating hydraulic boom for lifting
APPARATUS
6/1-01.08
personnel and equipment. This boat is equipped with
maneuvering jets which provide control and stability.
Figure 9
Fireboat 4 (Figure 10) is 78' in length and has pumping
capacity of approximately 9000 gpm. It is equipped with
2 diesel propulsion engines and 4 pumping engines (2 of
which can be used as generators). The pumps also
provide control and stability through the use of water jets
located at the waterline.
This vessel is equipped with monitors, rail pipes to
which portable monitors can be attached and wharf
nozzles that are built into the hull on each side of the
vessel. A 500-gallon tank of ATC, a supply of AFFF,
31/2", 21/2", and 11/2" hose, and a large amount of
additional equipment is also carried.
Figure 10

6/1-01.09
.09 Helicopters
LAFD operates six (6) helicopters all of which may be
used for reconnaissance, water drops, transporting
personnel and equipment, laying and picking up hose
and as an aerial command post. They may also be used
for high-hazard patrol, search and rescue, aerial
ambulance, aerial photography, and survey of target
hazards. Some helicopters have "night sun" and power
hoist capabilities.
Bell 206 (Jet Ranger)-#5 & 6
This helicopter (Figure 11) is a five-seat aircraft capable
of speeds up to 140 mph. It may be equipped with a
120-gallon water tank, and has a cargo hook for carrying
external loads such as portable pumps or hose. It has
the capability of transporting two litter patients and an
attendant within the helicopter.
Figure 11
Bell 204 #4/205 #2 & 3 (Huey)-
This helicopter (Figure 12) can seat 11 to 15 members
and is capable of speeds up to 138 mph. It may be
equipped with a 350 gallon water tank and can carry a
5000 pound external load on the hook. This craft has the
capability of carrying 3 to 6 litter patients and can be
used as an Air Ambulance/M.I.C.U.
For more information see 6/11-87.01.
Page 4
APPARATUS
Figure 12
Bell 412-
This helicopter (Figure 13) can seat up to 15 members
and is capable of speeds up to 155 mph. It may be
equipped with a 350 gallon water tank, and can carry a
5000 pound payload. This craft can carry two critical
patients and can be used as an air ambulance/M.I.C.U.
Figure 13

.10 Foam
Crash Fire Rescue (CFR)
This apparatus (Figure 14) is an all-terrain vehicle
designed for rescue and extinguishing operations at
emergencies involving aircraft. The apparatus carries
3000-4000 gallons of water and approximately 500
gallons of AFFF (light water). It has a roof turret and
bumper nozzles that have ground sweep capabilities.
Additional equipment carried includes ground ladders,
power saws, hand lines, and radios with aircraft, airport
and fire frequencies.
Page 5
Figure 14
Figure 14
APPARATUS
.11 Crash Rapid Intervention Vehicle (R.I.V.)
This apparatus (Figure 15) is an all-terrain, self
contained vehicle designed for rapid rescue and
extinguishing operations at emergencies involving
aircraft.
6/1-01-10
A liquid foam system is the primary fire fighting
component of this apparatus, It carries 1585 gallons of
pre-mixed AFFF. It has a 700 lb. dry chemical system
on board that is discharged through handlines.
Additional equipment carried by this apparatus include;
Power rescue tool, proximity suits, and radios with
aircraft airport and fire frequencies.
Figure 15

6/1-02.01
-02. SPECIALIZED APPARATUS
.01 Rescue Ambulances
This apparatus (Figure 1) is used for the transportation
of the sick or injured. The majority are equipped to
perform paramedic functions. Basic equipment carried
includes; a gurney, back boards, resuscitators and
first-aid supplies. In addition paramedic ambulances
Mobile Intensive Care Units (MICU), carry a variety of
specialized drugs, monitoring and communication
equipment that facilitate advanced life support
functions.
Figure 1
.02 Heavy Utility
Heavy utility apparatus (Figure 2) are designed and
equipped to respond to fire fighting, physical rescue and
overhaul operations, They are used when breaching,
cutting, lifting, and moving of heavy objects is required.
They are also used to tow and repair Department
apparatus. These apparatus are equipped with booms
for lifting, winch’s, a large acetylene cutting torch, air
hammers with hose, a high capacity air compressor, an
assortment of hand and power tools, various jacks,
tackle, chains, and a power rescue tool.
Page 6
Figure 2
APPARATUS
.03 Foam Carrier (Light Water)
This apparatus (Figure 3) is used at incidents requiring
large volumes of AFFF, such as flammable liquid fires,
tanker incidents or aircraft accidents. They carry
approximately 300 gallons of AFFF in their tank plus
50-five gallon containers. A built in proportioner meters
the AFFF. The apparatus carries additional foam
nozzles and proximity suits.
Figure 3
.04 Tractor Transports, Dozers, Loaders
Tractor Transports:
A tractor trailer configuration (Figure 4) designed for
emergency or non-emergency transportation of
department dozers, loaders and any
oversized/overweight load.
Figure 4

Dozers and Loaders:
Dozers and Loaders (Figure 5) are used for construction
and maintenance of fire roads in the mountain district
and during extensive overhaul operation.
Figure 5
.05 Hazardous Materials/Mobile Laboratory
An on call emergency vehicle (Figure 6) equipped and
staffed to provide technical assistance during Hazardous
Material Operations.
Equipment carried includes: Chemical entry s its
Breathing apparatus, carbon monoxide detector, photo
ionization analyzer, combustible gas detector, and
sewer, storm drain and petroleum pipeline maps.
Page 7
Figure 6
APPARATUS
6/1-02.05
.06 Hazardous Materials Support Unit and
Decontamination Trailer
HazMat Support Unit:
This apparatus is used to tow the Decontamination
Trailer and supports decontamination operation.
Equipment carried includes: decontamination solutions,
bladders, sewer hose, pools, towels, paper coveralls,
booties and plastic bags for approximately 150 people,
and a canopy for the trailer. (Figure 7)
Decon Trailer
Decon I as the capability of decontaminating 150
firefighters/civilians a one time. If re-supplied, the
decontamination process could continue indefinitely.
Figure 7

6/1-03.01
-03. SUPPORT APPARATUS
.01 Helicopter Tenders
This apparatus (Figure 1) responds to locations where
helicopters will be used. They carry from 580 to 2000
gallons of jet fuel. Equipment includes; portable pumps
and reservoirs (1,000 gallon capacity), stokes litter
baskets, cargo slings and hooks, assorted fittings, a
portable generator to assist in starting the aircraft, two
sets of spotlights with 12 volt batteries for marking night
heliports, and radios with aircraft and fire frequencies.
Figure 1
.02 Diesel Fueler:
The Diesel Fueler (Figure 2) carries diesel fuel for use
by department apparatus at remote locations.
Page 8
Figure 2
APPARATUS
.03 Gasoline Fueler
The gas tanker (Figure 3) carries 1,000 gallons of
unleaded fuel. It may be used for refueling Department
apparatus as needed.
Figure 3
.04 Emergency Lighting
This apparatus (Figure 4) is used to provide light and
electrical power up to 30,000 watts. Equipment carried
includes; a 25' telescoping boom connected to a
crossbar with eight lights permanently mounted; four
roof mounted lights; light cords, extension cords, two
reels with cords, three quartz lamps, and two large
portable spotlights.
Figure 4

.05 Command Unit
This apparatus (Figure 5) is a self-contained, mobile,
field commander's headquarters, which is activated at
the discretion of O.C.D. for major incidents, (i.e. brush
fires, earthquakes, etc.). It contains the necessary maps,
files, and communication equipment to enable it to
serve as a mobile field headquarters and dispatching
office. This apparatus has the ability to generate its own
power or be supplied from an outside power source.
Figure 5
.06 Brush Utility
This apparatus (Figure 6) is equipped with tools used
during brush fire fighting operations. The equipment
includes a flame thrower used to light back fires,
portable drafting pumps, a floating pool pump,
chainsaws, and an assortment of hand tools.
Page 9
Figure 6
APPARATUS
6/1-03.05
.07 Emergency Air
This apparatus (Figure 7) is available for emergency
response to provide or refill breathing apparatus bottles.
It is equipped with two high pressure, large capacity
compressors. A supply of air bottles i maintained on this
apparatus for immediate exchange at the scene of an
emergency.
Figure 7
.80 Food Service
These apparatus (Figure 8) are used to supply food and
refreshment at the scene of an extended emergency.
Figure 8

6/1-03.09
.09 Light Utility Vehicles
Pick-up trucks (plug buggies), vans or sedans (Figure 9)
are assigned to work locations for the purposes of
routine Department transportation. Locations with
specialized equipment such as emergency generators,
sawdust or AFFF are assigned vehicles with emergency
capabilities.
Figure 9
.10 Bus
These apparatus (Figure 10) transport personnel during
non-emergency operations. Total capacity is 21
including driver.
FIRE STATION No.3
Page 10
Figure 10
APPARATUS
.11 Emergency Sedan
This apparatus (Figure 11) is designed for emergency
transportation of Department personnel and may be
used in a variety of roles, such as a mobile command
post.
Figure 11

-01. DESCRIPTION GENERAL
.01 Air Bag System (Maxiforce)
The air bag system is a valuable tool and can be used
for prying, spreading, bending, moving, or lifting. The
major benefits of the air bag system is speed of
deployment, ease of operation, and rated lifting
capacity. The two air bag systems currently in use are a
three bag system and a seven bag system, which are
rated as a 56-ton and 236-ton respectively. The 56-ton
is comprised of one 12-ton and two 22-ton bags as
shown in Figure 1. The 236 ton is comprised of one
each of the following: 12, 17, 22, 32, 35, 44 and 74-ton
bags. The air bags are similar in construction to a
modern automotive tubeless tire. They are built with
neoprene rubber compounds encasing kevlar cords, and
are extremely durable and resistant to damage. Each
side of the bag has a non-slip surface marked with an
"X" which will help to center the bag on/under the object
to be moved or lifted.
Safety Considerations:
1. Always stabilize the object to be moved.
2. All personnel involved in an air bag operation shall
wear full safety clothing.
3. A specific member should be assigned as a safety
observer. For more detailed information see Training
Bulletins.
Figure 1
.02 Aluminized Ceramic Blanket
A 61 X 8' woven ceramic blanket, aluminized side, and
used to protect or insulate victim from sparks and debris
during rescue operations. 2) Primarily designed to be
used in association cutting torch and rotary saw. Safety
consideration Aluminized material can conduct
electricity.
Page 1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 2
6/2-01.01
.03 Appliance Dolly
Dollies (Figure 3) expedite the moving of leaking
refrigerators and other large appliances. They are
carried by truck companies. They can be used to carry
air bottles and equipment at emergencies where
apparatus is removed from the scene.
Figure 3

6/2-01.04
.04 Axe, Pickhead
The pickhead axe (Figure 4) is one of the most useful
tools carried on Fire Department apparatus. Its uses
include cutting, prying, striking and digging operations.
Figure 4
When cutting, the axe should strike the wood with an
angle of about 60 degrees between the side of the axe
head and the surface of the wood being cut.
When cutting flooring or roof sheathing, sound with the
head of the axe to determine the location of joists or
rafters, then make the cut as close as possible to joists
or rafters. This gives a firmer foundation for the cut.
When cutting a hole in a roof to provide ventilation, first
pull away any gravel, tar or paper. Make a cut at both
ends of the desired opening before removing any of the
boards. This will reduce the amount of hot air, smoke
and gases in the working area. Then remove the boards,
working from leeward to windward when possible. When
cutting through wood lath and plaster walls, follow down
the center of the stud to prevent excessive damage to
adjoining plaster. On drywall, cut just to the inside of the
stud.
Long, arching swings should not be used with the
pickhead axe. This above method increases the danger
of hitting other members or overhead obstructions.
The blade of the axe may be used to pry open locked
doors and windows.
Hinge pins may be removed by forcing the blade
between the hinge and pin and prying the pin out. At
times, it may be helpful to force another axe under the
door as a wedge to remove the strain on the hinge while
the pin is being removed.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
The pick end may be used to good advantage for pulling
lath and plaster, removing sheathing and stripping
shingles from roofs.
Due to the grain of the wooden handle of a pickhead
axe, the strongest axis when using the axe to pry, is in
line with the grain as in direction #1 and #2 (Figure 4A).
Care must be used when prying in the direction of #3
and #4, (Figure 4A).
3
1
Figure 4-A
The flat side of the axe head can be used for breaking
glass. Stand to one side and strike the panel near the
top, keeping the axe handle above the horizontal to
eliminate the danger of glass sliding down the handle
and cutting the hands.
Pickhead axes are ground in a manner that resists
chipping of the cutting edge when cutting materials
harder than wood.
.05 Axe Scabbard
An axe scabbard (Figure 4) is worn to carry the
pickhead axe
4
2

.06 Axe Single-Bit
The single-bit (flathead) axe (Figure 5) is used primarily
for cutting operations. It is very useful in clearing brush,
trees and shrubs from firebreak areas. The single-bit
axe is sharper and its blade ground finer than a
pickhead axe, making it well suited far cutting both
hardwood floors and plywood.
Figure 5
.07 Ball and Chain
This tool consists of an iron ball attached to a length of
chain. (Figure 6). During ventilation operations it may be
used to break out windows, skylights, hanging ceilings,
etc., that cannot be reached by other means.
It is also well suited for cleaning out chimneys, rubbish
chutes, etc.
Figure 6
The normal method used to break windows is to have
one member on the roof holding the rope attached to the
chain ring and another member on the ground with a
second rope attached to the chain just above the ball.
The member on the roof raises and lowers the ball and
the member on the ground controls the swing of the ball.
This method enables two members to rapidly remove a
great many windows.
Page 3
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-01.06
.08 Battering Ram
This is a forcible entry tool, used primarily to open
heavy doors and breach walls. When forcing doors, use
the butt or ball end of the ram. Strike the solid part of
the door near the lock. (Figure 7)
Figure 7
To breach brick walls with the battering ram, first
remove one brick with a pickhead axe or other suitable
tool. After the first brick has been removed, use the
forked end of the battering ram to remove the rest of the
bricks, giving a slight lifting motion just as it strikes the
brick. Remove the bricks one at a time, starting just
below the first brick removed and working downward.
The hole should be diamond-shaped so as not to
excessively weaken the wall. Before breaching a wall to
reach the seat of the fire, place charged hose lines in
position for immediate operation. The front handle of
this tool acts as a guard to protect the hands and should
be used as such.
.09 Blowers
The blower is used to remove smoke and gases from
buildings, allowing firefighters to work more efficiently,
as well as reducing smoke damage to the building and
its contents.
The blower is driven by a gasoline engine connected
directly to a fan. These are of two general types as
shown in Figure 8 and Figure 9.

6/2-01.10
The type shown in Figure 8 has a collapsible sock
reinforced with metal clamps. The intake sock is lowered
into basements, pits, holds of ships, etc., to draw out
smoke and gases, or supply fresh air by use of the outlet
sock.
Figure 8
18" and 24" blowers (Figure 9) are used to move large
volumes of air, smoke and/or other gases.
Figure 9
Heavy smoke conditions could cause the blower to run
poorly or stall. Care should be taken when operating
these blowers where loose materials are present or
when in close proximity to drapes, curtains, shades, etc.
NOTE: When ventilating, blowers are normally used to
create "positive pressure."
Page 4
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.10 Bolt Cutters
Bolt cutters (Figure 10) are used for cutting iron bolts,
bars, steel cables, etc.
Figure 10
Normally, they should not be used on hardened steel, as
the cutting edge may be damaged. THEY SHOULD
NEVER BE USED TO CUT CHARGED ELECTRIC
WIRES OR ENERGIZED METAL.
.11 Brush Tools
Brush Hook:
The brush hook (Figure 11) is used in brush fire fighting
to construct cold trails, fire breaks, or access trails.
Figure 11
The hook in the blade is used for cutting small branches.
The main cutting edge can be used to cut branches up
to 3 inches in diameter. Cut the main stem of brush at
about a 45-degree angle.
This is a cutting tool and MAXIMUM safety precautions
must be observed. Proper footing should be maintained
to ensure the safety of the operator and other members
of the crew.

McCloud:
The McCloud (Figure 12) is used in brush fire fighting,
constructing fire breaks, and cold trailing. Its blade is
designed as a combination hoe and rake. The rake edge
is used in removing matted grasses, leaf mod and other
debris from fire breaks or cold trails. The hoe can be
used to chop roots and cut small to medium brush, etc.
The hoe edge of the blade should be kept sharp,
maintaining a straight cutting surface with a level edge
of approximately 45 degrees.
Figure 12
Pulaski:
The Pulaski (Figure 13) is a tool for brush fire fighting,
cold trailing, etc. It is about the size of a double-bit axe.
The head is a single unit having one axe blade and one
grubbing hoe blade. The axe blade should not be used
for chopping roots. Contact with earth or rock could
damage the cutting edge. The hoe should be used for
this operation.
Figure 13
This is a cutting tool. Observe the same safety
precautions as when using an axe.
Page 5
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-01.12
.12 Bullhorn
A battery-powered megaphone which functions as a
portable public address unit to amplify orders or
instructions at the scene of emergencies. (Figure 14)
Bullhorns are normally carried in Chief Officers sedans.
Figure 14
.13 Canteens
Canteens come in one and two quart sizes. (Figure 15)
The number carried on apparatus varies with
companies. They are used to provide a source of clean
drinking water when water supplies are contaminated or
non-existent. For more information see 6/11-01.50.
Figure 15

6/2-01.14
.14 Channel Locks
Long handled locking pliers (Channel Locks). This
adjustable tool is issued to each member and is used for
removing small fittings, nuts, battery terminals, pinching
off fuel lines, etc., or when a specialized tool is not
readily available.
.15 Chock Block
Chock blocks (Figure 16) are primarily used to prevent
apparatus from rolling. Chock blocks may be used in
shoring objects during physical rescue operations and as
door stops when the space between the bottom of door
and floor is excessive.
When positioning a chock block next to tire of
apparatus, keep one hand on apparatus so that any
movement of rig can be felt. Use foot to slide block into
place.
Figure 16
.16 Claw Hammer
Tool primarily designed to drive or pull nails.
.17 Claw Tool
The Claw Tool (Hayward) is used for forcible entry. It is
a modified wrecking bar, 30 or 42 inches in length.
It is particularly effective for breaking locks, opening
doors and forcing windows.
Breaking a hasp or padlock is a simple task with this
tool. Force the forked end of the tool over the bow of the
lock or hasp (Figure 17) then pry, or twist. The point of
the hook, may be inserted in the bow of the lock or hasp
and leverage applied.
When forcing doors, place the forked end of the tool
between the door and jam and pry the door open.
Page 6
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 17
Two Jugs are located on the hook end of the claw tool.
Their purpose is to provide additional leverage when
difficulty is encountered opening standpipe gate valves.
For more information see Training
Bulletin 34.
.18 Close-Circuit Breathing Apparatus
The Biopack 240 is a self-contained breathing apparatus
for use in contaminated or oxygen deficient
atmospheres. Normally used for below ground incidents
or where long duration protection is required. Because
of the positive pressure in the facepiece, the Biopack
can be used in atmospheres that contain toxic gases or
vapors. (Figure 18) For more detailed information see
lesson plan.
Figure 18

.19 Combustible Gas Indicator
Combustible gas indicator (Figure 19) is used to
determine if the gas-air mixture is within its flammable
limits. They are designed to aspirate a sample of
suspected gas through an element which measures the
burning characteristics of the gas. The burning
characteristics are expressed on a meter as a percent of
the lower flammable limit. The scale divisions on the
meter are such that an adequate indication of
concentrations below the lower flammable limit is given.
Since the lower flammable limit of different substances
varies over a wide range, care should be given in
evaluating meter indications.
NOTE: The toxicity of a gas may be more hazardous
than the explosive hazard and is measured by this
indicator. For more information see 6/11-01.80.
Figure 19
.20 Crowbar
This tool is useful in many situations where leverage is
required. It may be used to pry, move or raise heavy
objects, open heavily bolted doors, etc. Has a notch on
prying end to help gain purchase.
.21 Drag Hook
A tool constructed in the shape of a "T" with five treble
hooks spaced evenly along the "T" head. A line is
attached to the eye on the base of the T when used-
This tool (Figure 20) was designed for one specific
purpose; to drag for submerged bodies.
Page 7
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 20
6/2-01.19
.22 Dust Respirators
Used in areas where there is danger of inhaling airborne
dusts or mists, e.g., asbestos fibers, coal dust, etc. Do
not use in oxygen deficient atmospheres or where there
is danger of toxic gases.
.23 Floor Runners
Floor runners are made from waterproof cotton duck, 6'
x 18' in size. They are used to protect floor and floor
coverings. On apparatus they are found folded to a 3'
width and rolled.
.24 Goggles
Plastic goggles are issued to each member for eye
protection against debris, dust, foreign objects and other
airborne irritants.
.25 Hay Hook
Hay hooks (Figure 2 1) are used primarily for moving
and carrying baled materials. They may also be used
effectively in conjunction with a ladder strap to secure
ladders to parapets, windows, etc.
Figure 21
.26 Hose Clamp
A clamping device used to stop the flow of water
through hose. Uses could include, making tap-ins,
extending lines and replacing burst sections of hose.

6/2-01.27
2½” - 3½ " Hose Clamp:
The operation of this hose clamp is similar to that of a
vise. Open the jaws with the top jaw withdrawn the
proper distance for the size hose being clamped. Place
the lower jaw under the hose; close the top jaw and
engage the locks. Screw down the top jaw to stop the
flow of water. (Figure 22-A)
Figure 22-A
NOTE: Place the screw handle in line with the clamp to
reduce the possibility of unlocking the latch when the
line is loaded and twists.
1” - 1½ " Hose Clamp:
This forester clamp (Figure 22-B) is normally used
during brush fire operations to extend lines and add
fittings. It is small enough to carry in a pocket.
Page 8
Figure 22-B
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.27 Hose Sling
The hose sling is used by two piece engine companies
for laying-a-line. The hose sling consists of two snap
hooks that lock automatically. The hose sling is a single
continuous loop made of nylon webbing. (Figure 23)
Figure 23

.28 Hose Spanners and Wrenches
Spanners have varied uses, such as connecting hose
couplings, removing caps from hydrants and standpipes,
opening and closing hydrant valves, gas valves, etc.
Figure 24-A Is a 31/2" hose spanner. Figure 24-B is a
combination hydrant spanner, both a wrench and
spanner. Figure 24-C is an adjustable hydrant wrench
provided for use where damaged hydrant stems will not
permit the use of a spanner.
Figure 24-D is a monitor spanner used on a wagon
battery.
Figure 24
NOTE: A "hydrant sling" consists of a combination
hydrant spanner and an adjustable hydrant wrench
joined together by a rope.
.29 Hose Roller
A hose roller (Figure 25) is a device used when hoisting
or lowering equipment. It prevents cutting and chafing of
hose or rope when placed over the sharp edges of roofs,
windows, parapets, etc.
It is preferred that the hose roller be secured to the
reinforced (3rd) rung of the fly section of the aerial
ladder to prevent the lifeline from slipping over the end
of the aerial during litter basket and rescue harness
operations.
Page 9
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 25
6/2-01.28
.30 Hydraulic Jack
Hydraulic jacks are provided for maintenance of
automotive apparatus. in addition, hydraulic jacks may
be used in emergency operations that require
considerable lifting power. Most jacks will function in a
horizontal position when the valve is down.
.31 Hydrolator
A tool with 21/2" male threads used to release standpipe
clapper valves (Figure 26). With the Hydrolator securely
tightened into the inlet, the T handle in the center is
screwed in, opening clapper valve in the standpipe inlet.
Figure 26
.32 Jumbo Bar
This tool is an elaboration of the common crowbar. It is
longer and heavier, and is used for purposes similar to
the crowbar. The jumbo bar is an effective tool for use in
heavy prying operations.

6/2-01.33
.33 Life Gun
A life gun is used to shoot a projectile, with a cord
attached, in order to place lines into areas that cannot
be reached by any other means.
The life gun (Figure 27) in general use is a shotgun
action type, firing factory-loaded blank cartridges and
capable of shooting a smooth-shank projectile, with cord
attached, over an 8- to 10-story building.
Figure 27
A new factory-rolled ball of cord is used for every shot at
an emergency. After the first shot at a drill, additional
shots will be made by flaking the cord. The cord is
attached to the projectiles using a "projectile knot," and
to lines using a "slip knot" ending in a bow.
Firing Procedure
All of the safety precautions pertaining to firearms are
observed when using a life gun, with the following
exception: once the projectile has been placed in the life
gun, it is always maintained with the barrel pointing
upward until ready for firing.
The general procedures for firing a vertical or nearvertical
shot are:
1. Attach the cord to the projectile and the eye
of the line.
2. Insert projectile into muzzle.
NOTE: Swab shall be run through barrel to
remove excess oil prior to loading.
3. Place the ball of cord on the ground about
two feet to the side of, and even with, the feet of
the member firing the life gun. The ball of cord
should be on the same side of the member as is
the gun and located so that there is NO SLACK
CORD between the projectile and the ball of
cord. (Figure 28).
Page 10
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
No photo available
The ball may also be held by another member
standing in approximately the same place as the
ball of cord would normally be located if placed
on the ground. The ball should be held at a
lower level than the muzzle of the gun, with the
center of the ball pointed toward the target. Let
the ball of cord lie in the hand DO NOT GRIP
IT.
For firing a horizontal or near horizontal shot the ball of
cord MUST be held by another member with the center
of the ball pointing toward the target.
When firing a life gun, work from the windward side if
possible and elevate the point of aim high enough
above the target to allow for the drag of the cord.
At drills, choose a location that will allow the projectile to
land on a soft surface as possible. The projectile may be
damaged if it lands on a hard surface.

.34 Life Net
The life net is a device used for rescuing persons from
upper floors or roofs when all other means are
impractical. It should be used only in extreme
emergencies.
The life net consists of a metal ring with a landing mat
attached by a series of springs which provide resiliency.
When in operation, the net is held open by sliding
ferrules that lock the hinged joints. It is folded to a
quarter circle when carried on the apparatus. Proper
inspection, care and maintenance is extremely
important.
It is recommended that the net be held by not more than
12 members or less than ten members although under
extreme emergencies it may become necessary to use
fewer members. Members should be spaced evenly
around the net with hands on every other grip-palms up,
thumbs clear, elbows clear of body, left foot forward and
net raised to the neck level (Figure 29). Do not span the
hinged joints and do not purposely allow the net to give
when jumper lands.
Figure 29
The net is carried from the apparatus to the desired
location in a half-folded position by four members.
When in position, it is snapped open by these four
members.
NOTE: When opening from quarter to half-fold undue
strain must not be placed on the hinge bolts.
Additional members must quickly fill in around the net
as soon as it is opened. Members on the side away from
the building must LOOK UP IMMEDIATELY upon
assuming position. Center front is in charge. This
member must watch the jumper and
Page 11
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-01.34
be prepared to make vigorous and positive movements
of the net in order to make the catch. Members with
their backs to the building must watch the outside
members and immediately follow through with
appropriate action. the person jumping should land on
the small of the back in the center of the net. (Figure 30)
Figure 30
If a jumper should drop directly down the face of the
building, the inside of the net must be raised and forced
against the wall to assist in taking the impact. Serious
injury to those members between the net and the wall
may result if they do not take one of several courses
afforded them. The most desirable (if possible) is to
drop to the ground outside of the net and parallel to the
wall.
Members must be alert to the possibility that jumpers
may strike overhead wires or other obstructions and thus
change the course of their fall. In the event that a
number of victims are attempting to jump, those caught
should be quickly and gently rolled from the net on the
side away from the building.
Immediately relocate the net in anticipation of another
jumper.
NOTE: NEVER, AT THE SCENE OF EMERGENCIES,
EXPOSE THE NET IN AN OPEN POSITION EXCEPT
WHEN ANTICIPATING A JUMPER
For more information see 6/11-01.90.

.35 Lights
Quartz Light:
The quartz light is a 500 watt unit that is mounted on a
telescopic tripod or aerial ladder. It provides bright
illumination over a broad area (Figure 31).
Light Cords:
Fifty foot light cords (Figure 31) are equipped with flood
lights and twist lock plugs. Light cords can be plugged
directly into LAFD Taye 50' extension cords, reels or
generators. A "pigtail" adapter is provided for use with
domestic service.
Figure 31
Miscellaneous:
Flashlights and portable spotlights of various makes and
designs are used for ordinary purposes of illumination at
fires. Red highway flares (fuses) are used as danger
signals in the vicinity.
For general illumination of large areas, portable lighting
equipment is available on emergency light apparatus
and may be called at the discretion of the officer in
charge.
.36 Manhole Cover Hook
The manhole cover hook (Figure 32) is used to remove
and replace street manhole covers.
Page 12
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 32
6/2-01.35
.37 Maps
The LAFD issues several sizes and types of maps. They
are used to identify streets, geographic locations,
hydrants, main sizes and other topographic and
informational data that may aid our operations. Where
used, map size, designation (i.e., 400', 800' and 1200')
indicate inch to foot relationship (I in. on 400' map = 400
ft. actual). Drainage, sewer, pipeline, etc., maps are
issued to specialized units and can be requested by field
units through O.C.D. For more information see
8/7-60.70.
.38 Mattress Carriers
Mattress carriers (Figure 33) are made of a canvas
material, about 61/2' x 91/2' in size with handles
attached to the corners. They are used to remove
mattresses from buildings.
Figure 33

6/2-01.44
Safety: When wet or folded over itself poly vinyl is very
slippery and becomes a hazard when used where
members must walk i.e., stairs, halls, etc.
.44 Pneumatic Power Chisel
The pneumatic power chisel (Figure 40) is a forcible
entry and physical rescue tool designed to be operated
with a regulated air supply from a LAFD breathing
apparatus air bottle. It will cut through 11/4" thick mild
steel plate, mild steel bolts to 3/4"' in diameter and
various thickness’ of sheet metal.
Figure 40
Proper safety equipment shall be worn when using this
tool, i.e., goggles, gloves, helmet, turnout coat. For
more information see Training Bulletin 33.
.45 Portable Generator
Portable generators (Figure 41) are used to furnish
emergency electrical power for 110-volt lights and
electrical equipment carried on Department apparatus.
There are various models in the field ranging up to 3500
watts.
Page 15
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 41
.46 Portable. (Handheld) Radio
The portable radio (Figure 42) is a three-watt, forty
channel microprocessor controlled handheld radio that
operates in the 800 MHz radio frequency band. This
radio is programmed with eighteen Fire Department
channels and has capability for future expansion. This
radio has the capability of operating in the "repeat"
mode for communicating through the Fire Department
radio system, providing large area coverage and
communications with OCDS In addition, the radio may
be used in the "direct” mode for talking unit to unit. The
battery should be changed when the low-battery "chirp"
sounds and/or when the battery (the word BATT)
displays on the LCD (liquid crystal display). For more
information see Training Bulletin.
Figure 42

.47 Power Rescue Tool (Hydraulic)
The Power Rescue Tool (Figure 43), can be used for
many types of rescue work, but is primarily designed to
free victims from wrecked vehicles, aircraft or confined
areas. This tool will generate several tons of force at the
tips of the titanium jaws without producing sparks or
flame. Accessories are carried that allow it to perform
varied rescue and extrication operations.
Figure 43
.48 Radiological Equipment
Ion chambers Geiger counters, and dosimeters (Figure
44) are used by the Department to determine the level
or existence of radioactivity at the scene of emergencies
involving radioactive materials. For more information
see 6/11-75.01.
Figure 44
.49 Ram Bar
The ram bar (Figure 45) operates on the principle of a
slide hammer. It is designed so that a heavy outer
handle slides up and down on a shaft to which is
attached a tool steel bit.
Page 16
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 45
6/2-01.47
When the outer handle strikes the head of the shaft, it
imparts that inertia to the tip of the ram bar, forcing the
steel bit into the material. The set screws holding the bit
in place should be maintained tight at all times.
.50 Redwood Plugs
Tapered redwood plugs (Figure 46) of various sizes are
used to plug broken gas and water lines. A plug tapered
to less than 1/2" at the tip may be used to plug sprinkler
heads and small diameter tubing.
Figure 46

6/2-01.51
.51 Refrigeration Tools
Modified vice-grip pliers, small end wrenches, socket
wrenches and Allen wrenches (Figure 47) that are used
to shut off the flow of gas in both domestic and
commercial refrigeration units.
Figure 47
.52 Rescue Air Cushion
The Rescue Air Cushion is used at incidents where there
is a possibility of persons jumping from upper floors.
This device is a nylon/plastic air filled cushion and
depending on size, designed to rescue people from
heights up to 100'. There are two sizes: 15' x 20' x 8',
which can be used in heights up to 70' and the 18' x 25'
x 9' (Figure 48), which can be used in heights up to 100'.
Truck Companies will carry the Rescue Air Cushions.
The cushion is inflated by two high volume electric
blowers, and can be deployed by a Task Force in two
minutes.
Figure 48
.53 Rescue Harness LAFD
The LAFD rescue-suspension harness (Figure 49) was
designed by department members to provide a safe,
secure and comfortable support system where it is
necessary or desirable to suspend a member to effect a
rescue.
Page 17
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 49
The rescue harness is carried on truck companies in a
portable canvas pack with auxiliary components. The
harness is used in conjunction with the standard LAFD
litter basket bridle. It is capable of four suspension
attitudes (vertical-erect, inclined horizontal, full
horizontal and inverted vertical).
The rescuer shall wear the provided safety helmet
whenever suspended in the harness. Guide lines are
used to control rescuers drift and direction. For more
information see Training Bulletin 50.

.54 Resuscitator
The "Elder" resuscitator (Figure 50) is a pressure
demand resuscitator that has inhalation capabilities It
can be used manually to ventilate a non-breathing
victim, but does not have the negative pressure feature
to remove air from the lungs.
Figure 50
.55 Rubber Gauntlet Gloves
Rubber Gauntlet Gloves (Figure 51) with leather outer
gloves shall be worn whenever cutting electrically
charged wires or any material suspected of being
energized. Wear gloves when cutting with a power saw
into unknown or concealed spaces.
Testing. Gloves shall be field-tested after each use and
weekly. To test, take hold of glove at the cuff with both
hands. Spin the gloves between the hands thereby
trapping air within. To check for leaks, simply hold glove
close to face and eyes with one hand and apply
pressure with the other hand while looking and listening
for any leakage. Gloves suspected of having a leak shall
be removed from service immediately. In addition,
gloves will be exchanged and tested with 10,000 volts of
electricity every 60 days by the Department of Water
and Power.
Page 18
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 51
6/2-01.54
.56 Rubber Mallet
Designed for striking applications when a hammer with a
metal head would damage the object being struck
(tightening caps on apparatus) or create a hazard of
sparks (driving redwood plug into metal gas line).
(Figure 52)
Figure 52
.57 Rubbish Carriers
Rubbish carriers (Figure 53) are made of canvas
material, 41/2 feet square, with handles attached to the
comers. They are used to remove debris during
overhaul operations.

6/2-01.58
Figure 53
.58 Rubbish Hook
The rubbish hook (Figure 54) is used during overhaul
and ventilation operations. Some rubbish hooks are
equipped with "D" handles. Rubbish hooks are used to
handle debris, pull shingles, roof sheeting and to push
down ceilings from above
Figure 54
.59 Safety Can
A metal container with a self-closing lid in which
flammable liquids may be -safely stored or transported.
.60 Salvage Covers
We have two types of salvage covers (Figure 55)
rubber-coated cotton duck and lightweight plastic coated
nylon. All salvage covers are waterproof and 12' x 18' in
size. Brass grommets are placed along the edges and at
the corners for hanging and
Page 19
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
securing. Salvage covers are used to protect property,
merchandise and furnishings from water damage, and in
conjunction with other equipment to channel water. For
more information see 6/11-01.01
Figure 55
.61 Salvage Hooks
The salvage hook (Figure 56) is heavy gauge wire
preformed into the basic shape of the number "2." Its
design allows it to be driven into a wall, or between
moldings and walls. Once in place, the salvage hook
provides an attachment point for salvage covers, plastic,
or salvage cord.
Figure 56

.62 Salvage Pan
The salvage pan is a 321/2" x 18" metal basin, with
removable ramps, for use in conjunction with the
submersible pump and squeegees. The 5" deep pan can
be used in areas that don't provide a "natural" catch
basin. The submersible pump is placed into the pan and
water is squeegee in via ramps (Figure 57).
Figure 57
63 Sawdust
Sawdust conforming to L.A.F.D. requirements as to
composition, coarseness, and water-absorbing
properties, is used to control, direct or absorb water. It is
usually carried on the apparatus in large canvas bags.
.64 Saws
Handsaws (set of 3):
Saws of various types are employed for rescue, forcible
entry, ventilating and overhauling operations. Those in
use on this Department re:
1. Crosscut saw-(Figure 58-A) for cutting wood.
2. Plumber's saw--(Figure 58-B) used for cutting
sheet metal, nails, etc.,
3. Hacksaw-(Figure 58-C) for cutting iron bars,
bolts, etc.
Page 20
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 58
6/2-01.62
Chain Saw:
The gasoline powered chain saw (Figure 59) is used
primarily in ventilation operations. This tool should be
operated by two members (except during starting
operations), one member being the operator and the
other being the observer/safety member. Safety
precautions and operating procedures as outlined in the
chain saw manual should be strictly followed. For more
information see Training Bulletin 32.
Figure 59

6/2-01.65
Rotary Saw-XL-98:
The gasoline-powered rotary saw (Figure 60A) is used
for forcible entry, ventilation and rescue work. This tool
is effective for extricating victims of motor vehicle
accidents when the cutting of sheet metal is necessary.
Metal, masonry, and wood blades are provided with the
saws. Safety precautions and operating procedures as
outlined in Training Bulletin 44 should be strictly
adhered to.
Page 21
Figure 60-A
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Rotary Saw-K-1200:
The gasoline-powered rotary saw (Figure 60-B) is
capable of many hours of heavy cutting operations. The
partner K-1200 rotary saw is capable of cutting through
the following (depending on which blade is used):
concrete, asphalt, metal, wood, plastic and other types
of materials. The K-1200 uses four types of blades in
two sizes. They are abrasive metal 12"/ 14", abrasive
masonry 12"/14", carbide tip wood 12"/ 14" and a dry
cutting diamond. blade 14". Safety precautions and
operating procedures are outlined in the training bulletin
and lesson plan which should be strictly adhered to.
Figure 60-B
.65 Sheet Metal Snips
Specifically designed to trim or cut sheet metal and thin
gauge mild steel, e.g., metal banding used to secure
baled goods. Gloves must be worn when cutting or
handling cut metal.

.66 Shovels
Square Point:
Square-point shovels (Figure 61-A) are used to best
advantage on flat surfaces during overhauling
operations when moving loose debris.
Round Point:
Round-point shoves (Figure 61-B) are designed for
digging. They are considered to be an effective tool for
use in fighting brush and grass fires.
Scoop:
Scoop shovels (Figure 61-C) are used for spreading and
removing sawdust, carrying debris, digging in loose
bulky materials, and for removing water from floors and
floor coverings.
Figure 61
.67 Sledge Hammer
A tool used during forcible entry, rescue and ventilating
operations where considerable weight and striking power
is necessary. The edge, rather than the flat portion of
the sledge head, is more effective for breaking concrete.
Various weights are in use. Hammers should not be
used to strike hardened steel.
Page 22
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-01.66
.68 Sound Powered Field Telephone
The "field phone" (Figure 62) is a portable system of
"telephonic" communication for use at emergencies
where portable radio communication is unsatisfactory, or
additional means of communication are desired.
The system is a "sound power" system where no outside
energy source is required. The voice of the operator
essentially provides the power for the transmission.
Handsets and headsets are connected into the system
through the use of "alligator clips" or audio plugs.
Figure 62
.69 Sprinkler Kit
A sprinkler kit is carried on truck companies, squad
companies, stand-by salvage companies and some
engine companies. The kit contains the following items:
sprinkler heads, sprinkler head shut-off, sprinkler head
wrenches, globe valves, nipples, couplings and
reducers, easy-outs, and pipe plugs.
Sprinkler Heads:
Standard sprinklers heads are, made for installation in
an upright (Figure 63-A) or pendant (Figure 63B)
position and must be installed in the position for which
they are designed. It is customary to replace old-type
sprinklers with standard sprinklers in existing
installations. The old-type sprinklers are not stocked by
the Department.
Sprinkler heads vary in temperature rating-with the
average being 165', When replacing heads, select those
with the proper temperature rating for the area involved.

6/2-01.69
Figure 63
Sprinkler Head Shut-off (Shultz):
The sprinkler head shut-off is a tool used for closing a
ruptured sprinkler r head without shutting down the
entire system when there is a delay in locating or
gaining access to the control valve. There are two
methods of using this shut-off. The plug on one end can
be wedged into the sprinkler orifice Figure 1 64-A). The
duckbill on the other end (Figure 64-B) is expanded
within the sprinkler head cage. In both applications,
rubber must seat against orifice.
Page 23
Figure 64
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Sprinkler Head Wrenches:
Because various types of sprinkler heads, several types
of sprinkler head wrenches are provided (Figure 65).
These include flush-type sprinkler head wrenches, pipe
wrenches, spud wrenches and crescent wrenches.
Figure 65
Globe Valve:
A globe valve with a nipple (Figure 66) may be used to
control the flow of water from a sprinkler head outlet
without shutting down the sprinkler system. To use this
valve, the ruptured sprinkler head is removed from the
system; the globe valve is opened and screwed into the
outlet and then shut off, thereby controlling the flow of
water.
Figure 66
If necessary a sprinkler head not fused can then be
installed on the globe valve. If this is done, the globe
valve is reopened to place this sprinkler head into
temporary service.

Nipples, Couplings and Reducers:
Varying sizes of Nipples, Couplings and Reducers are
carried in the sprinkler kit. They may be used in various
combination to control the flow of water while system is
being placed back-in service.
An example of their use would be the replacing of a
flush-type sprinkler system (Figure 67-A) back into
temporary service by the use of a standard sprinkler
head and appropriate fittings (Figure 67-B).
Figure 67
Easy-Out:
Easy-out (Figure 68) is a tool which is used to remove
male fittings from female connections when purchase on
the male fitting cannot be obtained with .a wrench, i.e.,
broken off sprinkler head.
Figure 68
Pipe Plugs and Caps:
Threaded fittings (Figure 69) of various sizes used to
stop the flow of water.
Page 24
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 69
6/2-01.70
.70 Squeegee
Squeegees (Figure 70) are used during salvage
operations to remove water. The Department uses two
types: a 36" curved type is used only to push and a 24"
straight type that can be used to push or pull water.
Figure 70
.71 Staple Gun
The staple guns used on-the Department are of two
types, squeeze and hammer. They are used to secure
plastic over window frames, holes in roofs, etc., with a
minimal amount of damage to finish and moldings.
.72 Straps
Carrying Straps:
Equipment carrying straps are similar in appearance to
safety straps. Equipment carrying straps shall not be
used as safety straps.
Nylon Straps:
Nylon straps are 1" wide and are available in varying
lengths.

6/2-01.73
Straps are carried on tops and bottoms of straight
ladders and the tops and bottoms of the fly section of
extension ladders. They are used to strap, fly and main
sections together, the tops of ladders to objectives, to
improvise step ladders, secure miscellaneous
equipment and control hoselines.
In order to secure straps, the bitter end of the straps
must be passed back through the buckle, and a half
hitch tied around the entire strap.
Safety Straps:
Straps for use on tailboards and aerial ladders are
equipped with snap hooks that lock automatically
(Figure 71). Safety straps used for personnel shall not
be used for carrying equipment.
Figure 71
.73 Submersible Pump
The submersible pump, ("Prosser"), (Figure 72) is a
small electric, lightweight water-pumping unit that will
operate completely submerged in water. It has 1 ½”
male hose connections at both ends. The strainer
screws onto the bottom. Water is discharged through a 1
½" hose connected to the top outlet. An 1 ½" to 2 ½"
increaser is provided with a 2 ½" by 2 ½” elbow to
permit use of a larger discharge line.
Page 25
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 72
After completing pumping operations with the
("Prosser") submersible pump, or as soon after as
practical, backflush the pump. This simple operation will
wash out most of the debris that might be trapped in the
pump. If allowed to dry without flushing, debris can seize
the impeller, causing the pump to malfunction the next
time it is used.
This unit shall not be operated from a portable generator
of less than 2500 watts due to starting current
requirements. The switch box located near the plug end
of the electrical cord shall not be submerged. It should
be kept-as dry as possible to prevent damage to pump,
or electrical injury to the operator.

.74 Summer Belt
A summer belt (Figure 73) is a safety belt used in
conjunction with the safety strap. Members shall wear
the summer belt while riding on the tailboard or
operating on the aerial, when a turnout coat is not in
use.
Figure 73
.75 Utility Knife
The retractable razor utility knife, issued to each
member, is used for cutting carpet, salvage cord,
overstuff material, plastic, etc. Spare blades are kept in
the handle.
.76 Utility Shut-Off Tool
Tool (Figure 74) used to operate subsurface valves of
gas and water lines.
Page 26
Figure 74
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-01.74
.77 Water Vacuum
The Water-Vac (Figure 75) is an electrically operated
canister water vacuum used to de-water floors. It will
remove water from carpets and areas where the water is
not deep enough to be picked-up by a submersible
pump or siphon ejector. A drain on the bottom can be
opened or the power head may be removed to drain the
8 gal. holding tank.
Figure 75
.78 Wire Basket Stretcher ("Stokes Litter
Basket")
The wire basket stretcher (Figure 76) is used to move an
injured person to a place of safety. It is equipped with a
metal skid located on its underside to prevent any
snagging while the basket is being pulled through brush,
debris, etc. A wire-rope bridle is provided for suspending
the stretcher from a life line. Safety straps are
pre-connected and are to be used whenever a patient is
in the stretcher. For more information see Training
Bulletin 10.
Figure 76

6/2-01.79
.79 Wire Cutters
Wire cutters (Figure 77) are used on ordinary steel rods
and wire Up to 3/16" in diameter. They are not to be
used on electrically charged wires, padlocks or
case-hardened metal stock.
Page 27
Figure 77
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.80 Wooden Wedge Multi-Purpose
The wooden wedge (Figure 78) is a versatile tool used
for blocking open doors and windows.
Two wedges may be used to temporarily plug fused
sprinkler heads.
Figure 78

-02. APPLIANCES
The LAFD uses a variety of appliances to manage and
control emergencies and extinguish fires. These include:
Foam Educators
Wet Water Proportioner
Wet Water spray applicator (Wet Water Anti-Siphon
Sprayer)
Distributors
Siphon Ejectors
Ladderpipes
Portable Monitors
Wagon Batteries
.01 Foam Educators
Foam nozzles consist of a pick-up tube and application
barrel with metering orifice and defusing vanes. They
are used in conjunction with 5 gal. containers of AFFF
("light water") and ATC(Alcohol Type Concentrate) when
applying foam to flammable liquid spills and fires.
(Figure 1)
Figure 1
Light water is a synthetic foam forming liquid designed
to be used at a ratio of six (6) parts concentrate to 94
parts fresh or seawater (6% solution). It is more than
three times as effective as protein type foams on open
surface gasoline fires.
AFFF should not be used on Polar solvents, i.e.,
Acetone, Methyl Ethyl Keytone, etc. ATC (Alcohol Type
Concentrate) should be used instead. An adequate
supply of ATC d special educators used to apply it are
kept in reserve by the Department.
Page 28
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-02.01
ATC is applied in a similar manner as AFFF. For
additional information refer to Training Bulletin 15 and
27.
Figure 2
.02 Wet Water Proportioner
The Wet Water Proportioner automatically meters a
wetting agent into a Fire Stream.(Figure 2)
Additional equipment includes a 2 ½ gallon pressurized
refill tank.
The Wet Water Proportioner is a direct demand,
variable flow proportioner designed to accommodate
water flows and pressures of fire fighting streams. The
addition of a wetting agent lessens surface tension of
water increasing its ability to penetrate. The Wet Water
Proportioner is used when penetration of water into a
material is desired. It is used extensively in overhaul, i.
e., shingles, baled goods and most Class A
combustibles. The wetting agent is very corrosive and
slippery, so care must be exercised around personnel
and apparatus.
Maintenance:
All lines should be thoroughly flushed with fresh water
after use.
.03 Wet Water Anti-Siphon Sprayer
The Wet Water Anti-Siphon Sprayer (Figure 3) is used
for the application of wet water in situations where the
use of the Wet Water Proportioner would be impractical.
It consist of a flared tipped metering nozzle with cup
attached (flared tip should be removed when straight
stream is desired). It is normally used by attaching to a
garden hose. The metering disk is normally set at #1
and approximately 40psi is supplied to the sprayer.

6/2-02.07
.07 2 ½” Portable Monitors
Portable monitors are heavy stream appliances used in
a similar manner as wagon batteries, ladderpipes, or
water towers.
Monitors are normally provided with a 2 ½” intake
manifold with clapper valves. 1 ½”, 1 ¾” and 2" tips are
provided.
Normally, one 3 ½" line is connected to a 3 ½" to 2 ½"
gated wye. Then two 2 ½" lines with shut-offs are
connected to the monitor's intake manifold. This
provides sufficient water for effective streams.
Because of the nozzle reaction created by the large
stream, considerations must be given to stabilizing the
appliance. The nozzle should be directed. toward the
fire before opening the shut-offs.
2 ½" Portable Monitor-Platform Description:
A. Main Body: 3 packing at joints, handles to
carry-hand wheel-rack and worm gear for
elevation.
B. Manifold Inlet: 3 swivel females with clapper
valves.
C. Barrel: uses diffusing vanes to shape stream.
D. Platform
1. Three parts hinged, with cleats on bottom to
minimize movement of platform when
operating.
2. Barrel should be in-line with platform hinges for
maximum stability.
3. Because of nozzle reaction it may be necessary
to stand on platform.
NOTE: The platform monitor is equipped with a hand
wheel for control of the nozzle in a vertical plane.
Control in the horizontal plane is accomplished by
moving the nozzle from side to side manually.
2 ½" Portable Monitor-Light Weight. (Figure 7)
Description:
A . Main body: hand wheel-rack and worn gear for
elevation.
B. Manifold Inlet: two swivel females with clapper
valves.
C. Barrel: uses diffusing vanes to shape stream
NOTE: Some appliances come without a barrel.
The diffusing vanes will be found in the tips of
these units.
D. Legs: designed to stabilize appliance.
E. Tie Down Chain: when provided; utilized to
stabilize monitor against nozzle reaction.
Page 31
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 7
NOTE: Equipped with a hand wheel for control of the
nozzle in a vertical plane. The elevation lock limits
vertical travel of barrel. Operating appliance outside
those limits may cause monitor to become unstable.
Horizontal rotation is a full 360 degrees. Rotational lock
holds the nozzle in position when horizontal movement
is not desired.

.08 Wagon Batteries
Wagon batteries are large monitors permanently
mounted on pumping apparatus (Figure 8) for use where
powerful streams or large volumes of water may be
necessary. These batteries are generally provided with
tips ranging from 1 ½" to 2". Some special apparatus
have batteries with larger tips.
Page 32
Figure 8
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-02.08
Normally, apparatus will supply their wagon batteries
directly through their own pump. Some apparatus have
intake manifolds mounted on each side to provide a
direct waterway to the wagon battery.
For effective results when directing the stream into
upper floors, the apparatus should be spotted a
sufficient distance away to permit the stream to enter
the building at approximately a 30-degree angle. Above
the third floor this is impractical and the effectiveness
decreases beyond this point.
When the wagon battery is to be used, sufficient
amounts of hose should be provided to permit flexibility
if it becomes necessary to move the apparatus. The
nozzle is to be directed toward the fire before it is
supplied with water.

6/2-03.01
-03. EXTINGUISHERS
.01 Air-Pressure
The air pressure type extinguisher (water gun) (Figure 1)
has a capacity of 2 ½ gallons, and is normally used on
ordinary combustibles (class A fires). The tank is
maintained under air pressure (90-110psi), which expels
the water when the valve is opened. To use; pull pin and
squeeze handle to discharge contents. More effective
use of a limited amount of water can be obtained by
placing a finger over the nozzle, creating a spray. To
refill after use, release all pressure from tank by holding
tank upside down and opening valve; unscrew threaded
ring two turns, gently break seal by rocking handle and
complete removal of ring. Refill with water. A wet water
additive may be used.
Figure 1
.02 Carbon Dioxide (C0 2)
Carbon dioxide (Figure 2) extinguishes fire primarily by
displacing or diluting the air to a point where the oxygen
content is below that necessary to sustain combustion.
Carbon dioxide is effective on fires in volatile liquids
(Class B fires), and, because of its non-conductive
characteristics, is good for use on electrical fires (Class
Q. This agent is not suitable for use on fires involving
certain metals such as aluminum and magnesium.
Page 33
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 2
Carbon dioxide is not toxic, but it may reduce the
oxygen content of the air to a point below that necessary
to sustain life. Extreme care must also be exercised
while using this agent because of the possibility of a reflash
of the burning material due to the fact the cooling
effect Of C0 2 is negligible.
At ordinary temperature and atmospheric pressure,
carbon dioxide is a gas 1 ½ times as heavy as air. It is
stored in steel cylinders under a pressure of 800 to 900
pounds. Upon release, the liquid changes to gas with an
expansion ratio of 450 to 1.
Each cylinder is protected by a safety disc which will
rupture if the extinguisher is subjected to a continued
temperature exceeding 135 degrees F.
Each cylinder has the gross (total full weight), tare
(weight of cylinder), and net (weight of contents) weights
stamped on the cylinder or on a metal band attached to
the cylinder, The type in general use by the Department
has a net content of 20 pounds Of C0 2.
Each cylinder is equipped with a quick-opening valve,
flexible high-pressure hose and a cone nozzle which
discharges the C0 2 in the form of snow. The cone
nozzle is made of dielectric material and is equipped
with an insulated grip to protect the operator from build
up of static electricity which is generated in the cone.
The discharge time of a 20pound C0 2 extinguisher is
approximately 60 seconds.
To use: pull pin and squeeze handle to discharge
contents. Best results are obtained with this type of
extinguisher by applying the snow at the base or edge of
the fire and gradually progressing forward and upward,
moving the cone slowly from side to side.

These extinguishers are maintained by weighing them
upon receipt, after each use, and at monthly intervals.
Extinguishers normally containing 20 pounds of C0 2
shall be recharged when contents have been reduced to
15 pounds or less.
.03 Dry Chemical
The dry chemical extinguisher in general use (Figure 3)
discharges 20 lbs. of dry chemical compound by means
of a pressurized inert gas. The compound consists
principally of bicarbonate of soda, which is processed to
make it free flowing.
For more information see Training Bulletin 11.
Figure 3
Dry chemical is most effective on fires involving
flammable liquids, gases and liquefied gases (Class "B"
fires).
For a comparable size extinguisher, the dry chemical is
approximately twice as effective as C0 2 on
hydrocarbon fires.
There has been successful use of dry chemical on Class
A fires, especially in textile fibers such as cotton.
However, it serves primarily to obtain very rapid control
of the fire. The surface flames are almost immediately
extinguished, but the Class A material will usually
continue to smolder. It is desirable to have water
available for final extinguishment.
A cloud of dry chemical is similar to a flame arrestor, in
that a flame cannot pass through a cloud or Particles in
proper concentration. The dry chemical can be used as
a heat screen to quickly move in
Page 34
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-03.03
on the fire for rescue purposes. If a re-flash should
occur and involve a firefighter or civilian, do not hesitate
to engulf them in a cloud of dry chemical. The dry
chemical will absorb the heat and anyone in the area
can safely walk out through the cloud.
The dry chemical in these extinguishers can also be
used to neutralize acid spills by allowing the powder to
flow gently from the nozzle and spread over the surface.
Ordinary dry chemical can be used in conjunction with
AFFF. It is ineffective on metal fires such as
magnesium and sodium.
Dry chemical is non-toxic. The normal precautions
should be taken however, when moving into confined
areas, since the oxygen content may be low. Because of
its dielectric characteristics, dry chemical can be used
safely on electrical fires. Because of its slight corrosive
and abrasive Properties, it should be used with care on
fires in fine electrical or electronic gear such as
computer equipment, telephone switchboards, etc. This
consideration, however, should be secondary to the
control of the fire. This extinguisher is operated in much
the same manner as a C02 extinguisher with a few
exceptions. The discharge time of a 20-lb. dry chemical
extinguisher with the valve fully open is ten seconds. It
can be seen that the dry chemical extinguisher can be
exhausted very rapidly. It is therefore advantageous to
alternately stop and start the flow to conserve dry
chemical. The valve should be opened fully to obtain
proper discharge and to preclude any possibility of the
valve becoming clogged. Best results are obtained with
this type extinguisher by working from the windward side
and floating dry chemical in over the fire. This can be
done by holding the nozzle about waist high, aiming-the
nozzle straight forward or slightly upward (rather than
down into the fire), then giving a short blast of dry
chemical.
The cloud floating in over the fire will absorb most of the
heat and can be used as a heat screen when fighting
large fires.
As the cloud of dry chemical floats in over the fire, a
quick follow-up action is necessary. With a side to side
sweeping action, cover the entire area of fire. With each
sweep of the nozzle, extend slightly beyond the
perimeter of the fire area to preclude any flashback.
Some passenger cars are equipped with a smaller dry
chemical extinguisher with a capacity of three to
five-pounds.

6/2-03.04
.04 Dry Powder
Combustible metal extinguishers are conventionally
referred to as dry powder extinguishers. They are
effective on certain combustible metals such as
magnesium, sodium, potassium, and sodium potassium
alloy (NAK) that create their own oxygen supply while
burning (Class "D" fires). Sometimes it is not possible to
extinguish a combustible metal fire once the metal starts
burning, but the application of a proper dry powder
extinguisher can confine and localize a fire in that
material until it burns itself out. These extinguishers are
usually carried by crash companies and have a net
capacity of 20 pounds. Extinguishers labeled for Class D
fires are not necessarily equally effective on all
combustible metal fires. Check label for proper
application.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

-04. FITTINGS
LAFD Fittings Include:
Adapters
Caps
Double Female
Double Male
Increasers
Plugs
Reducers
Siamese
Strainers
Wyes
Fittings are identified in order by:
1. Size: female first-male last
2. Direction Of Flow
To indicate a direction of flow, use the word
"TO", example: 2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer. If there is no
direction of flow as in a double female or male, use the
word "BY" example: 2 ½” BY" 4", double female.
3. Name of Fitting-(wye, increaser, etc.)
It is important to note that normally we do not
add fittings, we remove them. Example: If you wish to
attach the male end of a hose to a female fitting that
has-a double male attached, (e.g., wye assembly)
simply remove the double male-don't add a double
female.
.01 Adapters
Adapters (Figure 1) are used to change from one type
thread to another type thread. They ordinarily have one
male and one female connection, which may be of the
same or different diameters, but always have different
threads. Those used by the Department have various
combinations of National Standard Thread (NST), and
Pacific-Coast Thread (PCT). (PCT adapters are
identified by yellow paint.)
Page 36
Figure 1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-04.01
The MAST-R-Adapter (Figure 2) is used to connect a
garden hose to threadless faucets damaged bibs or
small nozzle tips.
Figure 2
.02 Caps
All caps have female threads and fit over the male
threads of the opening that they cover. They are used to
protect male threads and cap appliances or other
fittings. (Figure 3)
L.A.F.D. Caps:
4" cap with winged lugs
3 ½" cap
2 ½" cap
1 ½" cap
1" cap
.03 Double Female
A DOUBLE FEMALE fitting (Figure 3) has female
threads on each end and is used to connect two male
couplings. The threads may be the same, or different
sizes. Those in current use are 1", 1 ½", 2 ½”, 2 ½" x 4",
3 ½", and 4".
Figure 3

6/2-04.04
.04 Double Male
A DOUBLE MALE fitting (Figure 4) has male threads on
each end and is used to connect two female couplings.
Those currently used by this Department are 1", 1 ½", 2
½", 3 ½", and 4".
Figure 4
.05 Increaser
An INCREASER (Figure 5) is a fitting with female
threads on one end and male threads on the other. It is
used to connect a smaller male coupling to a larger
female coupling. Those currently used are ¾" to 1", 1" to
1 ½", 1 ½" to 2 ½", 2 ½" to 3 ½", 2 ½" to 4", and 3 ½" to
4".
Figure 5
.06 Plugs
All plugs have male threads and fit into the female
threads of the opening that they plug. They are used to
protect female threads and plug appliances or fittings.
Sizes-2 ½" and 3 ½"
Some come with handles.
Page 37
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.07 Reducers
A REDUCER (Figure 6) is a fitting with female threads
on one end and male threads on the other. It is used to
connect a larger male coupling to a smaller female
coupling. Those in current use are 1" to ¾", 1 ½" to ¾",
1 ½" to 1", 2 ½" to ¾", 2" to 1", 2 ½" to 1 ½" 3 ½" to 2
½", 4" to 2 ½", and 4" to 3 ½".
Figure 6
.08 Siamese
A SIAMESE (Figure 7) is a fitting with two or more
connections having female threads and one connection
having male threads. They are used to merge two or
more lines into one line. The male threads may be
larger or the same size as the females. It may or may
not have clapper valves. In current use is a 2 ½"
siamese
Figure 7

.09 Wyes
A WYE (Figure 8) is any fitting with one connection that
has female threads and two connections that have male
threads. They are used to divide one hose line into two
lines. It may or may not be gated. The male threads
may be smaller than, or the same size as, the female.
Those in current use are 1" to 1", 1 ½" to 1", 1 ½" to 1
½", 2 ½" to 1 ½", 2 ½" to 2 ½", 3 ½" to 2 ½", 3 ½" to 3
½", and 4" to 2 ½"
Figure 8
NOTE: Siamese and wye fittings are often confused.
They are not the same. They may be used to perform
the same job under certain circumstances, but this in no
way changes their designations.
Page 38
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-04.09

6/2-05.01
-05. MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
.01 Backboard
The "long" backboard (Figure 1A) is a narrow, varnished
plywood board, used to immobilize patients with
suspected cervical or spinal injuries. It also provides a
firm surface for the application of CPR.
Figure 1A
The short backboard (Figure 1B) is a short narrow
varnished plywood board used to fully immobilize
infants, or immobilize patients with suspected cervical or
spinal injuries in a sitting position. It also provides a firm
surface for application of CPR.
Page 39
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 1B
.02 Miller Board
Made of strong, buoyant type plastic with Velcro straps
(Figure 2) Used to immobilize patients with suspected
spinal injuries or in extrication circumstances (i.e. cliff
and mountain rescues). May be used in conjunction with
the stokes litter basket.
Figure 2

.03 Disaster Litter
The Disaster Litter (Figure 3) is made of canvas or vinyl.
It is used as a stretcher to transport patients through
narrow hallways or stairwells where the gurney or flat
stretcher is not practical.
Figure 3
.04 Flat Stretcher
A folding stretcher (Figure 4) that is used in areas that
are not accessible to the gurney, or to aid in the
transportation of more than one patient in the
ambulance.
Page 40
Figure 4
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-05.03
.05 Gurney
A wheeled, collapsible stretcher used in the
transportation of patients to and from the ambulance.
The gurney can be adjusted into various sitting and lying
positions. It is secured to the floor of the ambulance by
means of a locking device. (Figure 5)
Figure 5
.06 Hare Traction Splint
Used to apply traction and splint a mid-shaft femur
fracture. Both adult and pediatric sizes are carried.
(Figure 6)
Figure 6

6/2-05.07
.07 Military Anti-Shock Trouser-MAST Suit
Inflatable trousers used to limit blood flow to the
abdomen and the lower extremities. The MAST is used
-on patients who have experienced a critical decrease in
blood pressure due to a medical or traumatic incident.
Both adult and pediatric sizes are available (Figure 7).
Figure 7
.08 Resuscitator/Inhalator
A mechanical device, when attached to an oxygen tank,
delivers oxygen to patients. The resuscitator/ inhalator
may be used with airway adjuncts to provide positive
pressure oxygen treatment, or with the flow meter and
nasal cannulas to passively deliver oxygen (Figure 8).
Page 41
Figure 8
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.09 Laryngoscope
A battery powered illuminating device used with McGill
forceps to visualize the vocal chords of an unconscious
patient with an obstructed airway. Additionally the
device is used by Paramedics to assist in the placement
of the endotracheal tube
(Figure 9).
Figure 9
.10 McGill Forceps
Long tweezers like tool (Figure 10) used to grasp foreign
objects obstructing the airway. It is used in conjunction
with the Laryngoscope.
Figure 10

6/2-05.11
.11 Endotracheal Tube-E.T. Tube
A long plastic tube-like device (Figure 11) used to
maintain the best possible airway in an unconscious
patient in respiratory distress. It is inserted into the
trachea, allowing direct access to and ventilation of the
lungs. Ventilation is achieved only through use of the
bag-valve-mask.
Figure 11
.12 Esophageal Obturator Airway-E. O. A.
A long plastic tube, when inserted into the esophagus,
directly blocks access to and egress from the stomach.
The E.O.A. provides indirect protection of the airway by
preventing spillage of stomach contents into the trachea
(Figure 12).
Page 42
Figure 12
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.13 Oropharyngeal Airways
Simple piece of plastic (Figure 13) inserted into the
mouth and pharynx of unconscious patients to help
maintain an open airway. It is useful as bite block, and
may be used in conjunction with the endotracheal tube.
Figure 13
.14 Bag-Valve-Mask
A mechanical device used to ventilate patients in
respiratory distress (Figure 14).
Figure 14

6/2-05.15
.15 Ohmeda Suction Device
A rechargeable battery powered device used to suction
viscous foreign matter from the mouth and pharynx
(Figure 15).
Figure 15
.16 Monitor Defibrillator
A. LifePak 5
Used to monitor the electric representation of cardiac
activity, and to manually administer an electric shock to
a non-beating or arrhythmic heart (defibrillator). It may
be used with the bio phone or phone patch to transmit
EKG's to the base hospital. Used by Paramedics only
(Figure 16A).
Page 43
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 16A
B. LifePak 200
A semi-automatic defibrillator without a monitor used by
the EMT-D health care provider. The LifePak 200
Provides automatic interpretation of cardiac activity and
automated cues to assist in delivery of electrical shock
to the non-beating heart (Figure 1613).
Figure 16B

.17 Cardio Trak
A small electronic device which allows transmission of
EKG activity to the base hospital over the telephone
(Figure 17A).
Figure 17A
Phone Patch:
An electronic device which allows transmission of EKG
activity to the base hospital over the telephone (Figure
17B).
Figure 17B
.18 Bio phone
A radio which allows Paramedics to communicate with
the base hospital and transmit EKG's as necessary
(Figure 18).
Page 44
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 18
6/2-05.17
.19 Intravenous Solution-IV's
Administered to patients by inserting a needle into the
vein followed by a connection of plastic tubing between
the needle and IV container. May serve as a vehicle for
the administration of medication or provide "volume
expansion." Volume expansion is instituted in trauma
cases to replace lost blood. In these cases the IV fluid
itself is the medication (Figure 19).
Figure 19

6/2-05.20
.20 Obstetrics Kit-O.B. Kit
Sterile kit used for emergency childbirth. The kit is to be
disposed of after use (Figure 20).
Figure 20
.21 Starter Kit
A supply kit that carries an assortment of medical tools
and drugs needed for advanced life support of the
medically ill patient (Figure 21).
Figure 21
.22 Supply Box (Back Box)
A large portable box containing medical supplies and
controlled medications. This box is kept locked at all
times when not in use (Figure 22).
Page 45
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 22
.23 Trauma Kit
Supply kit containing bandages, dressings and other
materials used to initiate first-aid treatment to trauma
patients (Figure 23).
Figure 23

.24 Lock Box
A small box attached to the rear bumper of an
ambulance containing keys to the ambulance. It can
only be opened with a special key (Figure 24).
Page 46
Figure 24
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-05.24
.25 Medication Lock Box
A small metal box, secured to the interior of the rescue
ambulance, which holds controlled medication. It is to
remain locked at all times when not in use (Figure 25).
Figure 25

6/2-06.01
-06. NOZZLES
There are two basic types of nozzles, straight stream
and spray. Their purpose is to create and control the
type of fire stream desired.
.01 Straight Stream Nozzles
A complete straight stream nozzle consists of a shutoff
combined with a removable tip. Both ends of the
shut-off are equipped with hose threads-one male and
one female.
Straight stream nozzles increase velocity and give
shape and continuity to the fire stream. They are
particularly preferred for:
a) penetration
b) deep seated fires
c) quick knock down
d) long distances
Typical straight stream nozzles (Figure 1) in general use
on hand lines range in the following sizes:
Shut-off Tips
2” 1", 1 1/8" 1 ¼ "
Figure 1
.02 Spray Nozzles
Water has a greater cooling effect when applied in the
form of a spray rather than a straight stream. A given
quantity of water divided into smaller particles presents
greater surface area for more rapid heat absorption.
When properly applied, a spray stream uses practically
all of the water in quenching and cooling.
Discharge from a spray nozzle may provide a flow of air
toward the fire. While this may increase the intensity of
the fire, it has the advantage of providing a flow of cool
air at the nozzle.
If properly used, spray nozzles will control flammable
liquid fires.
Spray nozzles can be used on fires in transformers and
other electrically charged equipment. Finely divided
drops of water offer greater resistance to
Page 47
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
the flow of electricity than straight streams. It is always
preferable to cut off the current to electrically charged
equipment before applying water.
Spray nozzles can use considerably less water than
straight stream nozzles to effect the same results
because of the added effectiveness of water applied in
-the form of a spray. They are therefore, well suited for
use in situations where the supply of water is limited.
There may be a tendency to use less water per minute
with spray nozzles than with straight stream nozzles.
Spray nozzles have less nozzle reaction than straight
stream nozzles under similar conditions.
The disadvantage of spray streams may include loss of
water through evaporation, dissipation by wind currents,
inability to span great distances, loss of striking power
and penetration.
When selecting the type of fire stream at each particular
fire, the above factors (along with many others) must be
taken into consideration.
Spray nozzle:
A single unit nozzle consisting of shut off and tip.
Complete spray nozzle:
A two piece unit consisting of a shut-off butt and a
removable spray tip. Both types have spray tips with an
"off 'position and adjustable spray settings. Some also
have an adjustable rate of flow.
Typical spray nozzles (Figure 2) in general use on hand
lines range in the following sizes (refers to size of
shut-off): 2", 1 ½", 1" and garden hose.
Figure 2

.03 Shut-off Butts
Shut-off butts (Figure 3) are used to provide a method
of controlling the flow of water. Sizes include 2", 1 ½"
and 1".
Page 48
Figure 3
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-06.03

6/2-07.01
-07. VALVES
The following valves are used to control the flow of
water and are the most common in use by L.A.F.D.
1. Four-Way Valve (Blake)
2. Keystone Valve
3. Pressure Reducing Valve (Gleeson)
.01 Four Way Valve
The four-way valve (Figure 1) provides a means of
changing from hydrant pressure to pump pressure
without interrupting water supply. The valve is standard
equipment on all engine companies. It is normally used
during single company operations whenever a line is
laid from a hydrant.
Figure 1
Description:
The four-way valve has two male and two female
connections (one female provided with winged handles).
All connections have standard 2" hose threads. A 4" to 2
½" bell reducer and a 2 ½" to 3 ½" increaser are
normally carried pre-connected to the four-way. The
control lever on top of valve is used to change direction
of flow.
When connecting to a hydrant use 2 ½" outlet if
available. On a 4" double hydrant, connection should be
to the outlet that is towards the fire.
Procedures:
1. Connect the hose to either male outlet of the valve.
2. Connect the winged female swivel to the proper
hydrant outlet; use the bell reducer if necessary.
3. Shift the control lever toward the outlet to which the
hose is connected (direction of flow). (Figure 2)
Page 49
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 2
4. Open hydrant to charge supply line.
5. A pump can now utilize the hydrant and provide the
supply line with the proper pressure. (See the Apparatus
Operator Training Manual #8 for proper procedures).
.02 Keystone Valve 4"
The Keystone Valve (Figure 3) may be found preconnected
to a suction inlet on pumping apparatus. It is,
designed to control the flow of water entering the
apparatus from its source of supply.
Figure 3

.03 Pressure-Reducing Valve
The Pressure Reducing Valve (Figure 4) is used when
conditions require the reduction of high pressure water
flow. Two sizes are used by this Department21/2" and
31/2"-both operate in the same manner.
Figure 4
Pressure on the discharge side of the valve is selected
by an adjusting knob. This knob controls an indicator bar
(A of Figure 5) that is graduated from zero to 300 in 20
psi increments. These numbers indicate the pressure
that will be maintained on the discharge side of the
valve. The supply pressure must exceed the discharge
pressure in order for the valve to work properly.
Water flowing from the overflow (B of Figure 5)
indicates that sufficient pressure is available on the
supply side.
Opening the emergency petcock (C of Figure 5) will
provide an immediate shutdown.
The bleeder valve (D of Figure 5) is used to bleed the
hose line connected to the discharge side of the
reducing valve.
An oil hole (E of Figure 5) is provided for lubricating the
piston.
Page 50
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 5
6/2-07.03
Procedures for connecting reducing valve to hydrant:
1. Connect female inlet of reducing valve to
hydrant; I use reducer fitting, if necessary.
2. Connect hose or suction to male outlet of
reducing valve. If a four-way valve is to be
used, lay the four-way valve on the ground,'
connect to the reducing valve with short section
of hose.
3. Set indicator to pressure desired.
To ensure prompt operation of the valve, the
indicator should be set at the pressure desired
before turning on the supply of water. The
discharge pressure may be changed, however,
while the valve is in operation, without shutting
off the source of supply.
4. Open hydrant when the lines are in position.
Maintenance:
Flush and lubricate after use. With the valve connected
to a hydrant, set indicator on zero, cap valve outlet, and
open the hydrant. Allow the water to flow through the
overflow. Close the hydrant and disconnect the valve
from the hydrant. To lubricate, remove the oil plug and
place four or five drops of engine oil in the oil hole.
Operate the piston. For more information see Apparatus
Operator Training Manual #8.

6/2-08.01
-08. SQUAD EQUIPMENT
.01 MSA & Gastech Tri-Testers
Used to test for Hydrogen Sulfide in parts per million,
Oxygen Deficient Atmospheres from 0-30% and Lower
Explosive Limits (LEL) of a combustible atmosphere
from 0-100%. Used in most HazMat and underground
incidents.
Figure 1
.02 Emerson Air Sampling Pump and Vacuum
Tubes
The pump is designed to draw a vacuum into a glass
tube. The tube is used by the HazMat entry team
members to retrieve a hazardous vapor sample for
testing.
Figure 2
.03 Liquid Sampling Pump
The pump has a rotary action that draws a liquid sample
into disposable tubing. The sample is contained within
the tubing and does not contaminate the pump.
Page 51
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 3
.04 60 Power Telescope-8 x 24 Zoom
Binoculars-Polaroid Camera
The "60 power telescope" with tripod is used for visual
monitoring of a HazMat problem. It allows members to
read labels and placards from a safe distance.
The "8 x 24 zoom binoculars" are used by the entry
team leader to maintain visual contact with the HazMat
entry team.
The “Polaroid camera" is used by the HazMat entry
team to take pictures of the problem for further
evaluation.
Figure 4

.05 Hazardous Materials Patch Kit
Designed for use on small cracks, punctures, and tears
on pipes and containers. The kit contains different types
and sizes of plugging devices. This includes plugs and
wedges of foam, wood, neoprene rubber and also glue
and strapping devices.
Figure 5
.06 Non-Sparking Hazardous Materials Tools
Brass and aluminum hand tools designed for use in
flammable atmospheres. Tools include hammers, pipe
wrenches, adjustable wrenches, screwdriver, pliers, etc.
Page 52
Figure 6
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
6/2-08.05
.07 Chlorine Cylinder Patch Kits-A, B and C
Clamps and tools used for patching leaks in chlorine
containers. Kit sizes: A Kit-100 and 150 lb. cylinders, B
Kit-One ton containers, C Kit Railroad cars and tank
trucks (C Kit-Figure 7).
Figure 7
.08 Tanker Drilling Kit
Designed for drilling and off-loading overturned tank
trucks. Kit includes air drill with 3 ¼" bit, grounding
cables, cribbing, redwood plugs, hose couplers and the
3' diameter 8' stinger. Pump trucks are also used for this
operation.
Figure 8

6/2-08.09
.09 Decontamination Solutions Kit
Kit contains five chemical solutions. These solutions are
used with water to neutralize chemical contamination
due to exposure to hazardous materials. These solutions
can be used on member's exposure as well as
equipment exposure.
Figure 9
10 Hazardous Materials Sampling Kit
The items in this kit are used by entry team members to
take solid and liquids samples of chemicals in
contamination zones. Also contained in this kit are the
Kitigawa, Gastect and Drager pumps that are used to
measure levels of air contamination of known
chemicals. Litmus paper is used to test for acid and
base levels of samples.
Page 53
Figure 10
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.11 Hazardous Materials Gloves
Entry team members wear a minimum of three layers of
gloves.
First layer-Latex
Second layer-Viton or Butyl (attached to entry suit)
Third, layer-Nitrite or equivalent
In addition to the three layers, a thermal glove is added
when handling cryogenics. A PBI knit aluminized glove
is used as the fourth glove when wearing a flash suit in
flammable atmospheres.
Figure 11

.12 Hazardous Materials Jumpsuits (Red)
The material is 100% Nomex and is worn by members
of HazMat Squads and Task Forces. Only members with
jumpsuits are allowed in the Contamination Reduction
Area. Jumpsuits are required to be worn under all types
of entry or decontamination suits.
Figure 12
.13 Maps for Drainage’s, Sewers and Pipelines
Drainage maps are used to trace hazardous materials
as they flow down streets and flood control channels.
Sewer maps trace the flow in sewer lines. Pipeline maps
give location, direction of flow and ownership of
petroleum pipelines within City limits.
Page 54
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Figure 13
6/2-08.12
.14 Filtration Mask, Scott
Designed for use on low level hazardous materials.
Interchangeable cartridges for materials such as:
ammonia, chlorine, sulfur dioxide, dusts, fumes, mists,
etc.
Figure 14
.15 Hazardous Materials Entry Suits
(Class A & B)
Class A-Totally encapsulated entry suit
Material-Viton, butyl, Teflon, Etc.
Used for unknown and serious chemical hazards.
Class B-Hooded jumpsuit
Material-PVC
Used for some types of acids and other more minor
chemicals. Breathing apparatus is worn on the outside
of suit.
Disposable suits
Material-Tyvek/Saranex or similar

6/2-08.16
Fully encapsulated or hooded jumpsuit. Discarded on
scene.
Figure 15
.16 Hazardous Materials Flash Suit
Material-PBI knit aluminized Worn over entry suit if
there is concern of a possible flash fire.
Page 55
Figure 16
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.17 CAMEO
Cameo (Computer Aided Management of Emergency
Operations) is a computer program designed and built
by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration (NOAA) to assist emergency response
personnel with handling hazardous material incidents.
The program has many modules, but the three most
important are Code breaker, Response Information, and
ALOHA. The Code breaker module will search through
over 2,500 chemicals for a match on partial information.
Response information provides a concise listing of
emergency response considerations for each of the
chemicals. The ALOHA module can forecast a gaseous
chemical dispersion, or footprint, based on weather
conditions and the amount spilled.
CAMEO systems are assigned to all the Hazardous
Material Squad companies and the Hazardous Material
Section of the Fire Prevention Bureau.
Figure 17

6/3-01.01 Page 1
(12-00)
SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS - GENERAL (SCBA)
-01. SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS - GENERAL (SCBA)
Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus includes those apparatus in which the wearer carries their
own air supply that is entirely independent of the outside atmosphere. Compressed air is
contained in a cylinder. High pressure air (up to 5,000 psi) is reduced by the first and second
stage regulator to a breathable pressure. Exhaled air is exhausted to the outside via the mask.
The air cylinder is attached to the back pack which contains both regulators. The mask is
carried in a pocket on the member's turnout coat.
The L.A.F.D uses the Survivair Panther SCBA. The Panther SCBA is designed to provide the
wearer with respiratory protection while working in hazardous atmospheres. This unit may be
used for entry into and escape from hazardous or oxygen deficient atmospheres. This unit will
NOT provide protection against gasses, mists or vapors which are skin absorbed (e.g.
hydrocyanic acid).
.01 DESCRIPTION: The SCBA consists of 9 major component groups:
1 . Back pack and harness assembly
2. First stage reducer / Bell alarm system
3. Second stage regulator
4. PASS device and Rear PASS enunciator.
5. Digital pressure readout / Audio alarm system.
6. Buddy breathing connection.
7. Face piece with handi-talkie interface radio and voice amplification systems.
8. Firefighting hood
9. Escape filter cartridge

6 / 3 - Page 2
(12-00)
02. BACK PACK AND HARNESS: The back pack (Figure #1) consists of a
flexible lightweight contoured polymer frame with carrying handles and a
Kevlar/Nomex adjustable cylinder band. Harness shoulder and waist straps are
Made of a Kevlar/Nomex material. The back pack is designed to allow full freedom
of motion when bending, stooping and crawling, etc.
Intermediate Pressure Hose
High Pressure Hose
Buddy Breathing
Connection
Digital Pressure
Readout
Carrying Handle,.
Back Pack and Harness
Kevlar Nomex Harness
Holster
Rear Pass Annunciator
Pass Device

6/3 - Page 3
(12-0-0 )
The air cylinder utilizes an aluminum composite carbon fiber construction overwrapped
with a fiberglass epoxy matrix and has a maximum . A pressure indicator, built into the
cylinder valve, indicates the pressure of air currently in the cylinder. The gauge is
graduated in 1000 psi. increments ranging from 0 to 6000 psi. A cylinder
that is full (bottle range 4000-5000 psi.) is identified
on the gauge in green. There are two sizes of air
cylinders; 45-minute and 60-minute. When full, the
cylinders contain 65.6 and 87 cubic feet of air
respectively and will provide air supply time of 45
minutes (65.6 cu. ft.) or 60 minutes (87 cu. ft.) at a
user rate of 40 liters per minute. Actual air supply
time will vary, depending on demands of the user,
and will frequently be less.
The air cylinder (Figure #2) is hydrostatically tested
every three years. Each year, approximately 33% of
the cylinder cache requires hydrostatic testing. There
are of these cylinders for testing. Once tested, the
vendor places a decal on the cylinder identifying
year and month of test.
.03 FIRST STAGE PRESSURE
REGULATOR : BELL ALARM
LAFD Air Cylinder
LAFD
The first stage reducer (Figure #3) combines a pressure regulator and bell alarm
system in one compact assembly. The pressure regulator reduces air cylinder
pressure to approximately 90-140 psi. The audio alarm activates a bell when the
remaining usable air supply has dropped to approximately 20% - 25% of cylinder
capacity, or a cylinder pressure of approximately 1000-1225 psi

6/3 - Page 4
(12-00)
In addition, there is an integeral pressure-limiting device built into the first stage body, which
maintains a safe outlet pressure in case of failure within the primary regulator (due to wear,
corrosion, damage, etc.). If failure of the first stage
Bell Housing
First Stage Reducer/Bell Alarm
elief Valve
Hand Wheel
regulator occurs, the regulator will fail in the "open" position and the audio bell will sound at a
faster rate (rapid clicking) to alert the user that a failure occurred. The user is able to continue
breathing at normal respiratory rates. If this occurs, notify your partner and immediately
exit the hazardous environment.
There is one high-pressure hose leading from the first stage regulator to the digital pressure
display. Should the first stage regulator fail, the air supply to this hose is restricted at the
regulator to prevent dangerous and rapid loss of air supply. The high-pressure hose consists
of two parts, an inner hose and outer rubber jacket.

6/3 - Page 5
(12-00)
The outer rubber jacket has tiny pinholes to allow detection of an air leak in the inner hose.
.04 SECOND STAGE REGULATOR:
The second stage regulator (Figure #4) reduces the air pressure received from the first stage
regulator to just above atmospheric pressure. The regulator is carried in a holster mounted on
the left waist belt. (Figure #1)
The regulator mounts to the face piece in a “quick-connect” fashion. An audible click
indicates the regulator is locked in place. To begin "on-air" breathing, inhale or press the
manual override button.
Intermediate
Pressure Hose
Figure #4
Second Stage Regulator
Release
Button
Male Quick
Connect Fitting
Bypass Valve
Shut-Off
Button
Manual
Override
Bypass valve: The red bypass valve is capable of supplying a maximum of 130 liters of air per
minute, depending on how far the valve is turned. This valve has a

6/3- Page 6
(12-00)
detent to prevent accidental activation of the bypass. Turn the valve. counterclockwise until you
feel the detent. No air will flow until the valve is turned past this detent. The bypass valve can
be used when needed to provide a flow of air above atmospheric pressure and will
consequently reduce the duration of air supply to the user.
Manual override button: The manual override provides the user with a burst of air and also
will manually turn the regulator on. The user can clear "fogging” from inside the face piece
using this burst of air.
Release buttons: The blue release buttons are used to remove the regulator from the holster
and face piece. When removing the regulator from the face piece, first press the black shut-off
button to turn off positive pressure. Both blue release buttons must be pressed
simultaneously to remove the regulator.
Shut-off button: The black shut-off button is located opposite the bypass valve. This button is
pressed before removing the regulator from the face piece to shut off airflow.

.05 PERSONAL ALERT SAFETY SYSTEM – (PASS):
6/3- Page 7
(12-00)
The PASS device is built into the Panther SCBA and is a "dual alarm system”. The main PASS
is located on the left shoulder strap (Figure #5.). A Rear PASS enunciator is mounted on the
back of the backpack to the left of the air cylinder (Figure #6).
Braided
Steel Cable
Activation
Button
Alarm
Speaker
Pass Device
Figure #5
Intermediate
Pressure Hose
.Ready LED
Visual LED Alarm
Note: The steel braided cable running from the PASS device to the Rear PASS enunciator
protects the electric wires that run between the PASS device and the Rear Pass enunciator.

6/3 - Page 8
(12-00)
Figure #6
Steel Braided
Cable
Visual LED
Alarm
Rear Pass Annunciator
Mounting
Bracket
Audible
Alarm
Activation: The PASS can be activated manually by pressing once on the switch, or
automatically when the air cylinder is opened. When activated automatically, the air supply
forces a switch located inside the PASS to turn on the PASS. The PASS uses air pressure only
to activate the system, not to generate the alarm. The PASS system cannot be turned off when
air pressure is in the system and will not automatically deactivate when air cylinder pressure is
exhausted.
In an “Emergency Traffic” situation, the user can activate the alarm mode of the PASS at any
time by depressing the manual switch for two seconds until the alarm sounds.
The PASS initially alerts the user at approximately 20-seconds when motionless. If no motion is
detected, the pre-alrm will sound for 10-seconds before activation of the intermediate alarm. If
no motion is detected following activation of the intermediate alarm, the PASS will activate the
full alarm signal. If motion is detected prior to full alarm activation, the PASS will automatically
reset.
The PASS has three alarm signals; pre-alarm, intermediate and full alarm. Each alarm has
multiple audible and visual alarm signals. They are distinguished by volume, duration,
frequency of occurance, and LED signature. The following is a break down of the various
signals.

6/3 - Page 9
(12-00)
Actuation Signal: When the PASS is activated, either manually or pneumatically, it emits one double
ascending tone accompanied by a single alternating flash of three green LED's on the main PASS unit and
one flashing LED on the Rear PASS Enunciator. These LED's will continue to alternately flash while the
PASS is activated during non-alarm operation.
Pre-Alarm Signal: The pre-alarm signal emits an alternating "high/low" tone, which increases in volume. The
LED's on the main PASS will flash, alternating between three green and three red flashing signals. The Rear
PASS Enunciator will continue to flash a single green LED.
Alarm Signal: If no motion is detected for approximately 30 seconds the PASS will enter the full alarm mode.
The full alert audible alarm is distinct and has greater volume then other alarms signals. Three red LED's will
alternately flash on the main PASS, with one red flashing LED on the Rear PASS Enunciator.
Deactivation: To deactivate the PASS in the full alarm mode, press the manual switch twice within two
seconds. A double tone will sound and the PASS will reset. To turn the PASS completely off, close the
cylinder valve and bleed all air from the system, then press the manual switch twice within two seconds
Low Battery Signal: The PASS operates using a 9-volt battery in both the main unit and Rear PASS
enunciator. If a low battery is detected, the PASS will sound a single warning tone every 15 seconds and
flash an amber light 2 times per second. Once the low battery signal alarm activates, the pass can operate in
the full alarm for at least 1 hour. (See section on Maintenance for battery replacement procedure). Replace
both batteries if the low battery alarm is activated. The low battery signal will only sound a warning while
the PASS is "ON".

6/3 - Page 10
(12-00)
The Digital Pressure Readout provides two pressure displays. One display indicates airtime remaining
and the second display shows air cylinder psi. A low-pressure warning and low battery alert are
presented visually and audibly.
Air Time
Remaining
System Test and
Battery Check
Digital PSI
Reading
Three-Stage
Audible Alarm
Digital Pressure Readout
Bar Graph
Cylinder PSI
Electroluminescent
Backlight Button
Three-Stage
Visual Alarm
Low air cylinder pressure is indicated in two ways. The display provides a digital
pressure reading (small number at bottom of display) and a graduated bar graph
showing incremental decreases in cylinder pressure. It also projects remaining
breathing air supply duration in minutes, ( large numbers in center of display) based on
the current demand of air from the user and the air psi remaining in the cylinder. Both
cylinder psi and duration time are re-evaluated and updated every 5 seconds
(Figure 7).
Air cylinder pressure warnings are made at 50%, 25% and 10% of remaining psi. At
50% of cylinder psi, one audible tone will sound with an LED flash per second for 10
seconds. At 25% of cylinder psi (1000 to 1225 psi), two audible tones will sound with an
LED flash per second continuously until 10% of cylinder psi remains. At 10% of
remaining cylinder psi, four audible tones will sound with an LED flash per second
continuously until there is 50 psi remaining.

6/3 - Page 11
(12-00)
The large yellow button on the side of the unit activates the backlight feature. When depressed,
the light stays on for approximately 4 seconds. The orange button on the opposite side is used to
test the system and the battery. This button will test the digital pressure readout unit and then
show the battery life as indicated by the bar graph.
.07 BUDDY BREATHING CONNECTION:
The buddy breathing connection and hose is fastened to the right-shoulder strap. Refer to
Emergency Conditions Breathing Procedure (6/3-03.02)
Snap
Buddy Breathing
Connection
Figure #8
18" Intermediate
Pressure Hose

.08 FACE PIECE / HANDI-TALKIE AND VOICE AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM:
6/3 - page 12
(12-00)
The face piece is comprised of a silicone rubber skirt, 5-point head harness or Nomex
headnet, speaking diaphragm, exhalation valve and second stage regulator "air klic" coupling.
The face piece has a removable voice amplifier and a built-in handi-talkie interface that
attaches to the Department's handi-talkie radio. (Figure #9). The facepiece lens is treated with
a fog resistant coating on the inside.
Nose Cup
Push to Talk
s
Voice Amplification
System
Amplification Knob
Face Piece
Regulator I
Quick-Connect Port
/ Exhalation Port
Headnet
Adjustment
Strap
Ear Piece
\\ PTT (Push to Talk)
Radio Connection
The regulator quick-connect coupling port can accept the second stage regulator in any
position.

6/3 - Page 13
(12-00)
The detachable voice amplification system (V.A.S.) is attached to the right side of the face piece
(Figure #9). The knob at the front turns the unit on. This knob can either be depressed for
temporary voice amplification or rotated past the detent for continuous voice amplification. The
knob at the rear controls volume. The voice amplifier automatically cuts out during outgoing
radio message transmission when the radio PTT button is depressed. The VAS unit is
removable by depressing the retention clip located at the front and sliding the unit off the
mounting bracket. When using the voice amplification system, speak clearly and do not shout.
Shouting increases distortion through the system. The system operates using a 9volt battery.
The battery is low when the red LED flashes.
Adjustment
Straps
Voice Amp!ification-
System
FACE PIECE
Volume
Radio Connection
Headnet
Lens
Nose Cup
PTT
Escape Cartridge
The handi-talkie interface system is designed to allow the user to talk and hear radio
messages clearly when connected to a portable radio. The microphone is located inside the
mask above the exhalation valve. A speaker is mounted to the left side rim near the ear and
can be pivoted toward users ear. The Push To Talk

6/3 Page 14
(12-00)
(PTT) button is located on the lower left side of the face piece. A male quick-connect
fitting with extension is mounted just below the PTT button. (Figure #9)
.09 FIRE FIGHTING HOOD:
The fire fighting hood is designed to provide protection from elevated temperatures to
the ears, face and neck of the wearer. The fire fighting hood shall be donned prior to
putting on the turnout coat. After the turnout coat is buttoned and snapped, the hood
can be pulled down around the collar when face piece is not worn.
All fire fighting members "shall" pull the hood into proper wearing position when actively
engaged in fire fighting activities, including exposure protection, ventilation operations,
automobile fires, dumpster fires and any other fire fighting activity where extra
protection is required. The fire fighting hood "shall" be deployed any time the SCBA
face piece is donned. (See face piece donning section)
At brush and grass fires, the fire fighting hood may be worn in place or in
conjunction with the helmet shroud for added protection.
The fire fighting hood shall be inspected daily and after each use. Always make a dry
hood is available for use. After a fire, wash with warm water and mild detergent to
remove normal accumulation of dirt and fire particles. Hang dry only and do not use
bleach.
.10 ESCAPE FILTER CARTRIDGE:
The escape filter cartridge (Figure #10) provides an emergency air filter, should the user
become lost or trapped in a hazardous environment and deplete air cylinder pressure.
The filter is factory sealed and designed to quick-connect on the face piece in place of
the second stage regulator. The filter does require increased effort by the user to draw
air through. Air drawn into the filter will not be cooled. In fact, some heat is generated as
carbon monoxide is converted to carbon dioxide. The cartridge will filter most toxic
gases produced through combustion, but will NOT GENERATE OXYGEN. Laboratory
testing using high levels of contaminants has shown that the filter will provide 15
minutes of protection. The actual filter life will depend on the user's breathing rate and
characteristics of the hazardous environment.
The escape filter cartridge is intended for use only in the most extreme of
circumstances when no other alternative is available. It is recommended that the filter
be carried in the turnout coat face piece pouch and secured to prevent accidental
loss. The filter is designed for "one-time" use. The filter, once

` 6/3 - Page 15
(12-00)
removed, can not be reattached to the face piece. Do not remove the filter until you
are in a safe environment or another means of fresh air becomes available (buddy
breathing, etc.). If the filter is deployed, the member must forward an F-225 to the
Bureau of Emergency Services outlining the circumstances requiring its use, with an
F-80 attached for replacement.
Practice "re-usable" escape filters are available for drill purposes from the Battalion
office.
-02. DONNING THE SELF-CONTAINED BREATING APPARATUS
.01 BACK PACK:
Several effective methods of donning the breathing apparatus back pack are
currently utilized throughout the Department. The following descriptions are not
meant to limit members to these particular methods.
1. a. Apparatus Mounting Bracket
If the SCBA is mounted in the bracket on the apparatus, don the unit by
placing your LEFT arm through the LEFT shoulder strap and your right arm
through the right shoulder strap. Grasp shoulder straps and pull away from
bracket. (Figure....)
b. Over the Head Place the cylinder on the ground with the cylinder valve
away from user. Grasp the cylinder with both hands and lift over head.
(Figure...) Release grasp and let your arms slip through the shoulder harness.
(Figure ....) Adjust shoulder straps.
c. Double Shoulder Strap Method Place the cylinder on the ground with
cylinder valve away from user. With hands palm down, grasp the right shoulder
strap with right hand and left strap with left hand. Lift the unit to your back by
turning your body as you lift, swinging one arm over your head as if donning a
coat. Let your arms slip through the shoulder straps and adjust straps. For
safety of personnel and the unit, avoid swinging in a wide arc. (Figure....)
2. To adjust the unit, bend forward and pull the shoulder adjustment straps until the
back support/waist strap rests in the small of your back. (Figure....)
3. Fasten the waist buckle. Bend slightly forward and grasp the left waist
adjustment strap with left hand and right strap with right hand. Pull forward

6/3 – Page 16
(12-00)
till snug. Re-adjust shoulder straps for comfort and to transfer the weight to the back
support/waist strap.
4. Open the cylinder valve and check the pressure reading on the digital pressure
gauge.
.02 DONNING THE FACE PIECE:
1 . With one hand, brush hair back to clear the forehead area. With the other
hand, grasp the face piece at the regulator connection and place mask on
face, putting the chin into the chin cup first. (Figure...)
2. Pull the face piece harness/headnet over the head. Tighten harness/headnet
straps.
NOTE: Since all LAFD members are issued a personal face piece, it is recommended
that the adjustment straps at top and top/side of the mask be pre-adjusted, leaving the
lower straps closest to the chin adjustable to facilitate quick donning and doffing. This
can be accomplished by properly donning the face piece, adjusting headnet or spider
straps, then removing the face piece by loosening only the lower adjustment straps.
3. Check for a proper seal by covering the regulator quick-connect port with
the palm of your hand and inhale. The mask should seal against user's face.
No leakage of air should occur. (See Video)
4. Reach to the back of head and grasp the aperture of the firefighting hood
with both thumbs. Pull the hood over your head (Figure...). Ensure that the
aperture of the hood overlaps the rubber face seal, adjustment straps, handi
talkie speaker and retention tongue at the base of the face piece. Running
you thumbs and index fingers around the entire face piece opening may
assist this process. When the hood is donned properly, no facial skin surface
will be exposed.
5. Position the helmet on the head and tighten the chin strap. (See Video.)
6. Simultaneously squeeze both blue "air klic" release buttons on second stage
regulator and remove from waist mounted holster. (See Video.)
7. Attach the second stage regulator to the quick-connect fitting on the mask.
A click will sound when a positive connection is made. Do not depress blue
release buttons while connecting regulator to the face piece. (See Video.)

8. Air pressure will be delivered upon the user's first inhalation or by depressing
the manual override button.
.03 REMOVING (DOFFING) THE SCBA:
1 . When in fresh air, depress the shut-off button and quickly squeeze both blue
"air klic" release buttons on the second stage regulator and remove.
REPLACE REGULATOR IN HOLSTER TO PREVENT DEBRIS FROM
COMPROMISING QUICK-CONNECTION.
2. Remove helmet and firefighting hood.
6/3 –Page 17
(12-00)
3. Remove face piece by pushing forward on the,chin strap buckle tabs and lift face piece
off.
4. Close air cylinder valve and bleed residual system pressure using either the
bypass valve or manual override.
5. Turn off PASS.
6. Buckle waist strap. Loosen the shoulder/straps by grasping the shoulder
strap buckle with thumbs, pulling forward and away from chest.
7. Immediately replace depleted air cylinder.
8. Follow procedures for inspection and maintenance after use, when practical.
Minimally, ensure the SCBA is ready for use.
.04 CYLINDER REPLACEMENT / BAND ADJUSTMENT:
The air cylinder is held in place via a latch on the right side of the,cylinder band. Flip the latch
toward the back pack and, using a "twisting" motion, remove the latch from the bail on the back
pack. To reattach the cylinder band, slide the latch between the spring keeper and the bail,
then flip the latch back against the air cylinder. (See Video.)
The back side of the cylinder band has two yellow stitch marks identifying adjustment

6/3 – Page 16
(12-00)
adjustment buckles to the desired position. The tank band should be adjusted to easily latch
onto back pack bail, but tight enough to hold the air cylinder securely in back pack when the
locking latch is secured.
-03. EMERGENCY BREATHING PROCEDURES
.01 GENERAL:
Emergency Breathing Procedures, "Buddy Breathing", allows one member without air to share
breathing air directly from another member's air supply.
.02 PROCEDURE:
1. Member out of air disconnects the low pressure hose at the quick connection located at
PASS device on the left shoulder. All hose quick-connect fittings are of the "slot and pin"
style connectors to prevent accidental uncoupling. With upward pressure on the sleeve,
turn this sleeve until a detent is felt, increase upward pressure to disconnect coupling.
This same member then unfastens the Buddy Breathing hose from partner's right
shoulder strap. Member completes connection of his/her regulator hose to donor buddy
breathing quick-connect. Large washers behind each fitting provide. leverage to facilitate
coupling and uncoupling with gloved hands. (Figure...) Members must practice with
gloved hands to ensure proficiency in this procedure. No air can be drawn through
the regulator while low pressure hose is disconnected.
2. Member supplying donor air immediately leads toward a safe area.
-04. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
.01 GENERAL:
The SCBA is the most critical piece of fire fighting equipment used. The SCBA shall be
inspected for defects daily and immediately after each use. Utmost care shall be exercised in
the maintenance, cleaning, storage, and transportation of SCBA equipment. Most damage and
defects are caused by foreign matter or careless handling. Repairs by members are limited to
replacement of batteries and the "o" ring nipple connection on first stage regulator to air
cylinder connection. All other repairs or adjustments must be done at the Rescue Maintenance
Unit by certified repair personnel.

.02 INSPECTION:
1 . Face Piece: The face piece skirt and headstrap/headnet should be inspected
for tears, pliability and deterioration. All parts, especially the lens and
second stage regulator connection, should be cleaned and free of dirt and
dust. Examine the face piece buckles for tears at skirt attachment, proper
function and ensure they are free of rust. Check the face piece for leaks and
proper exhalation valve function. Exhalation should be smooth, with no
sticking of the exhalation valve. Check the rim for cracks. To replace the 9
volt battery in the voice amplifier, remove the unit from face piece, loosen
Phillip head screws and remove cover. (The battery is low when the red LED
flashes.)
2. Low and high pressure hoses: Check the hoses for holes, cuts, tears, rust
or corrosion. Check quick-connect couplings for proper function.
6/3 - Page 19
(12-00)
3. Compressed air cylinder: Examine the exterior of the cylinder for nicks, cuts gouges,
delamination and heat damage. If the cylinder is damaged, evacuate the air pressure and
send it in for testing. Check air pressure indicators on each side of the cylinder valve. The
PSI should read within 500 Ibs. of each other. If the air cylinder gauge reads less than
4000 PSI as indicated on the digital pressure readout, replace with a fully charged
cylinder. DO NOT EXPOSE THE FIBERGLASS WRAP TO CHEMICAL CONTACT.
4. Back Pack: Check for excessively frayed straps and pads, defective or
corroded buckles, defective stitching and cracks in the back pack polymer.
Ensure cylinder band is fastened and cylinder is secure in the back pack.
5. PASS: Battery replacement is required when the low battery alarm
activates. There is a 9-volt battery in the main PASS attached at the
shoulder and a 9-volt battery in the rear PASS enunciator. To remove the
battery in the main unit, unscrew two Phillip head crews located on the left
underside of the unit and replace the battery. Be sure to secure the gasket
when replacing the cover. For the Rear Pass Enunciator, remove the two
Phillip head screws on the underside of the unit and replace battery. The
battery must be replaced with positive and negative terminals in proper
position (see inside of battery case).
6. Digital pressure readout / alarm system: The small orange button on the left
side of the unit is used to test the battery life and digital readout. (Figure
#7). Once pressed, the LED will count down a numerical sequence, then
display a battery symbol and bar graph. Check numerical sequence for
accuracy and legibility. Replace the battery when the graph is at the 1/2

6/3 – Page 20
(12-00)
indicator. To replace the battery, remove two flat head screws on the reverse side of the
unit and replace battery. Be careful not to tear the rubber protection flap.
7. Second stage regulator: Check for heat damage or cracks to housing
or cover. Check knobs and buttons for proper operation. Test release
buttons for positive lock onto face piece.
.03 READINESS:
Daily at relief and after each use, ensure the SCBA is ready for use: The following
is a recommended procedure to follow:
1 . Check air cylinder pressure.
2. Check tightness of first stage to air cylinder connection.
3. Open air cylinder valve slowly. Listen for audible bell as system is
pressurized. The PASS and Digital Pressure Readout will also flash/audiblize.
4. Check digital pressure indicated on the pressure gauge.
5. Don face piece and perform seal and exhalation valve check.
6. Attach second stage regulator to face piece.
7. Ensure "first breath" activation provides positive pressure with no excessive
"free-flow" of air past the face seal. Depress shut-off button and remove
regulator from mask and replace in holster.
8. Close air cylinder valve.
9. Push the orange button on the Digital Pressure Readout. Ensure a display
and numerical count down to zero.
10. Check air pressure indicated on digital pressure display for approximately 20 seconds,
watching for a drop in PSI. A drop in PSI indicates a leak in the system. The "0" ring at
the regulator and air cylinder connection is the only repair made by non-certified
members.
11. Slowly open the bypass valve. As the PSI drops, observe the digital pressure display to
ensure the alarms function at 50%, 25% and 10% of air cylinder pressure changes. The
audio alarm bell again will sound at 1000-1225 % of cylinder pressure.
12. Test PASS alarm by pushing the red button and checking both audible and visual
signals for proper audible/visual alarm functions.
13. Check battery life and digital function on the digital pressure display by depressing
orange button.
14. Check back pack harness and air cylinder.
15. Secure SCBA to bracket.

.04 CLEANING
6/3 - Page 21
(12-00)
The Panther SCBA has multiple components. All components are waterproof and tested to
withstand fireground exposure. Care, however, should be given when cleaning components.
.01 FACE PIECE:
Remove voice amplifier prior to cleaning. Clean face piece in warm water with a mild
detergent, if needed. Special consideration should be given to the radio connection and
microphone located inside the mask. Cover the ear speaker to minimize water exposure. Do
not submerse the face piece in water. Rinse off debris in warm water and air dry. The skirt
can be wiped with a soft cloth.
.02 SECOND STAGE REGULATOR:
Cleaning of the second stage regulator is critical. After a fire, debris may lodge in the holster
and cause contamination when regulator is re-holstered. The regulator should be submersed
only in extreme cleaning circumstances. The following is a recommended guide for cleaning:
Clean / wash holster.
1 . Wipe off second stage regulator with a damp cloth.
2. A red protective cap, provided separately, is used prior to rinsing the
regulator to prevent water from entering inlet side. Hold regulator cap/side
down when rinsing. (Figure....)
3. Carefully rinse interior of second stage regulator only if debris are present,
then open bypass valve and use system air pressure to evacuate excess
water, etc.
4. Lock regulator in holster.
.03 BACK PACK:
With the second stage regulator mounted in the holster, rinse off the back pack under low
water pressure, as needed. The foam padded shoulder and waist straps are removable for
washing. If needed, remove padded straps and wash in mild detergent, then replace.

6/3 - Page 22
(12-00)
-04 TROUBLESHOOTING:
This section is intended to provide advice for emergency operation considerations and
troubleshooting.
.01 TROUBLESHOOTING:
1 . PROBLEM: Restricted or interrupted air flow.
a. IMMEDIATELY exit to a safe area.
b. Check that air cylinder valve is fully opened
c. Open the bypass valve until the desired air flow is achieved.
d. Place out of service, tag (F-175) and send to Rescue Maintenance.
2. PROBLEM: First-Breath-On failure.
a. IMMEDIATELY exit to a safe area.
b. Press manual override button to start air flow.
c. Place out of service, tag (F-175) and send to Rescue Maintenance.
3. PROBLEM: Free flow of air or "blow-by" the face seal.
a. Exhale forcefully.
b. Check face piece seal.
c. If free flow continues, open and close the bypass.
d. If problem still persists, IMMEDIATELY exit to a safe area.
e. Place out of service, tag (F-175) and send to Rescue Maintenance.
4. PROBLEM: Relief valve operates (i.e. major air leak within system)
a. IMMEDIATELY exit to a safe area.
b. Close air cylinder valve, then manually regulate air flow with cylinder valve.
c. Place out of service, tag (F-175) and send to Rescue Maintenance.
-05. LESSONS LEARNED
.01 GENERAL: When situations call for quick thinking and coolheadness on the
part of the wearer, previous training and knowledge of the equipment will help the
wearer to react properly. Familiarity with the following lessons learned will be
helpful.

1 . At emergencies requiring the use of breathing apparatus, members
shall work in pairs.
6/3 - Page 23
(12-00)
2. When using breathing apparatus, if excessive resistance to breathing
is encountered or a SCBA problem occurs, notify your partner and exit
IMMEDIATELY with your partner to a safe area.
3. If nauseated and you have to vomit, pull face piece to the side and
vomit then immediately replace face piece and open bypass or manual
override button to purge toxic air from inside mask.
4. In atmospheres containing irritant gases such as ammonia or sulfur
dioxide, secure sleeve and pant with rubber bands and smear Vaseline
(petroleum jelly) to the moist areas of the body.
5. When entering a structure, keep in mind that you may have to make a
hasty retreat under emergency conditions. Notice means of egress as
you proceed into the structure such as windows, doors, etc.
Following the hose will get you out. Consider working as a team to
pull slack hose taunt, then exiting as a team.
6. When it is necessary to retreat to a safe area, ALWAYS let your
partner know what you intend to do. DO NOT SEPARATE!
7. No breathing apparatus offers complete protection in atmospheres
containing gases such as hydrocyanic acid, hydrogen cyanide or
methyl bromide. The SCBA and turnout equipment will not protect
the user from gases that can be absorbed through the skin. DO NOT
ENTER UNTIL THOROUGHLY VENTILATED.
8. When full, the 45-minute air cylinder has 1800 liters of air supply.
The cylinder is rated 45 minutes based on a user rate of 40 liters per
minute. The actual duration of air supply depends on user demands,
and will frequently be less. During high demands, it is possible to use
100 liters per minute, reducing cylinder duration to 18 minutes total.
Periodically review Digital Pressure Readout to check duration time
feature. During "Emergency Traffic" events remember to control you
breathing to conserve air supply.

-0.6 RAPID INTERVENTION COMPANY (RIC) SCBA KIT
6/3 Page 24
(12/00)
The Rapid Intervention Company (RIC) SCBA Kit was designed to offer a
complete, well organized, portable SCBA rescue package to provide fire victims,
both uniformed and civilian with respiratory protection should the need arise.
0.1 DESCRIPTION: The Rapid Intervention Company SCBA Kit consists of eight components:
1. Nylon bag with sling and carrying handles.
2. 45 minute or 60 minute air cylinder
3. First stage pressure reducer with 20 feet of intermediate pressure hose
4. Second stage regulator
5. Facepiece
6. Escape filter
7. 150 feet drop bag line
8. Flashlight with integrated holder
(No Picture)

NYLON BAG
6/3 Page 25
(12/00)
The nylon bag is constructed of heavy-duty balllistic nylon with Kevlar seams and straps to form a "sling"
reinforcement. A removable shoulder strap may be utilized to secure the bag to a victim for easier extrication.
An integrated flashlight holder, rope pouch, facepiece / escape filter pouch, reflective striping and multiple "D"
rings are included on the bag.
AIR CYLINDER
A standard 45 or 60-minute SCBA cylinder is utilized in the RIC SCBA Kit. The bottle size may be changed
based on incident needs.
FIRST STAGE PRESSURE REDUCER WITH
20 FEET OF INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE HOSE
The first stage reducer combines a pressure regulator without a bell alarm. Included is 20 feet of intermediate
pressure hose with female/double male fitting. This pressure hose will mate to a downed firefighter's Survivair
SCBA pneumatics.
SECOND STAGE REGULATOR
A second stage regulator is included in the event a downed firefighters regulator is missing, inoperable or
unable to be used.
FACEPIECE
A facepiece is included in the event a downed firefighter's facepiece is missing, inoperable, or unable to be
used. or the victim does not have a facepiece.
ESCAPE FILTER
The escape filter cartridge provides an emergency air filter. The filter is factory sealed and designed to
quick-connect on the face piece in place of the second stage regulator.
ROPE
150 feet of drop bag line with spring clip is available for rescue operations.
FLASHLIGHT
An intrinsically safe flashlight secured by an integrated flashlight holder may be used hands free or removed
from the kit for use. Uses 3 "C" size batteries.

ASSIGNMENT
6/3 Page 26
(12/00)
The RIC SCBA Kit will be assigned to all Truck Companies, Hazardous Material Squads and US&R apparatus.
0.2 USE OF RIC SCBA KIT
The RIC SCBA Kit is primarily designed for the rescue of a downed firefighter whose air supply has been
exhausted or whose SCBA is not functioning properly. During all rapid intervention operations companies
assigned the task of RIC or backup RIC shall insure that the RIC SCBA Kit is available and ready for
immediate deployment and use.
It must be remembered that the "R" in RIC means "RAPID". If a downed firefighter's SCBA is functioning
properly, do not attempt to augment his/her SCBA with the RIC SCBA Kit. The RIC SCBA Kit is only to be used
in the event the downed firefighter is low on air, out of air, or if their SCBA is inoperable or not functioning
properly. The best chance for survival of a downed firefighter is rapid removal from the hazardous area to a
safe location.
The RIC SCBA kit can be used in several different circumstances:
1. The 20 feet of intermediate pressure hose on the RIC SCBA Kit can be connected directly to a downed
firefighter's SCBA Intermediate Pressure Hose located on the Second Stage Regulator.
2. The RIC SCBA Kit Second Stage Regulator can be attached directly to a downed firefighter's SCBA mask.
3. The RIC SCBA Kit mask and regulator can be placed on a downed firefighter or civilian victim.
0.3 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
The SCBA RIC kit shall be inspected on a daily basis and after each use. Utmost care shall be exercised in the
maintenance, cleaning, storage and transportation of SCBA equipment. Repairs by members are limited to
replacement of batteries and the "O" ring nipple connection located on the first stage regulator to air cylinder
connection. The Rescue Maintenance Unit must perform all other repairs or adjustments.

-01. ROPES AND KNOTS-GENERAL
.01 Uses
Ropes (lines) in use by the L.A.F.D. are made of
synthetic fibers, range in size from ¼"to ¾" in diameter
and in lengths to 250'. These ropes are used in many
different operations- such as life saving, hoisting
equipment, guide lines, securing loads and tying down
loose equipment.
-02. LIFELINE/RESCUE KIT
The Department's lifeline/rescue kit is made up of the
following items:
.01 Lifeline
One 170-foot, 5/8 - inch diameter lifeline with factory
eye splice with a thirteen thousand pound breaking
strength-1,300 pound safe working load. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
The lifeline is a double-braid type of construction; the
inner core is braided nylon and carries 85% of the load.
The core is dyed red to serve as a safety check. If the
red core can be seen through the outer jacket, the rope
is no longer safe to use in rescue operations. The outer
jacket is a multiplex polyester fiber (Dacron) that is
designed for abrasion resistance and good grip, either
wet or dry, and with or without gloves. The basic
function of the outer jacket is to protect the inner core
and to provide grip. Further protection for the rope is
provided by abrasion guards of heavy plastic material
which can be moved to any position (two 18-inch guards
on each lifeline).
Page 1
ROPES AND KNOTS
6/4-01.01
Each lifeline has a tracer tape inside the jacket with the
manufacturer's name and the shift which was working.
Also, a tag is affixed to the eye splice, showing the date
of production.
Each lifeline is 170 feet in length and 5/8-inch in
diameter (except special applications of 250 feet). The
extra 20 feet over the standard 150 feet is to allow for
periodic testing.
Every three years, lifelines from selected companies will
be removed from service and returned to the factory for
testing. The factory will test the eye and 10 feet-of
attached line, re-splice a new eye, and return the lifeline
to the Department. The extra length will allow for two
tests and still retain the required minimum 150 feet
needed for rescue work. Thus, the projected life of each
lifeline will be nine years unless our inspections indicate
damage.
For more information see Training Bulletin 43 and 52.
.02 Body Harness
Two nylon adjustable harnesses with "D" rings. (Figure
2)
Figure 2
The harness is constructed of nylon webbing with
adjustable waist and leg cinchers. The "D" ring is used
for attachment to the figure eight rappelling device with
a carabiner. To use the harness, hold it with both hands
in front of your body, with the "D" ring in front, step
through the leg and waist loops, pull the harness up to
your waist, tighten the waist strap, and then the leg
straps.

6/4-02.03
.03 Carabiners
Three steel locking carabiners. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
The locking steel carabiners are ½ x 4 ½ x 3 ¼ inches.
They are the connecting links between the harness, the
figure eight, and between the attachment cable and the
eye of the lifeline or the lifeline wrapped back around
itself. The purpose of the carabiner is to eliminate knots.
Carabiners are safer, stronger, and faster than tying a
knot. Each time a knot is tied in a rope, it reduces the
strength of that rope from 30% to 55%, depending on
the specific knot; used.
.04 Rappelling Device
Two figure eight rappelling devices. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
The figure eight is a solid one-piece aluminum
rappelling device. The speed of descent is controlled by
regulating the speed of the rope as it passes through the
device and your hand.
Page 2
ROPES AND KNOTS
.05 Attachment Cable
One 36-inch stainless steel wire, with eye at each end.
(Figure 5)
Figure 5
The attachment cable is a 3/8 inch diameter by 36-inch
stainless steel cable, with an eye splice at each end. It is
used to attach the lifeline to a solid anchor point. The
strongest method is to fasten the cable around the
anchor and then attach the two eyes of the cable, using
a carabiner, to the eye of the lifeline.
This cable is also used to attach the figure eight to the
bottom rung of the aerial ladder for the litter basket
operation.
NOTE: New replacement cable will consist of 6ft. rope
sling with a factory eye spliced into each end. (Figure 6)
Figure 6

.06 Abrasion Guards
Two 18-inch abrasion guards (blue plastic). (Figure 7)
Figure 7
The abrasion guards are designed to slide over the
lifeline to any point where the line passes over the edge
of a roof, rocks, or any other rough object that would
cause abrasion to the rope.
.07 Storage Bag (Red)
One storage bag (red plastic), with inspection record
pocket. (Figure 8)
Figure 8
The storage and carrying-bag is constructed of a plastic
material with carrying straps and a pocket sewn on the
outside to contain the inspection record. The lifeline and
all rescue equipment are to be stored in this bag.
The best method of placing the lifeline into the bag is to
start with the bitter end and feed the line into the bag.
Do not coil or loop the line; when finished,
Page 3
ROPES AND KNOTS
6/4-01.06
the eye will be on top. When needed, the eye is pulled
out attached to the anchor point and then the entire bag
and rope are dropped over the side of the structure or
cliff.
NOTE: Same procedure is used when working with the
equipment line and storage bag.
.08 Inspection Record
One inspection record card.
All ropes, whether constructed of natural or manmade
fibers, are subject to a loss of strength and reliability if
abused.
To ensure that your lifeline will be safe for you to use at
any time, periodic inspections are mandatory. To assist
you in making these inspections, the following
guidelines are listed (they are specific for this doublebraid
construction).
NOTE: The following inspection procedures are identical
to those listed for the equipment line.
I. Each month and after each use, the lifeline shall be
inspected both visually and by feeling the line as it
passes through your hands. Look at and feel the
entire length of the line. Look for flat spots, cuts, or
frayed surfaces which may cause the red cord to
show through the outer jacket. Be sure to slide the
chafe guards and inspect all of the lifeline.
2. If the lifeline has been subjected to severe shock
loading or used in any situation where chemical
action may have caused damage to the lifeline, it
shall be removed from service.
3. If no hard or flat spots are noticed and yet the line
has become very stiff and unworkable due to age
or repeated soakings and dryings, the lifeline shall
be removed from service.
4. If possible, avoid walking on, driving over, or
dragging the line through dirt, grease, or chemicals.
Contamination can cause a loss of strength and
reliability.
5. The lifeline can be washed if it becomes dirty. Use
warm water with approved cleaners or cold water
ONLY. Allow the lifeline to air dry completely
before storing in the carrying bag. Do not dry the
line in the sun. Lay it out or hang it in a covered
location. An entry shall be made on the record card
each time the lifeline is used and/or inspected.
.09 Rappelling
The lifeline along with harness, figure eight and
carabiner can be used effectively in making rescues
over steep cliffs or down the face of buildings. For
proper rappelling procedure, see Training Bulletin No.
43.

6/4-01.10
.10 Aerial Ladder/Litter Basket Operation
The lifeline is used along with litter basket, hose roller,
carabiner, figure eight and attachment cable to perform
miscellaneous litter basket operations. Proper
procedures for using lifelines with litter baskets are
found in Training Bulletin No. 43.
Page 4
ROPES AND KNOTS

6/4-03.01
-03. EQUIPMENT LINE
.01 General
The equipment line is 150' of 5/8" diameter rope with a
factory eye splice on one end and a crown splice or
whipping on the other end. It has a 13,000 lb. breaking
strength and its working load is 2,600 lb. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
Its double braid construction has an inner core of
braided polyester which carries. 80% of the load. The
outer jacket is a multiplex polyester fiber (Dacron) within
which 25% of the strands are blue. It is designed for
abrasion resistance and good grip, wet or dry, with or
without gloves. It is carried on the apparatus in a blue
storage bag and is used for hoisting and securing
equipment, barricading restricted areas, etc. It is not to
be used as a Rescue Rope.
For more information see Training Bulletin 22.
Page 5
ROPES AND KNOTS
.02 Halyards
The same type rope is used for ladder halyards. The 20
and 24 foot extension ladders use 3/8 inch line and the
35 and 50 foot extension ladders use 5/8 inch line.
(Figure 2)
Figure 2
.03 Inspection
The following inspection procedures are identical to
those listed for the lifeline.
1. Monthly and after each use, the equipment line
shall be inspected both visually and by feeling
the line as it passes through your hands. Look at
and feel the entire length of the line. Look for
flat spots, cuts, or frayed surfaces which may
cause the inner core to show through the outer
jacket. Be sure to inspect all of the rope. If the
rope's inner-core is visible through a worn or
damaged area of the outer jacket, it should be
removed from service and replaced with a new
one.
2. If the equipment line has been subjected to
severe shock loading or used in any situation
where chemical action may have caused
damage to the rope, it shall be removed from
service.

6/4-03.04
3. If no hard or flat spots are noticed and yet the
line has become very stiff and unworkable due
to age or repeated soakings and dryings, the
equipment line shall be removed from service.
4. If possible, avoid walking on, driving over, or
dragging the line through dirt, grease, or
chemicals. Contamination can cause a loss of
strength and reliability.
5. The equipment line can be washed if it becomes
dirty. Use warm water with approved cleaner or
cold water ONLY. Allow the lifeline to air dry
completely before storing in the carrying bag.
Do not dry the line in the sun. Lay it out or hang
it in a covered location.
.04 Storage Bag (blue)
The blue storage and carrying bag is constructed of a
plastic material with carrying straps. The equipment line
is stored in this bag. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
The best method of placing the equipment line into the
bag is the same as the lifeline. Start with the bitter end
and feed the line into the bag. Do not coil or loop the
line; when finished, the eye will be on top. When
needed, the eye is pulled out, attached to an anchor
point, and then the entire bag and rope are dropped
over the side of the structure or Cliff.
Ropes and their bags shall be stored on apparatus
inside a compartment for maximum protection from
elements and as a security measure.
Page 6
ROPES AND KNOTS

6/4-04.01
-04. DROPLINE
01. General
A dropline is 150' of 5/16" Dacron braided line with a
snap device attached to one end. (Figure 1) It is used to
hoist light hoselines and equipment aloft, as a control
line for the ladder pipe and to stabilize the litter basket
or rescue harness. It may be used as a guideline for
search and rescue i.e., when followed to and from an
objective.
(Figure 1)
It is stored in a bag and may be carried on a member's
B/A harness, T/O coat "D" rings or belt.
Page 7
ROPES AND KNOTS

6/4-05.01
-05. KNOTS
.01 General
Knots, bends and hitches are used singly or in
combination to form the various ties used on the Fire
Department.
.02 Knot efficiency
A knot placed in a line decreases its working capacity.
The amount of decrease, expressed in the table below
as a percentage, must be subtracted from the original
working capacity.
Percentage of Decrease:
Knot % of Loss
Full strength, no knots 0%
Eye Splice 10%
Timber hitch; half hitch 35%
Bowline; clove hitch 40%
Square knot 50%
Overhand knot 55%
EXAMPLE: Using a 5/8" equipment line with a bowline.
Working strength of equipment line = 2600 lb.
Bowline tied in line = 40% loss
2600 lb.
1040 (40%)
1560 lbs. working capacity
Page 8
ROPES AND KNOTS
.03 Types The knots, bends and hitches commonly
used by the Department are:
Bight (Figure 1)
Figure 1
Bowline (Figure 2)
Figure 2

6/4-05.03
Page 9
Running bowline (Figure 3)
Figure 3
Bowline on a bight (Figure 4)
Figure 4
Half hitch (Figure 5)
Figure 5
ROPES AND KNOTS
Timber hitch (Figure 6)
Figure 6
Clove hitch (Figure 7)
Figure 7

6/4-05.03
Page 10
Beckett bend (Figure 8)
Figure 8
Running loop (Figure 9)
Figure 9
ROPES AND KNOTS
Hose roller (Figure 10)
Figure 10
Slip knot ending-in-bow (Figure 11)
Figure 11

6/4-05.04
Square knot (Figure 12)
Figure 12
Barrel knot (Figure 13)
Figure 13
.04 Applications
Knots may be tied using any part of the line. For safety,
completed knot should have a minimum 18" tail.
Empty Line Up:
Timber hitch six feet back of nozzle. (Figure 14-A)
Page 11
ROPES AND KNOTS
Figure 14-A
Empty Line Down:
Timber hitch six feet back of nozzle.
Half hitch inches back of nozzle.
Half hitch around nozzle tip. (Figure 14-B)
Figure 14-B
Loaded Line Up:
Running bowline 12 feet back of nozzle.
Half hitch six feet back of nozzle.
Half hitch six inches back of nozzle. (Figure 15)
Figure 15
Loaded Line Down:
Running bowline 12 feet back of nozzle. Half hitch six
feet back of nozzle. Half hitch six inches back of nozzle.
Half hitch around nozzle tip.

6/4-05.04
Axes-Sledge:
Running loop over head of tool.
Half hitch near end of handle. (Figure 16)
Figure 16
Bars-Crow and Jumbo:
Clove hitch-up, on small end of bar. Half hitch below the
shoulder on large end of bar. (Figure 17)
Page 12
Figure 17
ROPES AND KNOTS
Portable Extinguishers:
Clove hitch-up, around base.
Half hitch around middle.
Half hitch near top of tank. (Figure 18)
Figure 18

6/4-05.04
Barrels, Sacked or Boxed Items:
Barrel knot. Place object on top of running line. Eking
bitter end and running line to top and tie an overhand
knot. Spread overhand knot and drop each side half-way
down the object being tied. Bring bitter end and running
line to top and secure with square knot. Break square
knot over to allow for the tightening of knot. (Figure 19)
Figure 19
Ladders (except roof ladders):
With the rungs down take a wrap around each beam
below proper rung; secure bitter end to running line with
a bowline knot. (To determine proper rung, divide the
length of the ladder by five and multiply by 2).
Roof Ladders:
The same as other ladders except wraps around both
beams are taken below third rung from top; secure bitter
end to running line with a bowline knot and place a half
hitch over the open hooks. (Figure 20.)
Page 13
ROPES AND KNOTS
Figure 20
Hose Roller
Hose roller knot - are a combination of the following
knots. A bowline with a bight, overhand knot with a bight
and a half hitch. (Figure 21)
Figure 21

6/4-05.04
Ball and Chain:
Bowline through the ring on the chain. With a separate
line, clove hitch-down around chain immediately above
ball.
Joining Two Lines:
Beckett bend or square knot. A square knot should only
be used on lines of equal size.
Attaching Life Gun Cord to Rope and Projectile:
Run life gun cord from center of ball through "eye" of
projectile; secure with four half hitches spaced four
inches apart, the first being four inches from the
projectile "eye." Attach opposite end of life gun cord to
"eye" of line with a slip knot ending in a bow.
Bangor Ladder Knot.
The bangor ladder knot consists of two half hitches with
a bight tied on the fourth or most convenient rung. The
second half hitch also secures the hanging part of the
halyard. (Figure 22)
Figure 22
Securing Hard Suctions:
When two or more hard suctions are connected for
drafting, they are secured as follows.
Clove hitch at bottom next to strainer; hitch separated to
be on both side of male coupling lugs of suction. With
OTHER end of rope, tie a running bowline on first
coupling above the strainer.
Secure center of rope to apparatus or any convenient
place on the wharf.
Page 14
ROPES AND KNOTS
Securing hard suctions in this manner relieves strain
from couplings and facilitates removal from the water.
(Figure 23)
Figure 23
Small Hand Lines Aloft:
When raising small hand lines aloft in multi-storied
structures (up to 5th floor), the most practical method is
the use of dropbag lines.
To attach the dropline to the hose, use a loop formed
from a bight in the running line. (Figures 24 & 25)
Figure 24

6/4-05.04
Figure 25
The loop is then placed over the hose 12"-18" behind
the nozzle. (Figure 26)
Page 15
Figure 26
ROPES AND KNOTS
Two alternate methods of sending small lines aloft:
1. Place the loop directly behind the coupling to
which the nozzle is attached, adding a half-hitch
to the tip of nozzle. (Figure 27)
Figure 27
2. Grasp dropline, make a loop approximately 12",
and make a overhand knot. Run loop through
the bale of the shut-off, then put the loop over
the nozzle tip. (Figure 28)

6/4-05.04
Figure 28
NOTE: When hoseline reaches desired landing, it is
important that member remove dropline prior to
advancing hose.
Page 16
ROPES AND KNOTS

6/4-06.01
-06. COILING AND THROWING
.01 Coiling Rope for Throwing
With sufficient line to reach objective, make coils about
three feet in diameter. Leave enough line at end to
make 4 or 5 smaller coils about 18" in diameter.
Bind small coils with a bight. Hold and throw small coils
toward objective, allowing the large coils to pay off the
other hand or the ground. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
With this method of casting a line, the small coils supply
the weight necessary to carry the line to a given point.
With practice, a line can readily be cast a distance of
50 ft.
Page 17
ROPES AND KNOTS

6/5
-01. Hose-General
.01 Hose Lengths
.02 Hose Construction
.03 Hose Maintenance
.04 Hose Change
.05 Cleaning
.06 Repairs
.07 Hose Testing
.08 Couplings & Fittings
.09 Rolling Hose
.10 Hose Lines-Safe Use
.11 Backing-Up Nozzle
-02. Hose Combinations
.01 Extending a Line.
.02 Increasing and Reducing
.03 Siamese Lines
.04 Wyed Lines
-03. Loading Hose
.01 Hose Standards
.02 Loading 3 ½" Hose
.03 Loading 2 ½" Hose
.04 Loading Transverse Beds, 1 ¾”1 ½", & 1”
-04. Hydrants
.01 Horizontally Valved Hydrants
.02 Vertically Valved Hydrants
.03 Built - Up Hydrants
.04 Subsurface Hydrants
.05 Drafting Connections
.06 Eddy Valves
.07 Angle Valves
.08 Private Hydrants
.09 Operating Hydrants
-05. Fire Department Connections
.01 Dry Standpipes
.02 Improvised Standpipes
.03 Combination Standpipes
.04 Sprinkler Systems
.05 Refrigerant Diffusing Systems
-06. Hose Packs
Page 1
.01 2" High-rise Hose Pack
.02 2 ½" Stinger Assembly (Pigtail)
ENGINE COMPANY

6/5-01.01
-01. HOSE, GENERAL
Hose used by our Department is of the following sizes:
4", 3 ½", 3", 2 ½", 2", 1 ¾", 1 ½", 1" and ¾". Hose used
in the field comes in 50-foot sections, but may be
shortened during repairs. The exception to this is the 3"'
ladderpipe hose which comes in 100-foot sections. No
section, however, will be issued for fire fighting use if it
has been shortened to less than 40 feet. Lengths of
hose less than 40 feet may be used as bypasses or
suctions.
.01 Hose Lengths
4"' 12' to 25' lengths for suctions.
3½" 50' lengths for supply lines: lengths shorter than
40' for bypasses.
3" 100' lengths for ladderpipes (21/2" couplings).
2 ½" 50' lengths for supply or fire fighting; lengths
shorter than 40' for bypasses.
2" 50' lengths for firefighting (1½" couplings).
1¾" 50' lengths for fire fighting (1½" couplings).
1½" 50' lengths for fire fighting.
¾" Hose reels (rubber coated) and garden hoses'
used for small fires and overhaul operations.
.02 Hose Construction
Fire hose is of three types:
1. 100% polyester single or double jacketed,
rubber lined, presently the standard for our
Department.
2. ¾" garden hose.
3. Single jacketed, synthetic rubber, impregnated
with synthetic fibers.
.03 Hose Maintenance
100% polyester hose is mildew proof, however, it is
important that dirty, wet hose be properly cleaned and
dried. All jacketed hose shall be repositioned on
apparatus periodically to prevent cracking and checking
of the rubber liner at sharp bends.
If hose has been used with salt water, wet water
additives or foam, it shall be flushed thoroughly inside
and out with fresh water before it is allowed to dry.
.04 Hose Change
Fabric-jacketed hose shall be removed from apparatus
and replaced with clean, dry hose at least once each
three calendar months. Fire fighting hand lines shall be
changed within 24 hours when damp or dirty. Fabricjacketed
supply lines shall be changed weekly or more
frequently if damp or dirty. Before hose is removed from
apparatus for change,
Page 2
ENGINE COMPANY
replacement sections shall be prepared and examined.
Hose change will be made with as much speed as is
consistent with safety. One bed of hose will be changed
at a time. Make proper entries in F-2 (Journal), Book 55,
F-122 and F-128.
NOTE: Hose carried on apparatus shall be securely
coupled and orderly in arrangement.
.05 Cleaning
Dirty hose, suctions and bypasses shall be washed with
clear, cold water.
Heavily soiled hose may be washed using a 5 to 10%
solution of concentrated liquid soap. Soap solution must
be thoroughly rinsed from hose prior to drying. Station
Commanders shall contact the Equipment Engineering
Officer at Supply and Maintenance Division for
instructions regarding hose contaminated with
substances which cannot be removed with clear, cold
water and 5 to 10% soap solution.
.06 Repairs
Hose shall be repaired by Supply and Maintenance
Division; refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-16.21, Exchange or Repair
of Items Available. Members shall no attempt to repair
damaged hose threads or swivels.
Damaged hose forwarded to Supply and Maintenance
Division for repair shall be clean, dry, rolled, and tied in
two places. Small burns in the outer jacket do not
constitute damaged hose. Before sending in for
replacement or repair, test hose as per Volume 3, 6/11-
25.60. If hose is determined to be in need of repair,
mark damaged area by wrapping the hose with black
tape at the location(s) where repairs are needed. Hose
shall be rolled with the female coupling forming the
core, unless the female coupling needs repair. In that
case, the male coupling should form the core. Attach an
F-175 tag with a clear description of the problem, i.e.,
hole 10' from male coupling, female swivel will not turn,
etc. Refer to Volume 4, 8/7-40.00, FORWARDING
ITEMS.
.07 Hose Testing
Station Commanders shall cause all rubber lined single
and double jacketed hose, bypasses and soft suctions,
and single jacket synthetic rubber hose to be tested
annually, using fire apparatus pumps. New and repaired
hose shall be tested as soon as possible after receipt by
the Station.
Frequency: Hose shall be tested annually. Maximum
period between tests shall be 1-2 months.

6/5-01.08
NOTE: When a section of hose appears to be in an
unreliable condition, it shall be tested as soon as
practical.
Test Standards:
1. Pressure
a. One-inch double jacketed hose shall be
tested at 400 p.s.i.
b. All other rubber lined single and double
jacketed hose, bypasses and soft
suctions shall be tested at 300 p.s.i.
Procedure:
A hose line bursting under pressure can be hazardous
due to trapped compressed air and/or pump volume. In
order to minimize the danger to members while testing
hose, the following procedure will be followed:
1. Lay out hose from the pump outlet with no sharp
kinks or bends, 300 feet maximum length at one
outlet. Attach shut-off butt.
NOTE: For safety, attach couplings to the
discharge gates on the right side of apparatus.
2. Bleed off air.
a. Open the shut-off and elevate above
the level of the discharge gate.
b. Fill the hose with water, controlling the
flow by feathering the pump discharge
gate.
c. After all air is bled out of the hose line,
close shut-off butt.
d. Gradually increase the pump pressure
to the required test pressure. Limit the
flow to the amount needed to assure
some supply from the pump.
3. Duration of test, five minutes at required
pressure.
4. The pump operator shall remain on the alert at
the control panel.
5. Inspect hose and couplings for leaks or failures
of any kind during, test.
6. Forward hose needing repair to Supply and
Maintenance.
Recording.
1. Complete and forward F-129, Annual Hose Test
Record.
2. Make journal entry of hose test.
Page 3
ENGINE COMPANY
.08 Couplings and Fittings
Swivels and threads on hose couplings and fittings
should be protected from damage. Properly fitted
gaskets should be in place at all times.
Gaskets should be checked each time a connection is
made. Feel the gasket to make sure it is in place under
certain light conditions it is impossible to detect its
absence by looking into the fitting.
Female swivels should turn freely; if not, lubricate with
graphite. Use of oil is prohibited.
09 Rolling Hose
When rolling 31/2", 3" and 21/2"' hose for storage in
company quarters, it should be rolled with the FEMALE
coupling forming the core. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
When rolling 2", 13/4", 11/2" and 1" hose for storage in
company quarters, it should be rolled with the MALE
coupling forming the core. (Figure 2)
Figure 2

6/5-01.10
NOTE: The male end of a I" hose should be folded back
18 to 24 inches from the coupling before starting the roll.
(Figure 3)
Figure 3
.10 Hose Lines-Safe Use
To provide greater safety to personnel and equipment
while using hose lines, the following procedures shall be
adhered to:
1. Nozzles shall be shut off after attachment to
hose lines and at any other time the flow from
the nozzle ceases.
2. When practicable, hose lines that are to be
operated from ladders, roofs, or other heights
shall not be charged with water until after such
lines have been secured in position.
3. Where possible, hose to upper floors shall be
cleared from ladders and secured in order to
provide safe operation.
4. When practicable, water shall be drained at the
street level before lowering hose from ladders,
roofs, or other heights.
5. Members shall not direct or cause a stream of
water from a line or extinguisher to be directed
upon any person or into any premises
unnecessarily.
6. Care must be taken any time hose streams are
used from ladders. Horizontal movement of
hose streams shall not exceed 150 in either
direction from an "in-line" position with the beam
and truss of ladders.
Page 4
ENGINE COMPANY
.11 Backing Up the Nozzle
The purpose of backing up the nozzle is to relieve the
strain caused by the reactionary force of the
stream. Positions of members holding the hose line
should be staggered. Do not crowd member at the
nozzle. Keep the hose line free of sharp bends and, in
so far as is practical, maintain the hose in-line with the
nozzle to absorb back pressure. Notify member at
nozzle before leaving hose line. If inside a structure, do
not leave one member alone on nozzle. If it's necessary
to exit, both members shall leave together.
The method of holding hose depends largely on the
number of members available, size of line, pressure,
location, and length of time the line is to be used. Any of
the following methods may be used singly, or in
combination, as conditions warrant:
1. Face toward nozzle; hold hose between arm and
body. With hose line next to body, pass inside
hand under hose and grasp wrist of other arm;
grasp hose with outside hand. (Figure 4).
Figure 4

6/5-01.11
2. Members secure a bight around hose using
nylon straps. Face toward nozzle and pass loop
formed by nylon strap across front of body and
over outside shoulder; lean bodies against nylon
straps. (Figure 5)
Figure 5
3. Secure bar to hose with nylon strap. Two
members hold bar with outside hands and inside
foot forward. Lean body against bar. (Figure 6)
4. If hose line is going to remain stationary for a
period of time, form a loop approximately 10' in
diameter with the nozzle, under the loop,
towards fire. Secure hose line to loop with nylon
strap approximately three feet back from nozzle
to allow nozzle movement,
(Figure 7)
Page 5
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 6
Figure 7
COMMENT-Although the hose passing under the hose,
as in Figure 7, may provide greater security and less
movement, there is greater strain on the lower back and
greater energy is required to maintain the nozzle
position.

6/5-02.01
-02. HOSE COMBINATIONS
To effectively carry on fire fighting operations, it is
sometimes necessary to extend, reduce, increase
siamese, wye, or tap in hose lines. Various
combinations of hose, nozzles, and fittings are used for
this purpose. Whenever practicable, all hose, n ozzles,
and fittings should be assembled before connecting to
the original working line, however, fittings without
swivels should be connected to the original line before
other lines are connected.
Nozzle tips removed from original working lines should
be placed in a location where they will not become lost
or damaged.
.01 Extending a Line
1. Obtain required amount of hose for extension
line; connect nozzle to male coupling and shut
nozzle off.
2. Place the extension line in the desired position
with female coupling near the nozzle of the
working line.
3. Shut off the nozzle on the working line and
remove the tip. Place tip in safe location.
NOTE: If it is desired to remove the entire
nozzle assembly when extending the line, use
the appropriate sized hose clamp, 6" to 12",
behind the shut-off, bleed the nozzle and
remove.
4. Connect the extension line to the shut-off or
coupling on the working line. Open the shut-off
or remove the hose clamp when the extension
line is in position.
5. Open nozzle on the extension line.
.02 Increasing and Reducing
Operations for increasing and reducing hose lines are
essentially the same as for extending, except the proper
increaser or reducer is used to connect the new line to
the original working line.
Page 6
ENGINE COMPANY
.03 Siamese Lines
When necessary, two or more hose lines may be laid
and siamesed into a single line to reduce friction loss or
when a larger volume of water is needed than can be
supplied by a single line. (Figure 1) Lines should be
siamesed as near the fire as practicable. Siamese
operations will usually involve two 2½" lines into one
2½" line.
Figure 1
1. Obtain required amount of hose for a single line;
connect nozzle to the male end and shut nozzle
off, connect the siamese to the female end.
2. Place in position with Siamese near nozzles of
original lines.
3. If shut-offs are used on original lines, close the
shut-offs and remove the tips.
4. Connect siamese to shut-offs on original lines
and open shut-offs.
5. Open the nozzle on the working line.

6/5-02.04
.04 Wyed Lines
One line may be wyed into two lines of similar size.
(Figure 2)
Figure 2
or, by using suitable fittings, into two smaller lines
by-using a wye and following same basic procedures as
in extending a line. (Figure 3)
Page 7
Figure 3
ENGINE COMPANY

6/5-03.01
-03. LOADING HOSE
Preparatory to changing hose on apparatus in company
quarters, obtain sufficient reserve hose for replacement
and lay it out for loading. Inspect swivels, couplings,
threads and gaskets. Lubricate female couplings with
powdered graphite.
Change of one hose bed is to be completed before
disturbing hose in another.
Hose is to be removed from bed and the change made
with as much speed as is consistent with safety.
.01 Hose Standards
1. All hose carried on pumping apparatus in
longitudinal or transverse beds will be loaded by
the flat method.
2. All pumping apparatus will carry split loads of
2½" and 3½" hose in the longitudinal hose beds.
3. The 3½” hose will be carried in the left
longitudinal hose bed and 2½" in the right
longitudinal hose bed.
4. The 4-way valve will be carried on all pumping
apparatus on the bracket provided at the rear of
the apparatus.
5. The 3½" hose will be pre-connected to the 4way
valve on all pumping apparatus.
6. The 2½” hose will be cross-connected to the
3½” hose loaded in longitudinal beds.
NOTE: Engine companies may seek approval for preattaching
a nozzle to the 2½" hose in lieu of crossconnecting
the beds.
7. The standard amount of hose carried in hose beds
by all pumping apparatus is as follows:
Size Feet
1" 500
1½" 400
1 ¾" 400
2½" 750
3½" 600
*Companies not assigned 13/4" hose shall carry 1½"
hose until provided with 1¾" Hose shall be loaded in the
front transverse bed.
8. These standards do not address high-rise hose
packs or specialized pumping apparatus, i.e.,
squrts, snorkels, etc. Exceptions for preconnected
nozzles, additional hose carried on apparatus, etc.
must be approved.
Page 8
ENGINE COMPANY
.02 Loading 3½" Hose-"Flat Load"
The following operations are for loading 31/2" hose on
apparatus.
1. Flake out sections to rear of apparatus with
male couplings towards the hose bed.
2. To load, place first male coupling next to center
partition of left compartment; allow male end to
protrude the length of the coupling with the hose
lying flat.
3. Lay hose flat alongside hose bed divider to end
of hose bed.
4. Overlap hose at an angle at end of hose bed
and lay flat back towards open end of hose bed.
Position next fold adjacent to last fold, even with
open end of hose bed. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
When the opposite bed divider is reached, double up the
last fold to start the next layer of hose going in the other
direction.
NOTE: When loading 31/2" hose, use a "Dutchman" to
keep couplings leading out. (Dutchman is a double fold,
to ensure that the coupling i heading out of the
hosebed.) This will avoid coupling flipping over and
striking the upper hand rail.
5. Continue layers until hose load is complete.

6/5-03.03
6. Connect last female coupling to 4-way valve by
means of a 2 ½" to 3 ½" increaser. (Figure 2)
Figure 2
7. Cross-connect hose bed to 3 ½" male coupling
by means of a 3 ½” X 2 ½” reducer. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
.03 Loading 2 ½" hose
1. Flake out sections to rear of apparatus with
male couplings toward the hose bed.
2. To load, place first male coupling next to center
partition of compartment; allow male end to
protrude the length of the coupling, with the
hose lying flat.
Page 9
ENGINE COMPANY
3. Continue loading hose in same manner as 3 ½"
hose.
4. When hose bed is loaded, cross-connect to male
coupling of 3 ½" hose bed by means of a 3 ½" to
2 ½" reducer.
.04 Loading Transverse Beds, 1 ¾", 1 ½” and 1"
1. Lay female end of hose at edge of, and against,
either divider of transverse hose bed.
2. Load hose in the same manner as 3 ½" and
2 ½".
3. When the final section is to be loaded, provide a
loop approximately 18" in length on both sides of
the transverse bed. The loops will facilitate pulling
hose from the left or right side of the apparatus.
The coupling of the last section will be located in
approximately the center of the bed with one loop
before the coupling and one after.
4. Attach nozzle to male end of hose and lay it on
top of full hose bed. (Figure 4)
Figure 4

6/5-04.01
-04. HYDRANTS
Various types of hydrants are provided for Fire
Department use to supply water for emergency
incidents. The type, size and spacing are determined by
the requirements of the district they serve.
Hydrants are identified by type and the number and size
of outlets (either 21/2" or 4"). All outlet threads conform
to the National Standard Fire Hose thread specifications
and each valve is individually controlled.
.01 Horizontally Valved Hydrants
The horizontally valved hydrants are either a single
21/2" (SFH) or a double (DFH) hydrant and have either
a bolted (Figure 1) or caulked (Figure 2) valve
assembly.
Page 10
Figure 1
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 2
.02 Vertically Valved Hydrants
A vertically valved hydrant has a single 4" outlet
(SFH) and a bolted vertical valve assembly.
(Figure 3)
Figure 3

6/5-04.03
.03 Built-Up Hydrants
A built-up hydrant (BUFH) is assembled from a 4" to 6"
pipe surmounted by an angle valve with a single 21/2"
or 4" outlet. The 21/2" type is used in areas having high
water main pressure (over 200 psi identified by red top).
(Figure 4)
Figure 4
.04 Subsurface Hydrant
Subsurface hydrants (SSFH) are normally found on
airport property. They may have single or multiple
outlets and are covered by heavy steel or cast-iron
plates. These covers are usually painted yellow for
identification. (Figure 5)
Page 11
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 5
.05 Drafting Connection
A drafting connection consists of 6" pipe reduced to a 4"
pipe having standard hose threads. These connections
lead to non-pressurized sources of water. To obtain
water from a drafting connection, it is necessary to use a
HARD suction and normal drafting procedure. When
these connections are not being used, it is important that
the caps be maintained spanner-tight to prevent
contamination of the water supply. (Figure 6)
Figure 6

6/5-04.06
.06 Eddy Valves
An Eddy Valve is a gate valve installed on a hydrant
outlet for use by contractors, etc. This valve permits
repeated opening and closing of the hydrant without
using the regular valve. (Figure 7)
Figure 7
When an Eddy Valve is installed, the hydrant valve shall
be completely opened and left in this position with the
control of water being provided by the Eddy Valve. This
valve is equipped with standard hose threads.
.07 Angle Valves-2½"
Angle Valves are connected on top of an existing
hydrant and are for the use of other City departments for
filling tanks, flushing streets, etc. They may be used by
the Fire Department if other outlets are occupied or
defective. (Figure 8)
Page 12
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 8
.08 Private Hydrant
There are various types of private hydrants depending
on the requirements of the property they serve. A permit
issued by the Fire Department must be obtained before
a private hydrant may be installed.
.09 Operating Hydrants
When operating hydrant, valve must be opened 'fully.
Valve should be opened and closed slowly to avoid
water hammer. The sudden stoppage of water flow
results in a momentary high pressure build up causing a
shock wave which can damage the mains.
Chattering in a hydrant is usually caused by a loose
valve. A valve that is chattering should be immediately
closed or opened enough to stop the chattering. These
hydrants shall be reported for repair.

6/5-05.01
-05. FIRE DEPARTMENT
CONNECTIONS
.01 Dry Standpipes
Dry standpipes are usually installed adjacent to fire
escapes and smoke towers on buildings four or more
stories in height to provide water for fire fighting
operations.
These standpipes are provided with two or more 2 ½”
female inlet connections, at street level and are
equipped with clapper valves. Female swivels and
threads are protected by plugs or breakable caps.
Inlet connections are manifold either vertically,
horizontally, or as a cluster. A plate bearing the words
"exterior" or "dry standpipe'' will generally be found
adjacent to or Integral with, the inlet manifold of these
standpipe
Two-and-one-half-inch male outlets, equipped with gate
valves, are provided on each floor above ground and on
the roof. Male outlet threads are protected by caps.
Connecting to Inlet Manifold:
Connect line to inlet that will not interfere with other
lines to be connected. Connect from inside out or from
bottom up to maintain working space. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
Connecting to Dry Standpipe when Manifold Inlet is
Defective:
If manifold is defective or lower end of standpipe is
plugged with debris, lines are normally connected to the
male outlet on the second floor by using a 2 ½" siamese
and a double female fitting. (Figure 2)
Page 13
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 2
Alternate Method:
Various alternate methods may be employed.
Considerations must include fire conditions and amount
of water needed.
Connecting to Dry Standpipe Outlets-Fire Escape
Balconies:
1. Connect 21/2" to male outlet. Clear hose from
balcony before charging. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
2. Open gate valve and gated wye when nozzle is in
position.
NOTE: Hose packs may be used.

6/5-05.02
Connecting to Outlet Below Fire Floor-Fire Escape
Balconies:
1. Lower female end of hose over railing to balcony
below.
2. Connect female to standpipe outlet.
3. Secure hose to railing of balcony on fire floor.
4. Open gate valve when nozzle is in position.
Draining Dry Standpipes:
After use, dry standpipes should be drained to relieve
them of the weight of water and to prevent seepage. It is
necessary to drain standpipes to the level of the outlet
on the second floor before draining at the manifold to
decrease the pressure so the clapper valve can be
opened without damage.
1. Open gate valve of highest outlet to admit air.
2. Connect section of hose to male outlet on second
floor; lower male to ground; open gate valve.
3. When water has drained to second floor outlet,
open clapper valve with a hydrolator at ground
level to complete drainage. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
4. After standpipe has been drained, disconnect
hose. Close all gate valves; replace caps on male
outlets, replace plugs in female inlets or replace
breakable caps if available.
Page 14
ENGINE COMPANY
.02 Improvised Standpipe
This method requires the use of the ladderpipe
assembly raised to the floor desired. The tip or tip and
barrel of the ladderpipe is removed and handlines
extend off of a 2 ½" gated wye attached to the
ladderpipe assembly.
.03 Combination Standpipes
Combination standpipes are installed in stair shafts or
smoke towers of many high-rise buildings. The principle
of operation is basically the same as the dry standpipe
system; however, the 21/2" outlets are always charged
and ready for use by Fire Department personnel. The
system can be augmented by connecting lines to the
combination standpipe inlets in the same manner as the
dry standpipe system. Where combination standpipes
are installed, a dry standpipe system is not required.
NOTE: Combination standpipe systems may have 21/2"
hose pre-connected. Whenever practical, Fire
Department hose and fittings shall be used.
Connecting to 2 ½" Standpipe Outlets in Interior
Stairwells:
1. Connect pigtail to standpipe outlet if outlet is
located in standpipe hose cabinet. Connect wye
directly to outlet when adequate space is provided
and fire fighting lines will not kink.
2. Break desired hose pack and flake out up stairwell
or down hallway if fire conditions permit.
3. Attach female coupling of hose pack to 2 ½" to 1
½" gated wye. Use 1 ½" to 2 ½" increasers on
gated wye if necessary.
4. Unused side of gated wye may be used for a
second line.

6/5-05.04
.04 Sprinkler Systems
A sprinkler system's purpose is to control a fire in its
earliest stage and to keep it from spreading. These
systems are usually connected to domestic water
supplies. There are several types of sprinkler systems
used in the City of Los Angeles.
Sprinkler systems are usually provided with two or more
2 ½" female inlet connections located near the street or
ground level and are equipped with clapper valves.
Female swivels and threads are protected by plugs or
breakable caps. (Figure 5)
Figure 5
Inlet connections are manifolded and arranged either
vertically, horizontally or as a cluster.
A plate, indicating area of the building supplied by inlet
manifold, will generally be found adjacent to or integral
with the inlet manifold.
Pressure to the sprinkler system is augmented by lines
laid from pumpers connected to the inlet manifold of the
system.
Sprinkler Control Valves.
Sprinkler control valves are normally found in all
establishments equipped with automatic sprinkler
systems. Installations are essentially the same. The
larger systems have floor sectional control valves
installed. The valves in most installations are of the "OS
and Y" (outside stem and yolk) type and are in the
"open" position when the stem is fully exposed. (Figure
6)
Page 15
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 6
To drain sprinkler systems, close main valves and open
drain valve. When placing the system back into
operation, close drain valve before opening main shutoff
valve. Refer to Figure 6. (Certain smaller systems
may not have a drain valve.)

6/5-05.05
A post indicator (PI) valve is installed in the water
supply line to the sprinkler system in some installations.
The valve is outside the building, usually just inside the
property line where the water service enters the
property. The name is derived from e appearance of the
valve and the small glass window where a sign appears
to indicate "open" or closed" position of the valve.
(Figure 7)
Figure 7
The valve should be found in the "open" position shown.
A wrench is attached to the valve stem at the top I held
in place at the side with a lock.
.05 Refrigerant Diffusing Systems
Water Type
Water-type diffusers consists of a mixing chamber in
which the refrigerant is absorbed by water and drained
into the sewer. (Figure 8)
Page 40
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 8
The mixing chamber is provided with a single 2 ½"
female inlet connection, usually located on an exterior
wall of the refrigeration plant. Female swivel and
threads are protected by a plug or breakable cap.
Adjacent to the inlet connection will be found a Fire
Department service box containing a high pressure and
a low pressure valve for control of the refrigerant.
When necessary to diffuse a system, a 2 ½" line is laid
from a hydrant or pumper and connected to the inlet of
the diffuser. The shut-off is opened to start water
flowing, and then the control valve (or valves) in the
service box opened.
NOTE: Water must be flowing before refrigerant control
valves are opened. Safety equipment, including eye
protection, shall be worn when opening valves in the
event of a high pressure leak at the valve.

6/5-05.05
Atmospheric Type:
This system has the necessary valving to diffuse the
ammonia into the atmosphere. The box containing the
valves will be labeled, "Emergency Refrigerant Control
Box." The valves are commonly labeled "high pressure
to low pressure" and "discharge valve to atmosphere."
(Figure 9)
Page 17
Figure 9
ENGINE COMPANY

6/5-06.01
-06. HOSE PACKS
General:
Hose packs are carried on all pumping and squad
apparatus. They are made up by members using 2"
single jacketed, reinforced plastic hose. Light weight
fittings are provided for use as part of the assembly.
Hose packs are generally carried and used aloft, i.e., to
establish or extend lines in multi-story structures. They
are carried on apparatus, ready for immediate use.
NOTE: Single jacketed, light weight hose is more
susceptible to damage than double jacketed hose. Use
of this hose for purposes other than hose packs should
be avoided.
.01 2"' Hose Packs
2 – 2" hose packs are carried on designated
apparatus and the 2" hose pack consists of an
assembly of the following hose and fittings:
2 - 50' sections of 2" single jacketed, reinforced
plastic hose.
1 - modified 1 ½" complete spray nozzle, light
weight.
1 - 2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer, light weight.
5 - Nylon straps, 1" x 24". (Approximate)
1. Flake out two 50' sections of 2" light weight hose
loosely in work area.
2. Couple sections of hose. Attach light weight 2 ½"
to 1 ½" reducer to remaining female coupling.
3. Place one 30 minute SCBA bottle on ground in
work area.
4. Place first fold of hose against side of SCBA bottle
with female coupling approximately 10" below
bottle shut-off valve. (Figure 1)
Page 18
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 1
5. Alternate folds of hose against side of bottle
loosely, in a "U" shape, ensuring that they are
even. (Figure 2)
Figure 2

6/5-06.01
6. When male coupling is reached, attach nozzle
and shut off. Invert the last fold while positioning
nozzle on same side as female coupling. This will
protect the nozzle behind last complete fold of
pack. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
7. Place first strap where hose forms the 'radius of
the "U." Use nylon straps no less than 24" in
length Secure buckle in safe location. (Figure 4)
Figure 5
8. Place second and third nylon straps around hose
opposite each other at approximately the middle
of the SCBA bottle. Secure buckles in safe
location.
9. Place fourth and fifth nylon straps approximately 8"
from end of hose packs opposite of
Page 19
ENGINE COMPANY
each other. Ensure that one nylon strap goes through
the nozzle bale encompassing the nozzle. Secure
buckles in a safe location. (Figure 5)
Figure 5
10. When complete, the hose pack's dimensions are
approximately 40" tall by 22" wide. (Figure 6)
Figure 6

6/5-06.02
.02 2 ½" Stinger Assembly (Pigtail)
The 2 ½" Stinger consists of an assembly of the
following hose and fittings:
1 - 8' section of light weight 2 ½" hose.
1 - light weight 2 ½" to 1 ½" gated wye.
2 - I" x 36" nylon straps. (Approximate)
1. Flake out 8' section of 2 ½" light weight hose in
work area.
2. Connect male coupling of 2 ½" light weight hose
to inlet of gated wye. (Figure 7)
Figure 7
3. Wrap 2 ½" light weight hose over top of assembly
until end of hose is reached.
4. Secure assembly with nylon strap. Attach second
strap for carrying. (Figure 8)
Page 20
ENGINE COMPANY
Figure 8

6/6-01.
-01. Engine Company Operations
.01 Types of Engine Companies
.02 Phases of a Hose Evolution
.03 Forward and Reverse Evolutions
.04 Positions of Members
.05 Fifth Position on Apparatus (Two-Piece)
-02. Basic Operations
.01 Terminology
.02 Basic Operations
.03 First Fold Reverse Lay
.04 Provide Sufficient Slack
.05 Breaking a 31/2" Hose Coupling
.06 Making a 31/2" Hose Coupling
.07 Two Member Method-31/2" Hose
Coupling
.08 Breaking a 21/2" Hose Coupling
.09 Making a 21/2" Hose Coupling
.10 Attaching a 21/2" Nozzle
.11 Removing a Nozzle
.12 One Member Fold
.13 Standing on the Line
-03. Modules
.01 Module I-Laying a Supply Line
.02 Module II-Providing a Supply Line
.03 Module III-Removing Fire Fighting
Lines
.04 Module IV-Advancing Fire Fighting
Lines
-04. Hose Evolutions
Page 1
.01 Single Engine Forward 11/2" or 13/4"
.02 Single Engine Forward 21/2" Extension
.03 Single Engine Forward 21/2" Fold
.04 Single Engine Reverse 21/2"
.05 Single Engine Reverse 21/2" Reduced to
1 ½" or 1 ¾ "
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
-05. Hose Evolutions, Above Ground
.01 Line Aloft Via Drop Bag
.02 Hose Packs from Dry or Combination
Standpipes
.03 Line Aloft Via Ladders
.04 Single Engine Forward 11/2" or 13/4" Drop
Bag
.05 Single Engine Forward 21/2" Drop Bag
Fold/Ext.
.06 Single Engine Forward 11/2" - 21/2"
Standpipe Fold/Ext.
.07 Single Engine Forward 21/2" Up Ladders
Fold/Ext.
.08 Single Engine Forward 11/2" or 13/4" Up
Ladder
-06. Hose Evolutions, Two-Piece
.01 Two-Piece Engine, Forward
.02 Two-Piece Engine, Rev. with Engine
.03 Two-Piece Engine, Rev. with 200 Series
.04 Two-Piece Engine, Alley Lay

6/6-01.01
-01. ENGINE COMPANY OPERATIONS
Most commonly, the primary responsibility of an engine
company is to apply an extinguishing agent to an
existing fire. Although engine company members are
often required to perform tasks other than agent
application, this Chapter of the Drill Manual is dedicated
to the various evolutions used to provide water to a fire.
There are many factors which will determine the type of
hose evolution to be applied to a given situation.
Whether or not fire is visible during response, the
volume of fire, the location of the fire, exposure
problems and potential life hazard are but a few of the
factors which will determine the size and number of
lines to be used. This information is taken into account
by the first arriving officer. The method of choice must
be put into operation quickly, safely and effectively.
.01 Three Types of Engine Companies
1. Single Engine Company:
One apparatus, staffed by a Captain, Engineer
and two Firefighters.
2. Two-Piece Engine Company:
Two Apparatus. The lead engine is staffed by a
Captain, Engineer and two Firefighters. The 200
Series engine is staffed by one Engineer.
3. Light Force Company:
The truck is staffed by a Captain, Apparatus
Operator and two Firefighters. The 200 series
engine is staffed by an Engineer and a Firefighter.
.02 Two Phases of a Hose Evolution
1. Supply Phase:
That phase of a hose evolution which allows the
engine apparatus to secure a constant source of
supply from a hydrant.
2. Fire Fighting Phase:
The removal of the selected line or lines from the
apparatus and the advancement of those lines to
the objective.
.03 Forward and Reverse Evolutions
1. Forward Evolution: (Hydrant to fire)
The type of hose evolution which begins with the
laying of a line from a hydrant or other source of
supply. Supply Phase should be completed first.
2. Reverse Evolution: (Fire to hydrant)
The type of hose evolution which begins at the fire
and proceeds to the hydrant or other source of
supply. Fire Fighting Phase should be completed
first.
Page 2
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
.04 Positions of Members
Engineer.
The driver of the apparatus. Completes the supply
phase in a forward evolution. Assists in removing hose
and equipment from the apparatus. Breaks proper
coupling and supplies fire fighting phase with water.
Replaces slack hose.
NOTE: In above ground hose evolutions, the Engineer
may be required to perform additional functions to
complete the evolution.
Nozzle Member:
Rides in the right-front jumpseat of the apparatus.
Acquires nozzle, attaches nozzle, advances nozzle and
slack hose to objective.
Hydrant Member.
Rides left-front jumpseat of the apparatus. Lays the line
with the 4-way valve. Supplies engine with water at
proper time. Replaces hydrant tools. Assists officer and
nozzle member in advancing lines, etc.
.05 Fifth Position on Apparatus-(Two Piece)
Engineer-200 Series:
Drives second pumping apparatus in a two-piece engine
company. Supplies water from hydrant to lead
apparatus.
NOTE: When the 200 series engine is positioned at the
fire, the Engineer performs same operations as the
engine Engineer.

6/6-02.01
-02. BASIC OPERATIONS
Hose-evolutions are performed by members so that
water may be applied to an existing emergency situation
in a timely, efficient and safe manner. Each hose
evolution is an accumulation of several "Basic
Operations." Prior to engaging in complete hose
evolutions, each member must have a complete
understanding of, and be able to perform, each of the
"Basic Operations."'
.01 Terminology
Brass: This refers to couplings and fittings. A general
term for any fitting.
Couplings: Couplings are to be hand-tight, unless
conditions warrant the use of a spanner.
Dressing the hose: Make it orderly. This enables finding
the hose patterns. It also removes some of the kinks
from the hose before it is loaded.
First Fold Reverse Lay: Used to provide the first section
of 2 ½" hose on the ground behind the apparatus.
Folds at the objective: Folds are laid away from the
objective and toward the source of supply (when
possible). This places the nozzle and the couplings in
proper position for advancing.
Hose Sling: Consists of two snap hooks that lock
automatically and is a single continuous loop
approximately 5'long made up of nylon webbing similar
to that used in summer belts. It is carried pre-attached to
the 3 ½" hose for laying a line on two-piece engine
companies only.
Natural Grip: The same grip used to shake a hand
(thumb up). Used when making and breaking couplings
behind the nozzle.
Nozzles: When a nozzle is connected or grounded, it
shall be shut off in all cases. When grounded, the hose
is straightened for at least 5' behind the nozzle.
Proper Hose Grip: Keep thumb against index finger (not
around the hose) when handling it. Injuries to the thumb
will occur if the hose hangs up on the apparatus or other
objects. (Figure 1)
Exceptions:
1. Making or breaking couplings.
2. Attaching or removing nozzles.
3. Making a one-member fold.
4. Bedding hose in apparatus.
Page 3
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 1
Pulling Folds (Arm Position): Used to place additional
hose on the ground behind the apparatus. The hand and
arm which are pulling a fold shall be straight. This is to
prevent arm injury if hose should hang up in hose bed.
(Figure 2)
Figure 2
Running Line: Used to provide a coupling in the work
area.

6/6-02.02
Stay out of the Folds: When executing a hose lay, or
anytime when handling hose, stay out of the folds.
Injury can result from becoming entangled in the
hose. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
Stealing Hose from the Lay: Taking hose away from the
fire fighting phase of the hose lay. When handling
1 ½" and 1 ¾" hose, a member may, if coupling is
within 3' of a discharge gate, pull the coupling
back into the work area and break it. In above
ground hose lays, if there is sufficient hose at the
base of the objective, a member may steal from
the lay.
Sufficient Slack: Used to provide sufficient slack hose on
the ground for the nozzle member to attach a
nozzle and shoulder when using an extension lay.
Tailboard Area: When preparing to break couplings
coming out of the hose bed, always pull 3 ½" and
2 ½" couplings to within 3' of the tailboard before
breaking. Pull 1 ½" and 1 ¾" couplings to within 3'
of running board, at the transverse hose bed,
before breaking. This will make it easier to bed the
coupling.
Unnatural grip: Little finger up (reverse of natural) grip.
Used to remove nozzles from the apparatus.
Page 4
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Work area: An area 3' out from the side of an engine
apparatus starting at the rear axle and extending
8' to 10' to the rear of the tailboard. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
NOTE: This area is also referred to as the "danger
area."
.02 Basic Operations
Running Line: Used to provide a coupling in the work
area behind an apparatus.
Requirements:
1. Stand on the ground behind the apparatus to the
side the running line is to be pulled to. Face to the
rear. (Figure 5)

6/6-02.02
Figure 5
2. With the hand next to the hose, grasp the hose
with the proper grip (grasp from beneath the
hose).
3. Proceed toward the rear, always facing the
direction of travel, until a coupling drops into the
work area.
4. If pulling a running line for a supply line, ensure
that sufficient hose has been removed to reach
the suction inlet.
5. Upon hearing a coupling strike the ground, stop
and visually check to ensure that the coupling is
actually on the ground in the work area. If it is not,
face the rear and take additional steps as
necessary.
6. If the coupling is in the work area, dress the running
line one time and drop the hose.
Pulling Folds: Used to place additional hose on the
ground behind the apparatus.
Requirements:
1. When safe to do so, approach the rear of the
apparatus and position yourself on the side of the
hose away from the fire. Face the fire side.
2. With the hand nearest the apparatus, grasp the 2
½" hose with the proper hose grip (grasp from
beneath the hose).
3. Turn and proceed toward the rear, always facing
the direction of travel, until a coupling drops into
the work area.
Page 5
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
4. Upon hearing the coupling strike the ground stop
and visually check to ensure that the coupling is
actually on the ground in the work area. (Figure 6)
If it is not, face the rear and take additional steps
as necessary.
Figure 6
5. If the coupling is in the work area, dress the
running fold one time and drop the hose.

6/6-02.03
.03 First Fold Reverse Lay
Used to provide the first section of 2 ½" hose on the
ground behind the apparatus.
Requirements:
1. Break the cross-bed connection between the hose
beds using both hands to break the seal of the
gasket. Complete breaking the coupling with one
hand maintaining a brass grip on the coupling or a
hose grip directly behind the coupling. (Figure 7)
Figure 7
2. When the coupling is removed, capture it with a
two-handed brass grip, pivot 180' to the rear and
place the coupling over the shoulder on the fire
side.
3. Position the coupling forward on the shoulder and
capture it in place with a hose grip between the
coupling and the face using the hand on the fire
side. (Figure 8)
Page 6
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 8
4. Proceed to the rear, always facing the direction of
travel, until a coupling drops into the work area.
5. Upon hearing a coupling strike the ground, stop
and visually check to ensure that the coupling is
actually on the ground in the work area. If not,
face the rear and take additional steps as
necessary. (Figure 9)
Figure 9

6/6-02.04
6. If the coupling is in the work area, pivot 180*
toward the fire side and proceed to the area
adjacent to the rear duals on the fire side of the
apparatus. (Figure 10)
Figure 10
.04 Provide Sufficient Slack
Used to provide sufficient slack for the -nozzle member
to attach a nozzle when using an extension lay.
Requirements:
1. Break the cross-bed connection between the
hosebeds using both hands to break the gasket
seal. Complete breaking the coupling with one
hand and maintaining a brass grip on the coupling
or a hose grip directly behind the coupling.
2. Grasp the coupling using a brass grip with the
hand on the fire side.
Page 7
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
3. With the other hand grasp the hose, and when
safe to do so, pull the hose away from the fire
side. This will provide sufficient slack hose to
reach the nozzle member. (Figure 11)
Figure 11
.05 Breaking a 3 ½" Hose Coupling
Requirements:
1. Approach the coupling from the convenient side.
2. Step on the male coupling with the proper foot.
The foot then slides back on the hose immediately
behind the coupling. This will thrust the coupling
upward. (Figure 12)
Figure 12

6/6-02.06
3. Squat down with the elbows on the inside of the
knees, use both hands to break the seal of the
gasket on the female coupling. (Figure 13)
Figure 13
4. When the seal has been broken, locate the hand
furthest from the coupling in either a brass grip on
the rear of the female coupling or a hose grip
directly behind the female coupling.
5. With the other hand, finish unscrewing the female
coupling. (Figure 14)
Figure 14
6. When the coupling is broken, capture the female
coupling by reaching over the hose with the
proper hose grip. Use both hands to break the
female coupling over the wrist. (Figure 15)
Page 8
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 15
7. The male coupling is then captured by reaching
over the hose with a proper hose grip and broken
over the wrist with a single-handed motion.
8. Keep elbows between the knees. Do not allow the
couplings to swing away from the body.(Figure 16)
Stand up.
Figure 16
.06 Making a 3 ½" Hose Coupling
Requirements:
1. Grasp the female coupling with both hands.
2. Step on the male coupling with the proper foot.
The foot then slides back on the hose immediately

6/6-02.07
behind the coupling. This will thrust the coupling
upward.
3. Make a gasket check with the convenient hand
and make the coupling.
.07 Two-Member Method- 3 ½” Hose Coupling
Requirements:
1. One member grasps the female coupling using a
two-handed brass grip.
2. Other member grasps the male coupling using a
two-handed brass grip. (Figure 17)
Figure 17
3. Member with the female coupling makes a gasket
check with the convenient hand.
4. Member with the male coupling will hold the
coupling at waist height and look slightly away to
reduce the possibility of cross threading the
coupling. (Figure 18)
Page 9
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 18
5 Member with the female coupling will make the
.08 Breaking a 2 ½" Hose Coupling
Requirements:
1. Approach the coupling from the convenient side.
2. Step on the male coupling with the proper foot.
The foot then slides back on the hose immediately
behind the coupling. This will thrust the coupling
upward. (Figure 19)
Figure 19

6/6-02.09
3. Squat down with the elbows on the inside of the
knees, use both hands to break the seal of the
gasket on the female coupling. (Figure 20)
Figure 20
4. When the seal has been broken, locate the hand
farthest from the coupling in either a brass grip on
the rear of the female coupling or a hose grip
directly behind the female coupling.
5. With the other hand, finish unscrewing the female
coupling. (Figure 21)
Figure 21
6. When the coupling is broken, capture both the
male and female portions by reaching over the
hose with the proper hose grip. Break both halves
of the coupling over the wrists. (Figure 22)
Page 10
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 22
7. Keep elbows between the knees. Do not allow the
couplings to swing away from the body. (Figure
23) Stand up.
Figure 23
.09 Making a 2 ½" Hose Coupling
Requirements:
1. Grasp the male coupling in the left hand, palm up.
NOTE: Anytime a 21/2" coupling is being made,
the male coupling always goes in the left hand.
2. Grasp the female coupling in the right hand, palm
down.

6/6-02.10
3. Pivot toward the male coupling and make a work
table with the left hand on the left leg. (Figure 24)
Figure 24
4. Capture the hose behind the female coupling
between the rig arm and the upper body.
5. Make a physical gasket check and make the
coupling, using a "ratcheting" motion on the
female swivel. (Figure 25)'
Page 11
Figure 25
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
.10 Attaching a 2 1/2" Nozzle
Requirements:
1. Obtain the correct nozzle and hold it by the tip in
the right hand.
2. Grasp the hose coupling in the left hand and take
two steps forward, right foot first.
3. Make a work table with the coupling on the left leg
just above the knee.
4. Make a visual gasket check and attach the nozzle
to the hose coupling. (Figure 26)
Figure 26
5. Place the left hand on the hose just behind the
coupling and break the nozzle over the left hand
(tip now pointing down).

6/6-02.11
6. Shut the nozzle off with the right hand. (Figure 27)
Figure 27
7. Place the right hand under the hose just behind the
nozzle (Figure 28) and pivot 180' counter
clockwise. Nozzle is now over the back of the right
shoulder. (Figure 29)
Page 12
Figure 28
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 29
11 Removing a Nozzle Requirements:
Requirements:
1. Pick up nozzle with both hands, grasping the nozzle
tip with right hand.
2. Left hand forms a work table on the left leg,
grasping hose coupling in left hand. (Figure 30)
Figure 30

6/6-02.12
3. Right hand regrasps nozzle at the lowest point
(shut-off butt or double male). (Figure 31)
Figure 31
4. Break the seal of the gasket.
5. Place the right hand on the nozzle tip and remove
the nozzle from the hose coupling.
.12 One Member Fold
Used to provide an additional section of hose with a
nozzle attached to an already existing fire fighting line.
Requirements:
1. Flake out one section of hose. Dress hose flat and
straight. (Figure 32)
Page 13
Figure 32
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
2.Break coupling and come up with both couplings.
Have male in left hand. With right hand, bed female
coupling. Retain male coupling.
3. Obtain the correct nozzle (no double male) and
attach to male coupling. Shut nozzle off.
4. While facing the section of hose, place the nozzle
over the back of the right shoulder. (Figure 33)
Figure 33

6/6-02.12
5. Walk into the section of hose, grasping it with the
hands until a loop of hose reaches the ground.
Grasp the loop of hose and place it halfway over
the right shoulder. (Figure 34)
Figure 34
6. This process is repeated until the end of the line
Figure 35
7. The female coupling is captured with the right
hand on top of the one member fold. The one
member fold is carried on the right shoulder
captured with the right hand. (Figure 36)
Page 14
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 36
8. The one member fold is dropped 25' short of the
nozzle on the line to be extended. To drop the one
member fold, capture the female coupling with the
left hand (hand replaces hand), grasp the nozzle
with an unnatural grip with the right hand. (Figure
37) Dip the right shoulder and drop the fold to the
ground. The nozzle and female coupling are
advanced while being held at waist height.
Figure 37

6/6-02.13
.13 Standing on the Line
Used as a means of securing the fire fighting portion of
a hose lay when employing a reverse (fire to hydrant)
hose lay.
Requirements:
1. Stand to the rear of the apparatus on the side of
the folds opposite the fire.
2. Stand facing the folds and fire.
3. Place the rear foot on the hose perpendicular to
the hose itself. (Figure 38)
Figure 38
4. Place the front foot in a convenient position for
stability, out of the folds.
5. Reach well forward on the hose leading into the
hose bed, grasp it with both hands, bring it up
toward your chest with a proper hose grip. Elbows
are high. (Figure 39)
Page 15
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 39
6. Signal the driver to "take off."
7. When two couplings have been dropped by the
apparatus or the apparatus stops, ground the loop
on the side away from the fire. (Figure 40)
Figure 40
NOTE: The member should be 5' from any coupling to
the rear and 10' from any coupling in front when
standing on hose.

6/6-03.01
-03. MODULES
Engine company hose lays may be broken down into
four distinct portions or modules. These modules, when
put together in a specific sequence, will result in the type
of hose lay required to abate the emergency.
The four modules are:
1. Laying a 3 ½" supply line with or without a 4way
valve.
2. Providing a 3 ½" supply line.
3. Removing fire fighting lines.
4. Advancing fire fighting lines.
.01 Module I-Laying a 3 ½” Supply Line with or
without a 4-way valve
Laying a 3 ½" supply line is used to provide a
continuous supply of water from a fire hydrant to an
engine apparatus at the fire (forward lay). If a singleengine
company is laying the line, a 4-way valve will be
utilized on the hydrant. If a two-piece engine company is
laying the line, the 4-way valve is not used. The line is
laid without the 4-way valve to the hydrant. The 3 ½"
supply line is connected directly to the 200 Series
engine (pump) spotted on the hydrant after sufficient
hose is on the ground.
Laying a 3 ½" Supply Line with a 4-way valve (Single
Engine):
1. The hydrant member rides in the jumpseat of the
engine apparatus on the panel side (behind the
Engineer), seat belt fastened.
2. After the engine has stopped at the hydrant, the
officer will give the command to "lay-a-line." Upon
this command, the hydrant member will unfasten
the seat belt and proceed to the rear of the
apparatus. (Figure 1)
3. The hydrant member will acquire the hydrant sling
and place it over the arm and shoulder on the side
opposite the hydrant.
Page 16
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 1
4. While standing on the ground and facing forward,
the hydrant member will grasp the handle of the 4way
valve with the hand on the hydrant side using
a split grip. (Figure 2)
Figure 2

6/6-03.01
5 The hand away from the hydrant, will be
positioned behind the 4-way valve clear of the
hose, grasping the nut in the web of the thumb
and forefinger. (Also a natural grip.) (Figure 3)
Figure 3
6. With both hands, the 4-way valve will be lifted
clear of the bracket. Bend at the knees to remove
4-way valve from apparatus.
7. The hydrant member will pivot 180' toward the
hydrant and place the 4-way valve well up on the
hydrant side hip with bell reducer facing toward
the rear. (Figure 4)
Page 17
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 4
NOTE: If the 4-way valve is placed on the right hip, the
31/2" hose and coupling will be pointed down. If the
4-way valve is placed on the left hip, the hose and
coupling will be pointed up.
8. After completing the pivot, the hydrant member
will proceed away from the tailboard of the
apparatus, removing sufficient hose to ensure
being able to go around the hydrant to a point
even with the officer or engineer (6 to 10 steps
depending on the individual). (Figure 5)
Figure 5

6/6-03.01
9. When hose has been pulled to the rear of the
apparatus, stop to ensure that sufficient hose has
been provided to reach cab of apparatus. The
hydrant member will pivot 180' toward the hydrant
and proceed around the hydrant toward the driver
or officer. (Figure 6)
Figure 6
NOTE: Dip shoulder when making turn around hydrant.
10. Stop, face the driver or officer, and signal the
driver to "take off." (Figure 7)
Figure 7
11. On the command "take off," the driver will begin
moving the apparatus. The hydrant member will
continue the hydrant operation when the
apparatus stops or when two couplings have hit
the ground.
12. At the proper time, the hydrant member will pivot
into the 4-way valve placing it on the other hip and
proceed back toward the hydrant, being careful
not to walk in the folds (Figure 8), and positions
self in front of the proper outlet. The hydrant
member will then squat down in front
Page 18
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
of the outlet and place the 4-way valve down on
the unused female inlet on its own hose. (Figure
9)
Figure 8
Figure 9
13. Keeping the 4-way valve secured between the
knees, select the correct spanner to be used to
remove the hydrant cap. With spanner hook away,
remove the hydrant cap, check the hydrant
threads and place all unused tools and equipment
in the "V" formed by the hose around the hydrant.
14. Remove the 4" to 2 ½" bell reducer if necessary.

6/6-03.01
NOTE: To select the proper hydrant outlet when
encountering a double hydrant, use the following
criteria:
a. Use the 2 ½" outlet when encountering a 2 ½"
by 4" hydrant.
b. Use the outlet pointing toward the fire when
encountering a double 4" hydrant.
15. Grasp the 4-way valve using the split grip with one
hand, stand up in front of the outlet, and make a
gasket check with the other hand. (Figure 10) The
female inlet with the winged lugs will then be
connected to the hydrant outlet.
Figure 10
16. Check direction of flow handle to ensure that it is
pointing in the direction of the supply line. (Figure
11)
Page 19
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 11
17. If the 4-way valve is attached to the hydrant, and
it is noted that the hose is pointing away from the
apparatus, tighten the female coupling on the 4way
valve only until the gasket starts to seat.
Check the direction of flow handle. Turn the 4-way
valve upside down to point hose toward the
apparatus. (Figure 12) Place slack hose on the
ground, and tighten the connection.
Figure 12

6/6-03.01
18. After the connection is made, proceed around the
hydrant to the bight of hose. With the inside hand,
grasp the end of the bight of hose with a proper
hose grip (Figure 13), and proceed around the
hydrant with the first of two "walks" used to clear
the street of hose.
Page 20
Figure 13
As the hose becomes tight, stop forward motion,
look back to see that the hose is not tangled, and
drop the fold of hose. (Figure 14)
Figure 14
Step toward the hose in the street, grasp the hose
once again with a proper grip and proceed with
the second "walk" to clear the street of slack hose.
As the hose becomes tight, stop forward motion,
look back to ensure that the hose has not tangled,
and drop the fold of hose. (Figure 15)
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 15
19. Proceed to the side of the hydrant opposite the
street (adjacent to the hydrant stem). Place the
spanner on the correct hydrant stem in the proper
position (handle to left with the tang away from the
hand). Avoid standing directly in line with the
hydrant stem. (Figure 16)
Figure 16
Open the hydrant on the call for water. Hydrant
tools and equipment, with the exception of the
hydrant cap, are then carried to the apparatus and
placed in a convenient compartment on the side
opposite the fire. When returning to apparatus,
member shall ensure that all kinks in hose are
removed.

6/6-03.01
Laying a 3 ½" Supply Line without a 4-way valve:
When the engine of a two-piece engine company is
laying a line in conjunction with the 200 Series, it is not
necessary to use the 4-way valve. The following
methods can be used:
1. The hydrant member rides in the jumpseat of the
engine apparatus behind the engineer, seat belt
fastened.
2. After the apparatus has stopped, approximately 15'
past the hydrant, the officer will give the command
"Lay-a-Line." Upon this command, the hydrant
member will unfasten the seat belt and proceed to
the rear of the apparatus.
3. Place spanners and hose sling in rear
compartment.
4, While standing on the ground and facing forward,
the hydrant member will remove the 3 ½" female
coupling from the 4-way valve, ensuring that the 2
½" to 3 ½" increaser remains on the 4- way valve.
(Figure 17)
Page 21
Figure 17
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
5. Capturing the 3 ½" female coupling with a two
handed brass grip, hydrant member will pivot 180'
towards the hydrant and place the coupling over
the shoulder on the hydrant side. Assume proper
hose grip between coupling and face. (Figure 18)
Figure 18
6. After completing the pivot, the hydrant member will
proceed to the rear of the apparatus, 10' to 12' past
the hydrant. (Figure 19)
Figure 19

6/6-03.01
7. When sufficient hose has been pulled to the rear of
the apparatus, the hydrant member will pivot 180'
towards the hydrant and proceed around the
hydrant until the slack hose is tight against the
hydrant base. (Figure 20)
Figure 20
8. Hydrant member will remove the coupling from the
shoulder and wrap the hose around the hydrant,
pulling the line taut and grounding the coupling
clear of the hydrant. (Figure 21)
Figure 21
9. Hydrant member re-mounts the apparatus
jumpseat, fastens seat belt and signals the
engineer to proceed to the fire ("take off").
Page 22
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Alternate Method (using hose sling):
NOTE: This method is for two-piece engine company
operations only.
1. Engine stops 25' in front of hydrant.
2. Engineer on 200 Series engine spots apparatus at
the hydrant.
3. Hydrant member prepares to lay the line upon
command of the officer.
4. Hydrant member goes to tailboard area of the
engine and removes spanners placing them in the
rear compartment. The hydrant member then
disconnects the 3 ½" hose from the 4-way valve,
being sure to leave the 2 ½" to 3 ½" increaser on
the 4-way valve.
5. Hydrant member places the 3 ½" coupling on the
hip towards the hydrant and then grasps the hose
sling with the other hand. (Figure 22) Hydrant
member then pivots 180' towards the hydrant.
This will place the 3 ½" coupling and hose sling on
the same side. (Figure 23)
Figure 22

6/6-03.02
Figure 23
6. Hydrant member, with two hands on the coupling
and the hose sling (Figure 24), will go around the
hydrant and place the sling on the hydrant barrel or
on the hydrant stem closest to the engine. (Figure
25) The hydrant member will then lay the 3 ½"
coupling on the ground. (Figure 25A)
Page 23
Figure 24
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 25
Figure 25A
7. Hydrant member returns to the engine, gets in
jumpseat and tells the engineer to "take off."
.02 Module II-Providing a 3 1/2" Supply Line
There are two methods of providing a 31/2" supply line.
The first, and by far the most frequently used, is the
forward lay (hydrant to fire). The second method is the
reverse lay (fire to hydrant).
Forward Lay-(Hydrant to Fire):
In a forward lay (hydrant to fire), it is necessary to
complete the supply phase of the evolution prior to
removing and advancing fire fighting lines. This

6/6-03.02
involves pulling a running line on the 3 ½” hose laid
from the hydrant, breaking the line and connecting the 3
½" male hose coupling to the suction inlet on the panel
side of the engine apparatus.
1. The engineer approaches the line laid from the
panel side of the apparatus.
2. Stand on the ground, face to the rear, and grasp
the 3 ½" hose with a hose grip.
3. Proceed to the rear, always facing the direction of
travel, until a coupling drops in the work area.
4. Check to determine that sufficient hose has been
pulled to reach the suction inlet. Dress the running
line. (Figure 26)
Figure 26
5. Return to the tailboard area and pull coupling within
3’ of tailboard. Break the 3 ½" hose coupling. Bed
the unused female coupling.
Page 24
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
6. Shoulder the male coupling on the inside shoulder
and proceed to the suction inlet on the panel side.
(Figure 27)
Figure 27
7. Members may now begin the fire fighting phase of
the hose evolution.
8. Make a gasket check and attach the 3 ½" male
hose coupling to the main suction inlet. (Figure 28)
Figure 28

6/6-03.02
9. Call for water. (Figure 29)
Figure 29
Reverse Lay-(Fire to Hydrant):
In a reverse lay (fire to hydrant), the fire fighting line is
removed at the fire and connected to the 3 ½" female
coupling. With a member standing on the line, the
engine apparatus proceeds to the hydrant, hooks up and
pumps back to the fire fighting line.
1. Prior to the beginning of the fire fighting phase of
the hose evolution, the hydrant member removes
spanners from 3 ½" hose bed and places in very
rear compartment. Hydrant member then
disconnects 3 ½" coupling and 2 ½" to 3 ½"'
increaser from 4-way and places coupling on- the
ground adjacent to left side of tailboard area.
2. As soon as practicable, nozzle member steps into
work area after spanners are put away and breaks
cross connect. Nozzle member then places
coupling on shoulder towards the fire side and
prepares to pull the first fold of a reverse lay.
3. Nozzle member pulls the first fold of a reverse
lay. After hydrant member grounds the 3 ½"
coupling and is out of the work area, the nozzle
member pulls the first fold of a reverse lay to the
fire side. The nozzle member sets the coupling on
the ground at the rear duals.
4. Nozzle member acquires proper nozzle and goes
to rear duals on the fire side.
5. Nozzle member takes the coupling and attaches
the nozzle, then sets the nozzle down.
6. Hydrant member, after grounding the 3 ½"
coupling, will prepare to pull folds from the proper
side of the apparatus.
7. Hydrant member steps into work area to pull a fold,
only after nozzle member goes past the tailboard
with the first fold.
Page 25
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
8. Nozzle member, after attaching the nozzle, shall
proceed around the front of the apparatus and
take a position on the proper side of the apparatus
to pull folds.
9. After the proper number of folds have been pulled,
the convenient member (nozzle member or
hydrant member) will break the 2 ½" coupling and
come up with the female coupling. The member
breaking the 2 ½" coupling shall then bed the
female coupling and dress the hose bed.
10. The nozzle member and hydrant member will get
the proper fittings (the proper fittings can either be
A, B or Q:
A. - 4-way valve
- 2 ½" double male
- 2 ½" gated wye
- 2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
B. - 3 ½" to 2 ½" gated wye
- 3 ½" double male
- 2 ½" double female
- 2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
C. - 2 ½" gated wye
- 2 ½" double male
- 2 ½" double female
- 2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
Working as a team, the nozzle member and the
hydrant member will connect the 3 ½" hose to the
2 ½" hose using the proper fittings.
11. The nozzle member, after the connection is made,
will shoulder the nozzle and prepare to take off.
12. Hydrant member will stand on the line and signal
the engineer to "take off." The hydrant member
will ground the loop away from the fire after two
couplings have been grounded or the apparatus
stops.
13. On the command to "take off," the engineer shall
proceed with the apparatus to the hydrant. The
engineer pulls a 3 ½" running line to the fire side
of the apparatus, breaks the coupling, beds the
female coupling and connects the line to a
discharge gate on the fire side of the apparatus
NOTE: The "reverse lay" method, when used by a
single engine company, is far slower and less
efficient than a "forward lay." Generally it is more
effective to go past the fire, make a "U turn" and
lay back to the fire with a "forward lay."
Additionally, when using a "reverse lay," all
required equipment shall be removed from the
engine apparatus before sending it to the hydrant.

6/6-03.03
.03 Module III-Removing Fire Fighting Lines
Prior to advancing nozzles, couplings and hose to an
objective, they must be properly, safely and efficiently
removed from the apparatus, This module reflects the
correct methods for removing 1", 1 ½", 1 ¾" and 2 ½"
lines from an apparatus prior to advancing to an
objective.
Removing fire fighting lines is the second phase of
"forward lays" (after providing a 3 ½" supply line) and
the first phase of a reverse lay" (before providing a 3 ½"
supply line).
The methods used for removing fire fighting lines are
the same, whether performing a "forward lay" or a
"reverse lay."
Removing 1", 1 ½" and 1 ¾" lines:
1. Approach the transverse hose bed from the fire
side of the apparatus, mount the running board of
the apparatus adjacent to the hose bed to be used.
NOTE: If the fire is at an angle to the front of the
apparatus, use the front transverse hose bed. If the
fire is at an angle to the rear of the apparatus, use
the rear transverse hose bed.
2. Acquire the nozzle, shut it off and place it over the
back of the right shoulder. Grasp the hose in front
of and slightly below the right shoulder. Look over
shoulder to ensure area is clear before stepping
down from the running board. (Figure 30)
Page 26
Figure 30
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
3. Place the right hand and arm through the loop of
hose extending from the hose bed. Recapture the
hose leading over the right shoulder with the right
hand. (Figure 31)
Figure 31
4. Proceed directly away from the apparatus until a
coupling is removed from the hose bed. (Figure 32)
Figure 32
When loop is clear, proceed toward objective.

6/6-03.04
Removing 2 ½" line (extension lay):
1. Break the cross connection between the hose beds
using both hands to break the gasket seal.
Complete breaking the coupling, with one hand,
maintaining a brass grip on the coupling or a hose
grip directly behind the coupling.
2. Grasp the coupling using a brass grip with hand on
the fire side.
3. With the other hand, grasp the hose, and when
safe to do so, pull the hose away from the fire side.
This will provide sufficient slack hose to reach the
nozzle member.
Removing a 2 ½" line (pulling folds):
1. Break the cross connection between the hose beds
using both hands to break the seal of the gasket.
After the seal is broken, complete breaking the
coupling, with one hand maintaining a brass grip on
the coupling or a hose grip directly behind the
coupling.
2. When the coupling is removed, capture it with a
two-handed brass grip, pivot 180' to the rear, and
place the coupling over the shoulder on the fire
side.
3. Position the coupling forward on the shoulder and
capture it in place with a hose grip between the
coupling and the face, using the hand on the fire
side.
4. When it is safe, proceed to the rear, always facing
the direction of travel, until the coupling drops into
the work area.
5. Upon hearing a coupling strike the ground, stop
and visually check to ensure that the coupling is
actually in the work area. If the coupling has not
exited the hose bed, then face the rear and take
additional steps as necessary.
6. If the coupling is in the work area, pivot 180'
towards the fire side and proceed to the area
adjacent to the rear duals on the fire side of the
apparatus.
7. When safe to do so, approach the rear of the
apparatus and position yourself on the side of the
hose bed away from the fire (face the fire side).
8. With the hand nearest the apparatus, grasp the
2 ½" hose with the proper hose grip (grasp from
beneath the hose).
9. Turn and proceed toward the rear, always facing
the direction of travel. Proceed until a coupling
drops into the work area.
10. Upon hearing a coupling strike the ground, stop
and visually check to ensure that the coupling is
actually in the work area. If the coupling has not
exited the hose bed, then face the rear and
Page 27
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
take additional steps as necessary.
11. If the coupling is in the work area, then dress the
fold one time and drop it.
12. To pull additional folds, always return on the side
away from the nozzle.
13. Pull additional folds until the required amount of
hose has been removed from the apparatus.
.04 Module IV-Advancing Fire Fighting Lines
Advancing fire fighting lines includes all steps necessary
to advance nozzles, hose and couplings to the objective.
1. Advancing of Nozzles:
All nozzles shall be advanced with the nozzle placed
over the back of the right shoulder. The right elbow
is held high. The right hand maintains a hose grip on
the hose just below and in front of the right shoulder.
(Figure 33)
Figure 33

6/6-03.04
2. Advancing couplings:
2 ½" hose couplings shall be advanced on the
proper shoulder with the elbow held high. The
coupling is in front of and below the shoulder.
Page 28
The hand maintains a hose grip on the hose
between the coupling and the shoulder. (Figure
34)
Figure 34
1 ½" and 1" couplings shall be advanced by
carrying the coupling with a brass grip at arms
length with the proper hand. The arm shall be
straight. (Figure 35)
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 35
NOTE: The "proper shoulder," as it applies to
advancing 2 ½"couplings, and the "proper hand,"
as it applies to advancing 1 ½" and 1 " couplings,
is that shoulder or hand that allows the member to
advance the coupling to the nozzle without
walking in the folds laid down previously.
3. Supply Side:
In order for a hose evolution to be performed
correctly, and in order to place hose couplings at
an objective in a manner that facilitates
advancement, it is necessary to designate to
which side of a nozzle the couplings shall be
placed. This shall be referred to as the supply
side.

6/6-03.04
Open Fires: (Figure 36)
FIGURE NO. 36
ADVANCING HOSE LINES TO OPEN FIRES
COUPLING PLACEMENT FOR PROPER SHOULDER FOR
HAND FOR ADVANCING TO OPEN FIRE
FROM APPARATUS TO: RIGHT REAR
2 ½" - RIGHT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" RIGHT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: RIGHT FRONT
2 ½" - LEFT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LEFT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: LEFT REAR
2 ½" - LEFT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LEFT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO; LEFT FRONT
2 ½" - RIGHT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1¾" RIGHT HAND
RIGHT SHOULDER LEFT SHOULDER
RIGHT HAND LEFT HAND
LEFT SHOULDER RIGHT SHOULDER
LEFT HAND RIGHT HAND
Figure 36
To determine the supply side of a nozzle when
encountering an open fire (any fire not in a structure), do
the following:
a. Draw an imaginary line perpendicular to and out
from the fire side of the apparatus.
b. Lay the couplings down on the side of the nozzle
nearest the imaginary line. (Figures 37, 38 and 39)
Page 29
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
To Hydrant
To Hydrant
FIGURE 37
2 ½” HANK LINE – FOLDS METHOD
OPEN FIRE
Figure 37

6/6-03.04
TO HYDRANT
TO HYDRANT
Page 30
FIGURE 38
2 ½" HAND LINE - EXTENSION LAY
OPEN FIRE
Figure 38
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
FIGURE 39
Figure 39

6/6-03.04
Fires inside a doorway: (Figure 40)
FIGURE 40
ADVANCING HOSE LINES
COUPLING PLACEMENT FOR PROPER SHOULDER
OR HAND
FOR ADVANCING TO DOOR FIRE
FROM APPARATUS TO: RIGHT REAR
2 ½" LEFF SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LEFT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: RIGHT FRONT
2 ½" - RIGHT SHOULDER 1 ½” OR 1 ¾” RIGHT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: LEFT REAR
2 ½" - RIGHT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" RIGHT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: LEFT FRONT
2 ½" - LEFF SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LEFT HAND
TO HYDRANT
Figure 40
To determine the correct placement of the nozzle and
couplings when encountering a fire inside a doorway, do
the following:
a. Lay the nozzle down at the side of the doorway
nearest the apparatus.
b. Lay the couplings down, one after another, straight
out from the center of the doorway.
Page 31
Proper placement of nozzles, hose, and couplings
allows the line, once loaded to be advanced
effectively and with a minimum of resistance.
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS

6/6-04.
-04. HOSE EVOLUTIONS
HOSE LAY REFERENCE LIST
HOSE LAYS MANUAL REFERENCE
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
1 Forward Lay 1 ½” or 1 ¾" Hand Line ......................................6/6-04.01
2 Forward Lay 2 ½" Extension ......... .........................................6/6-04.02
3 Forward Lay 2 ½" Folds Method .............................................6/6-04.03
4 Reverse Lay 2 ½" Folds Method .............................................6/6-04.04
5 Reverse Lay 2 ½" Reduced to 1 ½" or 1 ¾".. ........ .................6/6-04.05
Above Ground Hose Lays
6 Forward Lay 1 ½" or 13/4" Drop Bag .....................................6/6-05.04
7 Forward Lay 2 ½" Drop Bag ..................................................6/6-05.05
Folds/Extension Methods
8. Forward Lay Standpipe .........................................................6/6-05.06
Folds/Extension Methods
9 Forward Lay 2 ½" Up Ladder .................................................6/6-05.07
Folds/Extension Methods
10 Forward Lay 1 ½" or 1 ¾" Ladder ...........................................6/6-05.08
Page 32
Two Piece Engine
Two Piece Normal Forward Lay ..........................................6/6-06.01
Two Piece Reverse with Engine .........................................6/6-06.02
Two Piece Reverse with 200 Series ....................................6/6-06.03
Two Piece Alley Lay............................................................6/6-06.04

6/6-04.01
.01 Hose Lay No. 1
Single Engine Forward: Hydrant to fire-single 3 ½"
supply line, 1 ½" or 1 ¾" hand line from transverse hose
bed.
1. Engineer stops the apparatus at the hydrant.
2. Upon command from the officer, the hydrant
member lays the line using the 4-way valve.
Engineer, upon signal from the hydrant member to
"take off," proceeds to the fire with the apparatus.
3. Officer orders the type of hose lay and the number
of couplings at the objective. If the officer does
not order any couplings at the fire, then the nozzle
member will advance a 1 ½" or 1 ¾" package
only.
4. Hydrant member shall complete the hydrant
operation at the proper time. Hydrant member will
not open the hydrant until "water" is called for by
the engineer. After opening the hydrant, the
hydrant member will return to the apparatus.
Hydrant member is responsible for removing kinks
and tightening couplings from the hydrant to the
apparatus.
5. Engineer pulls a running line, for supply, from the
panel side and dresses the line. Engineer then
pulls hose coupling within 3' of the tailboard,
breaks coupling and places 3 ½" female coupling
in hose bed. The engineer shoulders male
coupling on inside shoulder and proceeds to
suction inlet on panel side and makes hook up.
The engineer then steps out of the work area and
calls for "water."
6. Nozzle member proceeds to transverse hose bed
and removes fire fighting line.
NOTE: If the fire is towards the left rear of the
apparatus, nozzle member will not advance 1 ½"
or 1 ¾" until engineer steps to the front, out of the
work area, and calls for water.
7. Nozzle member and hydrant member advance the
fire fighting line to objective. After proper number
of couplings are at the objective, the nozzle
member regains control of the nozzle and calls for
water.
8. Hydrant member shall, after proper number of
couplings are at the objective, back up the nozzle
member on the hose line.
9. Engineer, upon call for water, can (if coupling is
within 3' of discharge gate) pull coupling back into
work area, break coupling and bed the male.
Engineer then attaches female to discharge gate.
If not within 3' of discharge gate, the engineer will
pull a running line from the wide angle side, pull
coupling into work area and break coupling.
Page 33
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
The engineer will then bed the male coupling and
attach the female coupling to the discharge gate
and load the line.
11. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check the line from apparatus to the first coupling
for kinks.
12. The hydrant member, upon returning from hydrant
to apparatus, will assist in the hose lay as
necessary.
FORWARD LAY
TO HYDRANT
FORWARDLAY
TO HYDRANT
HOSE LAY #1
1 ½ " OR 1 ¾" PACKAGE
OPEN FIRE
1 ½" OR 1 ¾" PACKAGE
DOOR FIRE
.02 Hose Lay No. 2
Single Engine Forward: Hydrant to fire-single 3 ½"
supply line, 2 ½" hand line, extension lay.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at hydrant.
2. Upon command from the officer, the hydrant
member lays the line with the 4-way valve.
3. Engineer, upon command from hydrant member
to "take off," proceeds to fire with apparatus.
4. The officer orders type of hose lay and number of
couplings at the objective. If the number of
couplings is not specified by the officer, then the
minimum at the objective will be the nozzle and
one coupling.

6/6-04.03
5. Hydrant member completes hydrant operation at
proper time. Hydrant member will not open
hydrant until "water" is called for by the engineer.
After opening hydrant, hydrant member will return
to the apparatus. Hydrant member is responsible
for removing kinks and tightening couplings from
the hydrant to the apparatus.
6. Engineer pulls running line from panel side and
dresses line. Engineer then pulls hose coupling
within 3' of tailboard and breaks coupling, placing
the 31/2" female into the hose bed. Engineer
shoulders male coupling on inside shoulder and
takes to suction inlet, on panel side and hooks up.
Engineer shall call for "water" as soon as suction
line is hooked up.
7. The nozzle member shall step into the work area
after engineer has dressed the 3 ½" line. The
nozzle member shall break cross connect, placing
female coupling on hip towards the nozzle with the
double male. With the other hand, the nozzle
member shall prepare to pull sufficient slack.
8. Nozzle member provides sufficient slack after
engineer has passed the tailboard with coupling.
Nozzle member pulls slack hose away from the
nozzle with the double male. Member with hand
on the coupling proceeds to the nozzle with the
double male.
9. The nozzle member then attaches and shoulders
the nozzle.
10. Nozzle member can advance 2 ½" line to
objective as soon as it is safe to do so.
11. Nozzle member and hydrant member will advance
proper number of couplings to objective. After the
proper number of couplings are at the objective,
the nozzle member, with back-up on the line, shall
call for water.
12. After proper number of couplings are at the
objective, the hydrant member shall back up the
nozzle member on the hose line.
13. The engineer, after water call, will pull running line
from wide-angle side. Engineer shall then pull
coupling within 3' of the tailboard, break coupling,
and bed the female coupling. Engineer then
shoulders male coupling on inside shoulder and
proceeds to discharge gate on fire side of
apparatus, then attaches coupling. The line is then
loaded by the engineer.
14. The engineer will now dress the hose and check
the line from the apparatus to the first coupling for
kinks.
15. The hydrant member, upon returning to apparatus
from the hydrant, will assist in the hose lay where
necessary.
Page 34
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
TO HYDRANT
TO HYDRANT
HOSE LAY #2
2 ½" HAND LINE
EXTENSION LAY
FORWARD LAY
.03 Hose Lay No. 3
Single Engine Forward: Hydrant to fire single 3 ½"
supply line, 2 ½" hand line by means of pulling folds. 1.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at the hydrant.
2. Upon command of officer, the hydrant member
lays the line using the 4-way valve.
3. The engineer, upon command of the hydrant
member to "take off," proceeds to the fire with the
apparatus.
4. The officer orders the type of hose lay and the
number of folds needed.
5. Hydrant member will complete hydrant operation
at the proper time. Hydrant member will not open
the hydrant until water is called for by the
engineer. After opening the hydrant, the hydrant
member will return to the apparatus. The hydrant
member is responsible for removing kinks and
tightening couplings from the hydrant to the
apparatus.
6. Engineer pulls a running line from the panel side,
dresses the line and pulls hose coupling to within 3'
of tailboard. The engineer then breaks

6/6-04.04
the 3 ½" coupling and places the female coupling
into the hose bed, shoulders the male coupling
and proceeds to the suction inlet on the panel
side. Engineer calls for "water" as soon as
connection is made to suction inlet.
7. The nozzle member steps into the work area after
engineer dresses the 3 ½" supply line. The nozzle
member then breaks cross connect, places female
coupling on fire side shoulder and prepares to pull
first fold of reverse lay.
8. The nozzle member, when engineer passes the
tailboard, pulls first fold of reverse lay, proceeds
to the fire side of apparatus and sets down the
female coupling. The nozzle member then
proceeds to pull folds.
9. The engineer, after calling for water, will assist
with pulling folds.
10. Nozzle member acquires the proper nozzle and
proceeds to rear duals on the fire side of
apparatus. The nozzle member then picks up the
female coupling and attaches the nozzle.
11. The nozzle member can advance 2 ½" into
objective as soon as the third fold is dressed.
12. Nozzle member and hydrant member will advance
the proper number of couplings to objective.
NOTE: The proper number of couplings are at the
objective when 8' to 10' of hose is left behind the
apparatus.
After proper number of couplings are at the
objective, the nozzle member, with back up on the
line, shall call for water.
13. After the proper number of couplings are at the
objective, the hydrant member shall back up the
nozzle member on the hose line.
14. After "water" call is made, the engineer will pull
the coupling to within 3' of the tailboard, break the
coupling and bed the female. The engineer then
shoulders the male coupling on the inside
shoulder and proceeds to the fire side of the
apparatus. Engineer hooks up to discharge gate
and loads the line.
15. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check hose line for kinks from apparatus to first
coupling.
16. Hydrant member, upon returning to apparatus
from hydrant, will assist in the hose lay as
necessary.
Page 35
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
TO HYDRANT
TO HYDRANT
HOSE LAY #3
2 ½" HAND LINE
FOLDS METHOD
FORWARD LAY
.04 Hose Lay No. 4
Single Engine: Fire to hydrant-single 3 ½" supply line, 2
½" hand line.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at the fire.
2. Officer orders type of lay and number of folds
needed.
3. Engineer removes required equipment from
apparatus:
A. 2" hose packs
B. "Pigtail" assembly
C. Pike pole
D. 1 ½" or 1 ¾" hose from transverse hose bed
E. Use of Nos. 1, 2 or 3 below will provide a method for
another water source in front of the fire.
(1) 4-way valve
2 ½" double male
2 ½" gated wye
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer

6/6-04.04
(2) 3 ½” to 2 ½” gated wye
3 ½” double male
2 ½” double female
2 ½” to 1 ½” reducer
(3) 2 ½” gated wye
2 ½” double male
2 ½” double female
2 ½” to 1 ½” reducer
Engineer places equipment on the fire side of
apparatus.
4. Hydrant member removes spanners from 3 ½" hose
bed and places in very rear compartment. Hydrant
member then disconnects 3 ½" coupling and 2 ½"
to 3 ½" increaser from 4-way and places coupling
on the ground adjacent to left side of tailboard area.
5. The nozzle member steps into work area after
spanners are put away and breaks cross connect.
Nozzle member then places coupling on shoulder
towards the fire side and prepares to pull the first
fold of a reverse lay.
6. After hydrant member grounds 3 ½" coupling and is
out of the work area, the nozzle member pulls the
first fold to the fire side and sets the coupling on the
ground.
7. Nozzle member acquires proper nozzle and
proceeds to rear duals on the fire side of the
apparatus.
8. Nozzle member attaches the nozzle to the 2 ½"
female coupling. The nozzle member then sets the
nozzle down.
9. Hydrant member, after grounding the 3 ½" coupling,
will prepare to pull folds from the proper side of the
apparatus.
10. Hydrant member steps into work area to pull a fold,
only after nozzle member goes past the tailboard
with the first fold.
11. After attaching the nozzle, the nozzle member shall
proceed around the front of the apparatus and take
a position on the proper side to pull folds.
12. After the proper number of folds have been pulled,
the convenient member (nozzle member or hydrant
member) will break the 2 ½" coupling and come up
with the female coupling. The member breaking the
2 ½" coupling shall then bed the female coupling
and dress the hose bed.
13. The nozzle member and hydrant member will get
the proper fittings: (NOTE: Use of Nos. 1, 2 or 3
below will provide a method for another water
source in front of the fire.)
Page 36
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
A. 4-way valve
2 ½” double wye
2 ½" gated wye
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
B. 3 ½" to 2 ½" gated wye
3 ½" double male
2 ½" double female
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
C. 2 ½" gated wye
2 ½" double male
2 ½" double female
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
Working as a team, the nozzle member and the
hydrant member will connect the 3 ½" hose to the
2 ½" hose using the proper fittings.
14. The nozzle member, after the connection is made,
will shoulder the nozzle and prepare to take off.
15. Hydrant member will stand on the line and signal
the engineer to "take off." The hydrant member
will ground the loop away from the fire after two
couplings have been grounded (the first coupling
will be the 3 ½" to 2 ½" coupling) or the apparatus
stops. The hydrant member will then assist in
advancing couplings to the objective.
16. Nozzle member, upon hearing the "take off 'call,
will advance the nozzle and couplings to the
objective. The hose line is advanced until the
"loop" is disturbed. The nozzle member regains
control of the nozzle and, with backup, calls for
"water."
17. The hydrant member after proper number of
couplings are at the fire, will back up nozzle
member on the hose line.
18. The engineer will stop the apparatus at the
hydrant. The engineer will then attach the 3 ½"
double female to the discharge gate on the fire
side of the apparatus. The engineer will then pull a
3 ½" running line from the fire side of the
apparatus.
19. The engineer will pull 3 ½" coupling within 3' of
the tailboard. Engineer will then break the
coupling, bed the female, and shoulder the male
coupling on the inside shoulder. The engineer
then connects the hose to the discharge gate on
the fire side of the apparatus.
20. The engineer, upon hearing the "water" call, loads
the line.
21. The engineer will now dress the hose bed and
check the line from the apparatus to the first
coupling for kinks.

6/6-04.05
HOSE LAY #4
2 ½" HAND LINE
REVERSE - FIRE TO HYDRANT
.05 Hose Lay No. 5
Single Engine Reverse: Fire to hydrant-single 3 ½"
supply line-2 ½" reduced to 1 ½" or 1 ¾" hand line.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at the fire.
2. Officer orders type of lay and number of folds
needed.
3. Engineer removes required equipment from
apparatus:
A. 2" hose packs
B. "Pigtail" assembly
C. Pike pole
D. 1 ½" or 1 ¾" hose from transverse hose bed
E. Use of Nos. 1, 2 or 3 below will provide a
method for another water source in front of
the fire.
(1) 4-way valve
2 ½" double male
2 ½" gated wye
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
(2) 3 ½" to 2 ½" gated wye
3 ½" double male
2 ½" double female
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
(3) 2 ½" gated wye
2 ½" double male
2 ½" double female
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
Page 37
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Engineer places equipment 10' from cab area, on
the fire side of apparatus.
4. Hydrant member removes spanners from 3 ½"
hose bed and places in very rear compartment.
Hydrant member then disconnects 3 ½" coupling
and 2 ½" to 3 ½" increaser from 4-way and places
coupling on the ground adjacent to left side of
tailboard area.
5. The nozzle member steps into work area after
spanners are put away and breaks cross connect.
Nozzle member then places coupling on shoulder
towards the fire side and prepares to pull the first
fold of a reverse lay.
6. After hydrant member grounds 3 ½" coupling and
is out of the work area, the nozzle member pulls
the first fold to the fire side and sets the coupling
on the ground.
7. Nozzle member acquires proper nozzle and
proceeds to rear duals on the fire side of the
apparatus.
8. Nozzle member attaches the nozzle to the 2 ½"
female coupling. The nozzle member then sets the
nozzle down.
9. Hydrant member, after grounding the 3 ½"
coupling, will prepare to pull folds from the proper
side of the apparatus.
10. Hydrant member steps into work area to pull a fold,
only after nozzle member goes past the tailboard
with the first fold.
11. After attaching the nozzle, the nozzle member
shall proceed around the front of the apparatus and
to a position on the proper side to pull folds.
12. After the proper number of folds have been pulled,
the convenient member (nozzle member or hydrant
member) will break the 2 ½" coupling and come up
with the female coupling. The member breaking
the 2 ½" coupling shall then bed the female
coupling and dress the hose bed.
13. The nozzle member and hydrant member will get
the proper fittings: (NOTE: Use of Nos. 1, 2 or 3
below will provide a method for another water
source in front of the fire.)
A. 4-way valve
2 ½" double male
2 ½" gated wye
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
B. 3 ½" to 2 ½" gated wye
3 ½" double male
2 ½" double female
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer

6/6-04.05
C. 2 ½" gated wye
2 ½" double male
2 ½”, double female
2 ½" to 1 ½" reducer
Working as a team, the nozzle member and the hydrant
member will connect the 3 ½" hose to the 2 ½" hose
using the proper fittings.
14. The nozzle member, after the connection is made,
will shoulder the nozzle and prepare to take off.
15. Hydrant member will stand on the line and signal
the engineer to "take off." The hydrant member
will ground the loop away from the fire after two
couplings have been grounded (the first coupling
will be the 3 ½" to 2 ½" coupling) or the apparatus
stops.
16. Nozzle member, upon hearing the "take off" call,
will advance the line to the objective. Nozzle
member only will advance all couplings until the
loop is disturbed.
17. Hydrant member, after grounding the loop,
acquires the "pigtail" assembly and 1 ½" or 1 ¾"
hose. Hydrant member will then advance "pigtail"
assembly and 1 ½" or 1 ¾" hose to the 2 ½"
nozzle location.
18. Nozzle member and hydrant member, working as
a team, will make connection of the 2 ½" to 1 ½"
gated wye to the 2 ½" nozzle.
NOTE: Either nozzle member or hydrant member
will take the 2 ½" nozzle and remove the tip.
After the tip has been removed, the 2 ½" to 1 ½"
gated wye will be attached to the 2 ½" shut-off
butt. Nozzle member and hydrant member,
working as a team, will connect the 1 ½" or 1 ¾"
hose coupling to the 2 ½" to 1 ½" gated wye. The
1 ½" or 1 ¾" hose will then be flaked out.
19. Hydrant member will ensure that the gated wye
and the 2 ½" shut-off butt are shut off.
20. Hydrant member, after all connections have been
made, will call for "water" and open the 2 ½"
shut-off butt. Hydrant member will then get on the
2 ½" to 1 ½" gated wye and wait for the "water"
call.
21. Nozzle member, after hydrant member calls for
"water," will call for "water."
22. Hydrant member, after "water" call from the
nozzle member, will open the proper gate on the 2
½” to 1 ½" gated wye.
23. Hydrant member, after loading line(s), will back up
the nozzle member.
Page 38
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
24. The engineer will stop the apparatus at the
hydrant. The engineer will then attach the 3 ½"
double female to the discharge gate on the fire
side of the apparatus. The engineer will then pull a
3 ½" running line from the fire side of the
apparatus.
25. The engineer will pull 3 ½" coupling within 3' of
the tailboard, break the coupling and bed the
female. Engineer then shoulders the male
coupling on the inside shoulder and proceeds to
hook into the discharge gate.
26. The engineer, upon hearing the "water" call, loads
the line.
27. The engineer will now dress the hose bed and
check the line from the apparatus to the first
coupling for kinks.
HOSE LAY #5
2 ½"REDUCE TO 1 ½"
REVERSE LAY
1 ½" OR 1 ¾" HOSE
2 ½" SHUT-OFF
2 ½" TO 1 ½” GATED WYE
4-WAY VALVE
TO HYDRANT

6/6-05.01
-05. HOSE EVOLUTIONS, ABOVE
GROUND
.01 Line Aloft Via Drop Bag
1. The engine company stops at the fire structure.
2. When the apparatus is spotted at the fire, nozzle
member shall procure the 2" hose packs.
3. The officer and the nozzle member proceed
above ground with a drop bag and appropriate
equipment.
4. The engineer provides the required size line (1
½", 1 ¾" or 2 ½") to the base of the building at the
required location, ensuring that there is sufficient
slack to provide at least 100' of hose on the fire
floor. (Figure 1)
FIGURE 1
ADVANCING HOSE LINES
COUPLING PLACEMENT FOR PROPER SHOULDER
OR HAND
FOR ADVANCING TO BASE OF BUILDING
FROM APPARATUS TO: RIGHT REAR
2 ½" - LEFT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LEFT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO. RIGHT FRONT
2 ½" - RIGHT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" RIGHT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: LEFT REAR
2 ½" RIGHT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" - RIGHT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: I= FRONT
2 ½" - LEFT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" - LEFT HAND
Figure 1
5. When in the proper location above ground, the
officer and the nozzle member secure the bitter
end of the drop bag, determine that the area below
is clear, and drop the bag to the ground.
Page 39
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
6. The nozzle member places the hose pack in close
proximity to the line being pulled aloft. This hose
pack may be used to extend the fire fighting line,
if necessary.
7. When the drop bag is dropped, the engineer
secures the nozzle to the line and signals the
officer and the nozzle member to begin hoisting
the line aloft. (Figure 2)
Figure 2

6/6-05.02
8. The officer and/or nozzle member hoist the line
aloft until sufficient slack hose has been pulled up
(minimum of one section on fire floor). (Figure 3)
Figure 3
9. The officer and nozzle member flake out the line
on the fire floor to provide a smooth water way
and call for "water." Lines shall be secured.
(Figure 4)
Page 40
Figure 4
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
10. The engineer loads the line.
NOTE: If the hydrant member has been assisting
the engineer, the hydrant member shall -proceed
to the fire floor and assist in advancing the line if it
is safe to rejoin the company.
.02 Hose Packs from Dry or Combination
Standpipes
1. The engine company stops at the fire structure.
2. When the apparatus is spotted at the fire, the
officer, nozzle member and hydrant member, if
available, procure all of the required equipment
and proceed above ground. Required equipment
includes the 2 ½" high-rise pigtail with fittings, 200'
of 2" lightweight hose packs, with spray nozzles.
3. The engineer loads the standpipe system by
means of a minimum of two 2 ½" lines into the
standpipe inlets.
NOTE: It may be necessary to protect hose laid to
standpipe inlets using ladders and/or salvage
covers open to the quarter fold.
4. On the fire floor, the 2 ½" high-rise pigtail/wye is
connected to the standpipe outlet. The fire fighting
line 2" is connected to an outlet on the gated wye
attached to the 2 ½" high-rise pigtail/ standpipe
outlet. The fire fighting line should be flaked out
as much as possible before loading the line.
5. Depending on the location and intensity of the fire,
it may be necessary to connect to the standpipe
outlet on the floor below the fire and then advance
the line up the stairwell or fire escape.

6/6-05.03
.03 Line Aloft Via Ladder
1. The engine company stops at the fire structure.
2. When the apparatus is spotted at the fire, the
officer, nozzle member and hydrant member, if
available, complete the required hose lay.
Members shall advance the proper amount of
hose to the base of the ladder. Nozzle to beam
nearest apparatus with couplings laying straight
out from center of ladder rungs (like door fire).
(Figure 5 & 5A)
FIGURE 5
ADVANCING HOSE LINES
COUPLING PLACEMENT FOR PROPER SHOULDER
OR HAND
FOR ADVANCING TO BASE OF LADDER
FROM APPARATUS TO: RIGHT REAR
2 ½" LEFT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LEFT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: RIGHT FRONT
2 ½" RIGHT SHOULDER1 ½" OR 1 ¾ " RIGHT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: LEFT REAR
2 ½" RIGHT SHOULDER 1 ½” OR 1 ¾" RIGHT HAND
FROM APPARATUS TO: LEFT FRONT
2 ½" LEFT SHOULDER 1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LEFT HAND
Page 41
Figure 5
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
Figure 5A
3. The nozzle member, after all slack hose has been
advanced to the base of the ladder, shall shoulder
the nozzle on the right shoulder and proceed up
the ladder.
4. Other members shall space themselves
appropriately and assist the nozzle member in
taking the hose line aloft. The hose line or
coupling is to be on the right shoulder. (Figure 6 &
6A)
Figure 6

6/6-05.04
Figure 6A
NOTE: Correct spacing on a line when climbing a
ladder is:
a. Dry Line-one member each 25'.
b. Loaded Line-one member each 10'.
5. Nozzle member shall dismount the end of the
ladder, ground the nozzle and assist in raising
hose.
6. When sufficient hose has been carried aloft, the
line shall be secured, flaked out, and the engineer
signaled to load the line ("water").
7. The engineer loads the line.
.04 Hose Lay No. 6
Single Engine Forward. Hydrant to fire-above ground
hose lay using the drop bag method with 1 ½" or 1 ¾"
hand line.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at the hydrant.
2. Hydrant member lays the line using the 4-way
valve upon command of the officers.
3. Engineer, upon signal from hydrant member to
"take off," proceeds to the fire with the apparatus.
4. Officer orders type of hose lay and specifies what
floor and location for drop bag.
5. Hydrant member will complete the hydrant
operation at the proper time. Hydrant member will
not open the hydrant until water is called for by
the engineer. After opening hydrant, hydrant
member will return to the apparatus. Hydrant
member is responsible for removing kinks and
tightening couplings from the hydrant to the
apparatus.
Page 42
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
6. For supply, the engineer pulls a running line from
the panel side of the apparatus. The engineer
breaks the coupling, beds the female, and
shoulders the male coupling on the inside
shoulder. The engineer then takes it to the suction
inlet on the panel side of the apparatus and hooks
up. Engineer now calls for "water."
7. Officer and nozzle member will take the following
equipment above ground.
a. 2" hose packs
b. "Pigtail" assembly
C. Drop bag
8. Nozzle member and officer, with equipment, will
proceed via the stairwell to the proper above
ground location. Upon reaching the proper
location, the equipment is set on the floor beneath
point where drop bag is lowered from building.
Officer and nozzle member will drop the bag from
their location and prepare to hoist the line upon a
signal from the engineer.
9. After calling for water, the engineer proceeds to
transverse hose bed, removes fire fighting line
-and advances it to the base of the building.
Engineer will advance the proper number of
couplings to the base of the building. Couplings
are placed straight out from the building as in door
fires'.
10. Engineer will tie the drop bag knot and also hook
the bag back on the line. The engineer then
signals the aboveground members to hoist the
line.
11. Engineer will return to the apparatus and wait for
the "water" call.
12. Hydrant member, upon returning to apparatus
from hydrant, shall assist the engineer in
advancing couplings to the base of the building.
Once the proper number of couplings have been
advanced to the objective the hydrant member is
to acquire the pike pole. Hydrant member will then
advance via the interior stairwell to the fire floor
and assist the aboveground members.
13. Aboveground members will hoist the line upon
signal from the engineer. They shall flake the line
out as it is pulled into their location.
14. Nozzle member will signal for "water" when proper
amount of hose has been pulled up to the fire
floor.
NOTE: Minimum amount of hose will be the nozzle and
at least 100' of hose, unless more hose is ordered.
15. The hydrant member will back up the nozzle
member on the line after proper number of
couplings have reached the objective.
16. The engineer, after "water" call, will pull 1 ½" or 1
¾" hose coupling into work area, or pull a

6/6-05.05
running line to get the coupling into the work area.
The engineer will then break the 1 ½" or 1 ¼"
coupling, bed the male, and connect the female to
the discharge gate. The line will then be loaded by
the engineer.
17. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check the hose line from the apparatus to the first
coupling for kinks.
TO HYDRANT
HOSE LAY #6
1 ½" OR 1 ¾" DROP BAG
.05 Hose Lay No. 7
Aboveground Operation Using 2 ½" Drop Bag:
Hydrant to fire.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at hydrant.
2. Upon command from the officer, the hydrant
member lays a line using the 4-way valve.
3. Engineer, upon signal from hydrant member to
"take off," proceeds to the fire with the apparatus.
4. Officer orders the type of hose lay. The officer will
specify floor and location for drop bag.
5. Hydrant member will complete the hydrant
operation at the proper time. Hydrant member will
not open the hydrant until "water" is called
Page 43
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
for by the engineer. After opening the hydrant, the
hydrant member will return to the apparatus.
Hydrant member is responsible for removing kinks
and tightening couplings from the hydrant to the
apparatus.
6. For supply, the engineer will pull a running line
from the panel side of the apparatus. The
engineer will break the coupling, bed the female
coupling and shoulder the male coupling on the
inside shoulder. Engineer will then take male
coupling to the suction inlet on the panel side of
the apparatus and hooks up. The engineer now
calls for "water."
7. Nozzle member and officer will take the following
equipment above ground.
A. 2" hose packs
B. "Pigtail" assembly
C. Drop bag
8. Nozzle member and officer, with equipment, will
proceed via the interior stairwell to the proper
aboveground location. Upon reaching the proper
location, the equipment is set on the floor beneath
the point where drop bag is to be lowered from
building. Officer and nozzle member will drop the
bag from their location and prepare to hoist the
line upon the signal from the engineer. NOTE:
The engineer will decide whether to pull folds or
do an extension lay. Determination will be made
according to the following conditions:
A. Any hose line which needs to be pulled at
more than a 45' angle from the rear of the
apparatus will be pulled using the folds
method.
B. Anything less than 45' will be pulled using the
extension lay method.
Folds Method-Above Ground.
1. Engineer breaks cross-connect and places
coupling on shoulder away from the fire building.
Engineer then pulls the first fold of a reverse lay
to the side of the apparatus away from the fire
building.
2. Engineer will remove fitting from the discharge
gate and place it in compartment. The engineer
will then connect the female coupling to the
discharge gate.
3. Engineer will then pull sufficient folds to reach the
objective.
4. Once sufficient folds have been pulled,
convenient member (engineer or hydrant
member) will break and bed coupling. Convenient
member will then attach proper nozzle.
5. Convenient member will shoulder nozzle and
advance hose line to building. Other member is to
shoulder first coupling behind nozzle.

6/6-05.05
Couplings are to be placed straight out from
building as in door fire.
6. All hose will be advanced, except 8'to 10', which
will be left behind the apparatus. (This is to
prevent hose from becoming crimped under duals
of apparatus.)
7. Engineer will tie the proper drop bag knot and
hook the bag back on the rope. Engineer will then
signal the aboveground members to hoist the line.
HOSE LAY #7
2 ½" DROP BAG
FOLDS METHOD HYDRANT
TO HYDRANT
8. The engineer will return to the apparatus and wait
for the "water call."
9. Aboveground members will hoist the line upon
signal from the engineer. Aboveground members
will flake out the line as it comes into their
position.
10. Upon returning to the apparatus, the hydrant
member will assist the engineer in pulling the
proper number of folds.
NOTE: The hydrant member could be the
convenient member and advance the nozzle or
couplings to the objective. Once the proper
number of couplings have been advanced to the
objective, the hydrant member will acquire the
pike pole. The hydrant member will then proceed
via the interior stairwell to the fire floor. Hydrant
member will then assist the aboveground
members.
Page 44
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
11. Nozzle member, with backup, will signal for
"water" when the proper amount of hose has been
pulled up to the fire.
NOTE: The minimum amount of hose is the
nozzle and at least 100' of hose, unless more
couplings were ordered.
12. Hydrant member, after proper amount of hose is
at the objective, will back up the nozzle member
on the hose line.
13. Engineer, after "water" call from nozzle member,
will open proper discharge gate and load the line.
14. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check lines from apparatus to first coupling(s) for
kinks.
Extension Method-Aboveground
1. Engineer will break cross-connect and place the
coupling on hip towards the nozzle with the double
male. Engineer will then pull sufficient slack away
from the nozzle. At this time the engineer will
attach the nozzle.
2. Engineer will shoulder the nozzle and advance
into the base of the building. Engineer will
advance couplings to building, placing couplings
coming straight out from the building as in door
fire. NOTE: Advance enough couplings to allow
for enough hose on the fire floor.
3. Engineer will tie the drop bag knot and hook the
bag back on the rope. The engineer will then
signal the aboveground members to hoist the line.
4. Engineer will return to the apparatus and await the
"water" call.
5. Aboveground members will hoist line upon signal
from the engineer. Aboveground members will
flake the line out as it enters their location.
6. Hydrant member, upon returning to the apparatus
from the hydrant, will assist the engineer in
advancing the proper number of couplings to the
base of the building. After advancing the proper
number of couplings to the objective, the hydrant
member will acquire the pike pole. Hydrant
member will then proceed via the interior stairwell
to the fire floor where hydrant member will assist
the aboveground members.
7. Nozzle member, with backup, will signal for
"water" when the proper amount of hose has been
pulled up to the fire floor.
NOTE: The minimum amount of hose is the
nozzle and at least 100' of hose, unless more
hose was ordered.

6/6-05.05
8. After proper number of couplings are at the
objective the hydrant member will backup the
nozzle member on the hose line.
HOSE LAY #7
2 ½" DROP BAG
EXTENSION METHOD
9. The engineer, upon water call from nozzle
member, can either
A. Pull a running line from the wide-angle side,
then break and bed the female coupling.
Engineer will then shoulder the male coupling
on the inside shoulder and proceed to the
discharge gate on the fire side of the
apparatus and make hookup.
OR
B. Engineer can pull coupling back into the work
area if sufficient hose is left at base of
building. The engineer would then proceed
with breaking the coupling and connecting to
the discharge gate.
The engineer will open the proper discharge gate
and load the line.
10. Engineer will then dress the hose beds and check
the hose line from apparatus to first coupling(s) for
kinks.
Page 45
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
.06 Hose Lay No. 8
Using Standpipes: Hydrant to fire.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at the hydrant.
2. Upon command of the officer, the hydrant
member lays the line using the 4-way valve.
3. The engineer, upon signal from the hydrant
member to "take off," proceeds to the fire with the
apparatus.
4. Officer orders the type of hose lay. The officer will
specify what floor to hook up to the standpipe
outlet.
5. Hydrant member will complete the hydrant
operation at the proper time. The hydrant member
will not open the hydrant until 'water" is called for
by the engineer. After opening the hydrant, the
hydrant member will return to the apparatus.
Hydrant member is responsible for removing kinks
and tightening couplings from the hydrant to the
apparatus.
6. For supply, the engineer will pull a running line
from the panel side of the apparatus. Engineer
then breaks the coupling, beds the female and
shoulders the male coupling on the inside.
shoulder. The engineer then proceeds to the
suction inlet on the panel side of the apparatus,
hooks up and calls for "water."
7. Nozzle member and officer will take the following
equipment aboveground:
A. 2" hose packs
B. "Pigtail" assembly
C. Drop bag
8. Nozzle member and officer, with equipment, will
proceed via the interior stairwell to the proper
standpipe outlet.
9. Aboveground members, working as a team, will
connect the "pigtail" assembly to the standpipe
outlet.
10. Aboveground members, working as a team, will
take the hose packs to the landing above the fire
floor and remove the straps. The nozzle and all
couplings will be brought back to the fire floor.
The hose coupling will then be connected to the
"pigtail" assembly.
11. Nozzle member will regain nozzle and make call
for "water."
12. Officer will open standpipe outlet and 2 ½" to 1 ½"
gated wye after the "water" call from the nozzle
member.
13. After loading the line, the officer will backup the
nozzle member on the hose line.
NOTE: The engineer will decide whether to pull
folds or do an extension lay. The determination

6/6-05.06
will be made according to the position of the
apparatus as follows:
A. Any hose line that needs to be pulled at more
than a 450 angle from the rear of the
apparatus will be pulled using the folds
method.
B. Any hose line that needs to be pulled at less
than a 450 angle will be pulled using the
extension method.
Folds Method Using Standpipes:
1. Engineer breaks cross-connect and places
coupling on shoulder away from the fire building.
Engineer then proceeds to pull the first fold of a
reverse lay to the side of the apparatus away from
the fire building.
2. Engineer will remove fitting from the discharge
gate and place it in compartment. Engineer will
then connect female coupling to the discharge
gate.
3. The engineer will then pull sufficient folds to reach
the objective.
4. Once sufficient folds have been pulled,
convenient member (either engineer or hydrant
member) will break and bed the coupling.
Convenient member will then attach the proper
nozzle.
5. Convenient member will shoulder the nozzle and
advance the line to standpipe inlet. Other member
is to shoulder first coupling behind the nozzle.
6. When the nozzle reaches the standpipe inlet, no
extra couplings are needed at the standpipe inlet.
7. Convenient member will remove the tip from the 2
½" shut-off butt. The convenient member will then
connect to the standpipe inlet and open the
shut-off butt.
8. The engineer will return to the apparatus, with the
tip, and immediately load the 2 ½" line.
9. The hydrant member, upon returning to the
apparatus from the hydrant, will assist the
engineer in pulling the proper number of folds.
The hydrant member could be the convenient
member and advance the nozzle to the standpipe
inlets.
Once the nozzle only reaches the standpipe inlet,
the hydrant member will acquire the pike pole and
proceed via the interior stairwell to the proper
floor. Hydrant member will then assist the
aboveground members.
10. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check the line(s) from the apparatus to the first
couplings for kinks.
Page 46
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
TO HYDRANT
HOSE LAY #8
STANDPIPE
FOLDS METHOD
Extension Method Using Standpipes
1. Engineer breaks cross-connect and places
coupling on hip towards the nozzle with the double
male. Engineer will then pull sufficient slack away
from the nozzle.
2. Engineer will shoulder the nozzle and advance
into the standpipe inlet. No extra couplings are
needed at the standpipe inlet.
3. The engineer will remove the tip from the 2 ½"
shut-off butt, connect to the standpipe inlet and
open the shut-off butt.
4. The hydrant member, upon returning to the
apparatus from the hydrant, shall advance
couplings to the objective until the engineer
reaches the standpipe inlet. At that time, the
hydrant member will ground the coupling and
return to the apparatus.
5. Hydrant member will pull a 2 ½" running line -from
the wide-angle side.
6. Hydrant member will pull a 2 ½" coupling to within
3' of tailboard, break the coupling and bed the
female. Hydrant member will then

6/6-05.05
shoulder the male coupling on the inside shoulder
and proceed to the fire side of the apparatus.
Hydrant member then hooks up to the discharge
gate.
7. After hooking up to the discharge gate, the
hydrant member shall acquire the pike pole.
Hydrant member will then proceed via the interior
stairwell to the proper floor. Hydrant member will
now assist the aboveground members.
8. Engineer will return to apparatus, with the tip, and
open the proper discharge gate.
9. The engineer will relieve the hydrant member as
soon as possible at anytime during the operation.
10. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check the line(s) from the apparatus to the first
couplings for kinks.
Page 47
HOSE LAY #8
STANDPIPE
EXTENSION METHOD
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
.07 Hose Lay No. 9
Aboveground Operation Using 2 ½" Hose Line Up
Ladders: Hydrant to fire.
1. Engineer stops apparatus at the hydrant.
2. Upon command of the officer, the hydrant
member lays the line using the 4-way valve.
3. The engineer, upon signal from the hydrant
member to "take off," proceeds to the fire with the
apparatus.
4. Officer orders the type of hose lay. The officer will
specify what size hose line, which ladder and
which floor.
5. Hydrant member will complete the hydrant
operation at the proper time. The hydrant member
will not open the hydrant until "water" is called for
by the engineer. After opening the hydrant, the
hydrant member will return to the apparatus.
Hydrant member is responsible for removing kinks
and tightening couplings from the hydrant to the
apparatus.
6. For supply, the engineer will pull a running line
from the panel side of the apparatus. Engineer
then breaks the coupling, beds the female.
coupling and shoulders the male coupling on the
inside shoulder. Engineer will then take the male
coupling to the suction inlet on the panel side of
the apparatus, hooks up and calls for "Water."
NOTE: The officer will decide whether to pull folds
or do an extension lay. Determination will be
made according to the following conditions:
A. Any hose line that needs to be pulled at more
than a 450 angle from the rear of the
apparatus will be pulled using the folds
method.
B. Any hose line that needs to be pulled at less
than a 45' angle will be pulled using the
extension method.
Folds Method-Aboveground
1. Nozzle member steps into the work area after
engineer dresses the 3 ½" supply line., Nozzle
member then breaks cross-connect and places
coupling on shoulder away from the fire building.
The nozzle member then prepares to pull the first
fold of a reverse lay.
2. Nozzle member, when engineer passes the
tailboard, pulls the first fold of a reverse lay to the
side of the apparatus away from the fire building.
3. Nozzle member will remove fitting from discharge
gate and place it in compartment. The nozzle
member will then connect the female coupling to
the discharge gate.

6/6-05.07
NOTE: The engineer, after the "water" call, will
relieve the nozzle member and connect the
coupling to the discharge gate.
4. After connecting the 2 ½" coupling to the
discharge gate, the engineer will prepare to pull
folds from the proper side of the apparatus.
5. The nozzle member, after making the connection,
or after being relieved by the engineer, shall
proceed around the front of the apparatus and
take a position on the proper side of the apparatus
to pull folds.
6. The engineer and nozzle member will then pull
sufficient folds to reach the objective.
7. Once sufficient folds have been pulled,
convenient member (hydrant member or nozzle
member) will break and bed coupling. Convenient
member will then attach proper nozzle.
8. Convenient member will shoulder nozzle and
advance hose line to ladder beam that is closest
to apparatus. Other member is to shoulder first
coupling behind nozzle. Couplings are to be
placed straight out from the center of the ladder
rungs as in door fire.
NOTE: The engineer will not advance couplings to
the objective.
9. All hose will be advanced; except 8'to 10', which
will be left behind the apparatus. (This is to
prevent hose from becoming crimped under duals
of apparatus.)
10. Upon returning to the apparatus, the hydrant
member will assist the engineer and nozzle
member in pulling the proper number of folds.
NOTE: The hydrant member could be the
convenient member and advance the nozzle or
couplings to the objective.
11. Nozzle member will regain nozzle. Nozzle
member will then shoulder the nozzle on the right
shoulder and prepare to ascend ladder.
12. Hydrant member, approximately 25' behind nozzle
member, will shoulder hose on right shoulder and
prepare to ascend ladder following the nozzle
member.
13. The nozzle member will ascend ladder after the
hydrant member has shouldered the hose
properly.
14. Hydrant member will ascend the ladder when the
loop that is created between the nozzle member
and the hydrant member reaches the hydrant
member's knee.
15. Aboveground members will hoist the hose line.
Aboveground members will flake out the line as it
comes into their position.
Page 48
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
16. Nozzle member, with backup, will signal for
"water" when the proper amount of hose has been
pulled up to the fire.
NOTE: The minimum amount of hose is the
nozzle and at least 100' of hose, unless more
hose was ordered.
17. Hydrant member, after proper number of
couplings are at the objective, will backup the
nozzle member on the hose line.
18. Engineer, after "water" call from nozzle member,
will open proper discharge gate and load the line.
19. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check lines from apparatus to first coupling(s) for
kinks.
HOSE LAY #9
2 ½" LINE UP LADDER
FOLDS METHOD
Extension Method-Aboveground.
1. Nozzle member steps into the work area after
engineer dresses the 3 ½” supply line. Nozzle
member then breaks cross-connect and places
coupling on hip towards the nozzle with double
male. With the other hand, the nozzle member
shall prepare to pull sufficient slack.

6/6-05.07
2. Nozzle member provides sufficient slack after
engineer passes the tailboard with the coupling.
Nozzle member then pulls slack hose away from
the nozzle with the double male. The nozzle
member, with hand on coupling, proceeds to the
nozzle with the double male attached.
3. The nozzle member acquires proper nozzle and
proceeds to attach and shoulder the nozzle.
4. As soon as it is safe to do so, the nozzle member
advances 2 ½" line to ladder beam that is closest
to the apparatus.
5. Nozzle member and hydrant member will advance
proper number of couplings to ladder. Couplings
are to be placed straight out from center of ladder
rungs as in door fire.
6. Upon returning to the apparatus, the hydrant
member will assist the nozzle member in
advancing the proper number of couplings to the
base of the ladder.
7. Nozzle member will regain nozzle. Nozzle
member will then shoulder the nozzle on the right
shoulder and prepare to ascend ladder.
8. Hydrant member, approximately 25' behind nozzle
member, will shoulder hose on right shoulder and
prepare to ascend ladder following the nozzle
member.
9. After shouldering the hose properly, the nozzle
member will ascend ladder.
10. Hydrant member will ascend the ladder when the
loop that is created between the nozzle member
and the hydrant member reaches the hydrant
member's knee.
11. Aboveground members will hoist the hose line.
Aboveground members will flake out the line as it
comes into their position.
12. Nozzle member, with backup, will signal for
"water" when the proper amount of hose has been
pulled up to the fire.
NOTE: The minimum amount of hose is the
nozzle and at least 100' of hose, unless more
couplings were ordered.
13. The hydrant member, after proper number of
couplings are at the objective, will backup the
nozzle member on the hose line.
14. Engineer, upon "water" call from nozzle member,
can either:
A. Pull a running line from the wide-angle slide,
then break and bed the female coupling.
Engineer will then shoulder the male coupling
on the inside shoulder and proceed to the
discharge gate on the fire side of the
apparatus. The engineer will then book up to
the discharge gate. OR:
Page 49
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
B. The engineer can pull coupling back into work
area if sufficient hose is left at base of ladder.
The engineer would then proceed with
breaking the coupling and connecting to the
discharge gate. The engineer would then open
the proper discharge gate and load the hose
line.
15. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check lines from apparatus to first coupling(s) for
kinks.
HOSE LAY #9
2 ½" LINE UP LADDER
EXTENSION METHOD
.08 Hose Lay No. 10
Aboveground Operation Using 1 ½" or 1 ¾" Hose Line
Up Ladders:
Hydrant to fire
1. Engineer stops apparatus at the hydrant.
2. Hydrant member lays the line using the 4-way
valve upon command of the officer.
3. Engineer, upon signal from hydrant member to
"take off," proceeds to the fire with the apparatus.
4. Officer orders type of hose lay. Officer will specify
what size hose line, which ladder and which floor.

6/6-05.08
5. Hydrant member will complete the hydrant
operation at the proper time. Hydrant member will
not open the hydrant until "water" is called for by
the engineer. After opening hydrant, hydrant
member will return to the apparatus. Hydrant
member is responsible for removing kinks and
tightening couplings from the hydrant to the
apparatus.
6. For- supply, the engineer pulls a running line from
the panel side of the apparatus. The engineer
breaks the coupling, beds the female coupling and
shoulders the male coupling on the inside
shoulder. The engineer then takes it to the suction
inlet on the panel side of the apparatus and hooks
up. Engineer now calls for "water".
7. Nozzle member proceeds to transverse hose bed
and removes fire fighting line.
NOTE: If ladder is to the left rear of the apparatus,
the nozzle member will not advance 1 ½" or 1 ¾"
line until the engineer steps to the front, out of the
work area, and calls for "water."
8. Nozzle member will advance1 ½" or 1 ¾" hose
line to the ladder beam that is closest to the
apparatus.
9. Nozzle member and hydrant member will advance
the proper number of couplings to the ladder.
Couplings are to be placed straight out from the
center of the ladder rungs, same as in door fire.
10. Hydrant member, upon returning to apparatus
from hydrant, shall assist the nozzle member in
advancing the proper number of couplings to the
base of the ladder.
11. Nozzle member will regain nozzle, shoulder the
nozzle on right shoulder and prepare to ascend
ladder.
12. The hydrant member will shoulder hose line 25'
behind nozzle member and prepare to advance
the line up the ladder.
13. Nozzle member will ascend ladder after hydrant
member has shouldered hose properly.
14. Hydrant member will ascend ladder when the loop
that is created between the nozzle member and
hydrant member reaches the hydrant member's
knee.
15. Aboveground members will hoist the hose line.
Aboveground members will flake the line out as it
is pulled into their location.
16. Nozzle member will signal for "water" when proper
amount of hose has been pulled up to the fire
floor.
NOTE: Minimum amount of hose will be the
nozzle and at least 100' of hose, unless more
couplings are ordered.
Page 50
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
17. The hydrant member will backup the nozzle
member on the line after proper number of
couplings have reached the objective.
18. The engineer, after "water" call from the nozzle
member, can either:
A. Pull a running line from the wide-angle side,
break and bed the male coupling, and connect
the female coupling to a 1 ½" discharge gate.
OR
B. Pull a coupling back into the work area (if
sufficient hose is left at the base of the
ladder), break the 1 ½" coupling, bed the
male, and connect the female to the discharge
gate. The line will then be loaded by the
engineer.
19. The engineer will now dress the hose beds and
check the hose line from the apparatus to the first
couplings for kinks.
HOSE LAY #10
1 ½" OR 1 ¾" LINE UP LADDER

6/6-06.01
-06. TWO PIECE ENGINE COMPANY
.01 Normal Two Piece
Hydrant to fire: Use all hose lays except hose lay
No. 4 and No. 5.
1. Engine stops 25' in front of hydrant.
2. Engineer on 200 Series engine spots apparatus at
the hydrant.
3. Hydrant member prepares to lay the line upon
command of the officer.
4. Hydrant member goes to tailboard area of the
engine and removes spanners, placing them in
the rear compartment. The hydrant member then
disconnects the 3 ½" hose from the 4-way valve,
being sure to leave the 2 ½" to 3 ½" increaser on
the 4-way valve.
5. Hydrant member places the 3 ½" coupling on the
hip towards the hydrant and then grasps the hose
sling with the other hand. Hydrant member then
pivots 180' towards the hydrant. This will place the
3 ½" coupling and hose sling on the same side.
6. Hydrant member, with two hands on the coupling
and the hose sling, will go around the hydrant and
place the sling over the hydrant barrel. The
hydrant member will then lay the 3 ½" coupling on
the ground.
7. Hydrant member returns to the engine, gets in
jumpseat and tells the engineer to "take off."
8. 200 Series engineer, after the engine stops or two
couplings come out, removes 3 ½" hose from
hydrant. Engineer then takes the 3 ½" coupling to
a discharge gate on the panel side of the
apparatus. Engineer will connect the 3 ½"
coupling to the discharge gate and wait for the
"water" call from the engine engineer.
9. Engine stops at the fire and the officer orders the
type of hose lay.
10. For supply, the hydrant member pulls a running
line from the panel side of the apparatus and
dresses the line.
11. Nozzle member starts the hose lay.
12. Engineer acquires the proper fittings for the
suction inlet, then relieves hydrant member on the
supply line.
13. Hydrant member, or engine engineer, will break
the coupling, bed the female, and shoulder the
male coupling on the inside shoulder. Member
(hydrant member or engineer) will then take male
coupling to the suction inlet on the panel side of
the apparatus and make the hookup. Member will
then call for "water."
Page 51
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
NOTE: The engine engineer is responsible for
hooking up to the suction inlet and calling for
"water"
14. 200 Series engineer, upon "water" call from
engine engineer, will open the proper discharge
gate.
15. 200 Series engineer will check from apparatus to
first coupling for kinks.
16. After hydrant member is relieved by the engine
engineer, hydrant member, will assist in hose lay
(example: pulling folds, advancing couplings).
TWO PEICE ENGINE CO.
FORWARD LAY
.02 Reverse With Engine
Fire to hydrant. Use all hose lays except hose lay No. 4
and No. 5.
1. Officer will order the type of hose lay.
2. Engine will stop in front of 200 Series engine at
the fire.
3. Hydrant member will go to the tailboard of the
engine and place the spanners in the rear
compartment. Hydrant member then removes

6/6-06.03
3 ½" coupling from the 4-way valve ensuring that
the increaser is left on the 4-way valve.
4. Hydrant member places the 3 ½" coupling on the
hip towards the 200 Series panel and grabs the
hose sling with the other hand. Hydrant member
then pivots 180' toward the 200 Series panel. This
will place the 3 ½" coupling and sling on the same
side.
5 Hydrant member, with two hands on the coupling
and the hose sling, will go to the rear duals on the
panel side of the 200 Series engine. The hydrant
member will ground the entire package at the rear
duals.
6. Hydrant member will stand on the hose line and
signal the engine engineer to "take off."
7. The engine engineer will ensure that the breathing
apparatus is left at the fire. The engine engineer
will then return to the cab of the engine and await
the "take off' signal from the hydrant member.
8. The engine will then proceed to the hydrant.
9. The 200 Series engineer will attach the 4" to 3 ½"
reducer to the suction inlet.
10. Hydrant member will ground the loop after two
couplings or the engine comes to a stop. Hydrant
member will ground the loop away from the 200
Series engine.
11. The 200 Series engineer will get the 3 ½" female
coupling after the hydrant member has grounded
the loop.
12. 200 Series engineer will take the 3 ½" female
coupling to the suction inlet on the panel side and
attach it. The 200 Series engineer will then call for
"water."
13. Hydrant member will assist in the hose lay after
being relieved by the 200 Series engineer.
14. Nozzle member will proceed to the 200 Series
engine and begin the hose lay.
15. The engine engineer, after stopping at the
hydrant, will get the 3 ½" double female and
attach it to the discharge gate on the panel side of
the apparatus.
16. Engine engineer will pull a running line, break the
coupling and bed the female coupling. The engine
engineer will then shoulder the male coupling on
the inside shoulder and take the coupling to the
panel side of the apparatus. The engine engineer
will then attach the 3 ½" male coupling to the
discharge gate.
17. Engine engineer will load the line after the "water"
call from the 200 Series engineer.
Page 52
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
18. Engine engineer will now dress the hose bed a
check the line from the apparatus to the fist
coupling for kinks.
TWO PEICE ENGINE CO.
REVERSE - WITH ENGINE
.03 Reverse with 200 Series
Fire to hydrant. The 200 series engine and all hose lays
except hose lay No. 4 and No. 5
1. Officer will order the type of hose lay.
2. Engine will stop at the fire. The 200 Series engine
will come alongside the engine from either the
right or the left.
3. The 200 Series engine will stop when the tailboard
is in line with the front bumper of the engine.
4. Hydrant member goes to the tailboard of the 200
Series engine and places spanners in the rear
compartment. Hydrant member then removes the
3 ½" coupling from the 4-way valve ensuring that
the increaser is left on the 4-way valve.
5. Nozzle member will start hose lay on the engine.
6. Hydrant member places 3 ½" coupling on hip
towards the engine and grasps the hose sling

6/6-06.03
with the other hand. Hydrant member pivots 180*
towards the engine. This will place the 3 ½"
coupling and sling on the same side.
7. Hydrant member, with two hands on the coupling
and the hose sling, will go to the rear duals of the
engine. Hydrant member will ground the entire
package at the rear duals of the engine.
8. Engine engineer will attach 4" to 3 ½" reducer to
suction inlet.
9. Hydrant member will stand on the line and signal
the 200 Series engine to "take off.”
10. 200 Series engine will proceed to the hydrant after
"take off” call from the hydrant member.
11. Hydrant member will ground the loop after two
couplings or the 200 Series engine stops. Hydrant
member will ground the loop away from the
engine.
12. Engine engineer will acquire the female coupling
after hydrant member grounds the loop.
13. Engine engineer will take the 3 ½" female
coupling to the suction inlet on the panel side of
the apparatus and connect it. Engine engineer
then calls for "water."
Page 53
TWO PEICE ENGINE CO
REVERSE - WITH 200 SERIES ENGINE
SPOT TO RIGHT SIDE
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
14. Hydrant member will assist in hose lay after being
relieved by the engine engineer.
15. 200 Series s engineer, after stopping, will get the
3 ½" double female and attach it to the discharge
gate on the panel side of the apparatus.
16. The 200 Series engineer will pull a running line,
break the coupling and bed the female. Engineer
will then shoulder the male coupling on the inside
shoulder and take it to the panel side of the
apparatus, where it shall be connected to the
discharge gate.
17. 200 Series engineer will load the line after the
"water" call from the engine engineer.
18. 200 Series engineer will now dress the hose bed
and check the line from the apparatus to the first
coupling for kinks.
NOTE: If 1 ½" or 1 ¾" package is called for, on
either side, the nozzle member shall not take off
until the engineer gets the 3 ½" coupling and is
out of the way.
TWO PEICE ENGINE CO.
REVERSE WITH 200 SERIES ENGINE
SPOT TO LEFT SIDE

6/6-06.04
04 Alley Lay
Engine to fire: 200 Series to hydrant
1. Officer gets the 3 ½" double male and proceeds to
a position approximately 20' to the rear of both
apparatus.
2. Hydrant member goes to the tailboard of the 200
Series engine and places spanners and hose sling
in rear compartment. The hydrant member then
disconnects the 3 ½" hose from the 4-way valve,
ensuring that the increaser is left on the 4-way
valve.
3. Hydrant member shoulders 3 ½" coupling on
shoulder towards the engine. The hydrant member
then pulls the 3 ½" hose to the officer's location.
4. Hydrant member and officer connect the 3 ½"
hose and the 3 ½" double male.
5. Hydrant member will stand on the hose line facing
towards the engine.
6. Nozzle member goes to the tailboard of the
engine and places the spanners and hose sling in
the rear compartment. The nozzle member then
disconnects the 3 ½" hose from the 4-way valve,
ensuring that the increaser is left on the 4-way
valve.
7. Nozzle member now shoulders the 3 ½" coupling
on shoulder towards the 200 Series engine.
Nozzle member then pulls 3 ½" hose to officer's
location.
8. Nozzle member and officer now connect the 3 ½”
line from the engine to the 3 ½" double male
previously connected to the line from the 200
Series engine.
9. Nozzle member and officer, after making their
final connection, will check for kinks in the line
and then return to their seats on the engine.
10. After the area between the engine and the 200
Series engine is clear, the hydrant member will
tell the 200 Series engine to "take off."
11. After the "take off' call, the 200 Series engine will
proceed to the hydrant.
12. Hydrant member will ground the loop after two
couplings have come out or the 200 Series engine
stops.
13. After returning to the jumpseat on the engine, the
hydrant member will tell the engine engineer to
"take off."
14. After the "take off” call, the engine proceeds to the
fire.
15. The officer orders the type of hose lay.
Page 54
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS
16. For supply, the hydrant member pulls a running
line from the panel side of the engine, then
dresses the line.
17. Nozzle member starts the hose lay.
18. The engine engineer acquires the proper fittings
for the suction inlet (4" to 3 ½" reducer and 3 ½"
double female). Engineer then relieves the
hydrant member on the supply line.
19. The hydrant member or the engine engineer will
break the coupling and bed the female. The
member will then shoulder the male coupling on
the inside shoulder. Member will then take the
male coupling to the suction inlet on the panel
side of the apparatus and connect it. The member
(hydrant member or engine engineer) will then call
for "water."
TWO PEICE ENGINE CO.
ALLEY LAY
20. Hydrant member will assist in the hose lay after
being relieved by the engine engineer.
21. The 200 Series engineer, after stopping at the
hydrant, will attach the 3 ½"' double female to the
discharge gate on the panel side of the apparatus.

6/6-06.04
22. 200 Series engineer pulls a 3 ½" running line,
breaks the coupling and beds the female. The 200
Series engineer will then shoulder the male
coupling on the inside shoulder.
23. The 200 Series engineer proceeds to the panel
side of the apparatus and connects the 3 ½"
coupling to the discharge gate with the 3 ½"
double female on it.
24. The 200 Series engineer is to load the line after
the "water" call from' the engine engineer.
25. The 200 Series engineer will now dress the hose
bed and check the hose line from the apparatus to
the first coupling for kinks.
Page 55
ENGINE EVOLUTIONS

6/7-01.01
-01. LADDERS-GENERAL
.01 Terminology
Baby Bangor: 14-foot extension ladder.
Bangor Ladder: 50-foot extension ladder equipped with
tormentor poles for raising, guiding and bracing.
Base: Bottom end of a ladder.
Base, True: Indicated only by the tie-rods on. straight
ladders which will be under the rungs of a raised
ladder when the true base is down.
Beams: The principal structural assemblies of ladders.
Main Beam: Principal structural member of a beam
assembly on a trussed ladder.
Truss Beam: The secondary structural member of a
beam assembly on a trussed ladder.
Beam Bolts: Bolts which hold the beam assembly
together.
Beam Raise: A method of raising a ladder on edge. One
beam above the other and rungs vertical at the
beginning of the raise.
Braces: Strengthening strips attached diagonally from
main beam to truss beam in some types of trussed
ladders.
Curling. Used to raise one member extension ladder
from rest position. Member assumes squat position
beside ladder, both feet against beam. Grasps
proper rungs, hands against outside beam, elbows
outside knee. (Figure 1)
Page 1
Figure 1
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Rocks over ladder, locks arms, returns to squat position
with ladder chest high and rungs parallel to body.
(Figure 2)
Figure 2
Reverse Curl. Used to return one member extension
ladder to rest position.
Dogs: See "Locks."
Flat Raise: Method of raising a ladder with shoes of both
beams on ground and rungs parallel to the ground
throughout the raise.
Front of Ladder. Climbing side of ladder; the side away
from the building when in position for climbing.
Rung side on LAFD ladders.
Front Member. Member working front side of ladder.

6/7-01.01
Footing. Methods used to secure the base of ladder
from undesired movement.
One member lowering in (Figure 3)
Footing on beam (Figure 4)
Page 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Footing for climbing (Figure 5)
Figure 5
Footing, Flat Raise-Place the ball of each foot well up
on the shoes of the ladder with the heels resting firmly
on the ground. Place hands on knees in a slight crouch.
Grasp the beams as they come within reach while
maintaining balance. (Figure 6)

6/7-01.01
Page 3
Figure 6
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Footing, Beam Raise-With the foot tipped on inner
edge, place the foot at right angle to the ladder beam;
inner edge of sole on the ground, bottom of foot against
the ladder shoe, grasp top truss beam with one hand,
with other hand grasp top main beam to assist in raising.
(Figure 7)
Figure 7
Guides: Longitudinal strips on inner side of beam
assemblies on most extension ladders which
guide the fly section and hold the fly to the main
section. The guides on baby bangor ladders are
metal angles attached to the top of beam
assemblies on the main section.
Halyard. Rope used to extend the fly section of a ladder.
Hooks: Folding steel members that secure a roof ladder
for climbing.
Inside Hand (or Foot): The hand (or -foot) that is closer
to the ladder. Also, the hand (or foot) that .is
closer to the other member of a two-member team
when working side by side.

6/7-01.01
Knee/Foot Lock Position: Used to secure one beam of a
ladder when raising or lowering the fly section.
The knee is lodged against one side of the beam
and the instep of the foot is hooked around the
opposite side of the same beam. For safety, avoid
placing toe of locked foot under fly section.
(Figure 8)
Figure 8
Ladders:
Straight: A ladder built in one section.
Extension: A ladder built in two or more sections
which can be extended to increase its length.
Main Section: Lowest or bottom section of
extension ladder.
Center Section. Center section of extension
ladder.
Fly Section: Extension section of a ladder, usually
refers to the top section.
Roof Straight ladder with folding hooks at the top.
Left Member. (Front or rear). The left member of a
two-member team when working side by side as
viewed from behind.
Locks: Positive locking devices which keep the fly
section from retracting once raised.
Page 4
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Locking-in: Secure or lock oneself to a ladder with the
leg. (Figure 9)
Figure 9
Lower - in: Rest the upper portion of the ladder against
objective after raising ladder to vertical position.
Lowering: Removing a ladder from a raised position.
Includes retracting fly of extension ladder.

6/7-01.01
Moving Pivot. Used while raising ladders to bring them
parallel with objective. As ladder approaches the
near vertical position, base member spans pivot
beam at approximately 3rd rung level and
opposite beam at approximately 5th rung level.
When ladder is at near vertical and at balance
point, base member removes foot from opposite
beam, steps back pulling opposite beam into
pivot. As base member starts pivot, top member
spans beams shoulder high, foots pivot beam or
bottom rung against pivot beam, and assist base
members in pivoting ladder into desired position.
(Figure 10)
Figure 10
Outside Hand (or Foot): See "inside" hand (or foot).
Opposite of "inside."
Park: Ladder on beam and rungs in vertical position.
Pivot: As applied to ladders, means turning a ladder on
one beam when the ladder is in a vertical or
near-vertical position.
Poles: See "tormentors."
Pulley: Grooved wheel over which the halyard drawn
when extending an extension section.
Raises: Methods of raising a ladder. See "flat raise" and
"beam raise."
Raising: Placing a ladder in position for climbing;
includes extending fly of extension ladders and
lowering in.
Page 5
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Rear of Ladder. Side of ladder opposite the climbing
side; side of ladder toward the building when in
position for climbing.
Rear Member. Member working rear side of ladder.
Rest. When ladder is laid on ground with rungs in
horizontal position.
Right Member. (Front or rear) The right member of a
two member team when working side by side as
viewed from behind.
Rungs: Cross-members of ladder used when climbing.
They are set in main beams or in truss blocks
between main and truss beams.
Rungs Away. Rungs are usually set (Rungs Out) closer
to one side of the ladder than the other. "Rungs
away" means that rungs are on the side farther
from the building after ladder is raised.
Rungs Down: Rungs are on the side closer to the
ground.
Rung Side: Front of ladder; the side closer to the rungs;
climbing side on LAFD ladders.
Rungs Up: Rungs are on side away from ground.
Shoes: Metal devices attached to the base of each
beam to provide a better footing and to protect the
beam ends.
Span the Beams: Grasp the main and truss beams of an
extension ladder shoulder high in such a way that
the hand will not be injured by raising or lowering
the fly. (Figure 11)
Figure 11
Spotting. Placing the base of ladder in correct location
prior to raising.
Spurs: Metal spikes attached to the base of tormentor
poles.

6/7-01.02
Stops: Devices which prevent extending the fly out of
the main section.
Straps: Web straps with buckle used for securing
ladders, improvising stepladders, etc.
Tie-rods: Metal rods which reinforce and hold the ladder
assembly together.
Tormentors: Poles attached to the upper end of the
main section of bangor ladders; used to raise,
guide, and brace these ladders.
Trombone: Moving a ladder forward from the balanced
carrying position by extending both arms causing
the base to drop to the ground.
Trusses: Vertical, diagonal, and longitudinal
strengthening parts of a trussed ladder. Includes
braces, blocks, and truss beams but usually refers
to truss beams.
Truss Blocks: Blocks between the main and truss beams
of a trussed ladder.
.02 Ladder Classification
Extension 12, 14, 20, 24, 35, and 50 feet
Straight .......... 16, 20, and 24 feet
Roof 1..... 0, 12, 14, 16 and 20 feet
Collapsible 10 feet
03 Number of Members Permitted on Ladders
Straight and Extension:
10, 12, 14, and 16 foot ........................... one member
20 and 24 foot ........................................two members
35 foot ...................................................three members
50 foot .................................................... four members
Roof Ladders on Pitched Roofs:
10, 12, and 14 foot ............................... . two members
16 and 20 foot ......................................three members
.04 Maintenance
Inspection:
Ladders should be inspected periodically and AFTER
USE. Check for (1) marred, worn, cracked or splintered
parts, (2) shoes worn smooth, (3) worn, frayed or loose
halyards, (4) loose tie-rods and beam bolts, and (5)
cracked, peeled or blistered finish.
Page 6
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Care:
Keep ladders clean and dry. Particular attention
should be directed to crevices where wood
members are joined. Oil locks and pulleys as
necessary. Check for and touch up chipped finish
after each use. Adjust halyards as necessary and
replace those which are worn, frayed, or
deteriorated by age. Sharpen dull shoes. Report
loose tie-rods and beam bolts. When necessary,
ladders of wood construction may be carefully
scraped and lightly sanded. Minimum of two coats
of clear finish, per Department specifications,
should then be applied as a means of preserving
the wood and facilitating inspection. Sand lightly
between coats.
NOTE: Pigmented paints shall not be used on ladders
except on metal parts and for marking.
Marking.
Marking the length and company designation on
the metal parts at both ends eliminates the
guesswork when removing or replacing ladders.

6/7-02.01
-02. BASIC OPERATIONS
.01 Signals and Commands
The importance of proper and adequate communication
between team members when handling ladders cannot
be overemphasized.
The base member of a team will generally control timing
and placement of ladders and will give commands
unless otherwise specified. Some signals will be given
by voice, others by motion of the ladder. Voice signals
may not be heard or understood; therefore, members
should be alert for any signal given by motion of the
ladder.
.02 Removing
Several methods are employed for carrying ladders on
apparatus. They may be held in place by ladder clamps,
keys, straps, etc. Removing or unlocking these devices
is necessary to release the ladders. The tiller post must
be withdrawn on some trucks before certain ladders can
be removed.
It may be necessary to remove ladders from apparatus
before they are needed. They should be placed near the
apparatus, out of the way of emergency operations.
.03 Lifting to Carry
When lifting ladders from the ground or from the
apparatus, use the muscles of the legs, arms and
shoulders. Keep the back straight and flat. Coordination
of effort between team members is essential.
.04 Reversing
When it is necessary to change direction of travel with
long ladders, and it is unnecessary or undesirable to turn
the ladder end for end, a simple pivot to reverse
direction is used.
Ladders Carried Flat:
On the command to reverse, all members reach across
with outside hand, take weight of beam at shoulder level
from inside hand, pivot into the ladder to face opposite
direction and carry. Remove what is now outside hand.
Ladders Carried At Arm's Length:
On command to "prepare to reverse," grasp first rung in
front of shoulder with outside hand thumb against top
beam.
Page 7
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
On command, "reverse," both members take weight of
ladder on outside hand, pivot 90 degrees while
withdrawing inside arm from between rungs. Grasp first
rung behind shoulder with inside hand, thumb against
top beam. Pivot another 90 degrees toward new
direction of travel while placing what is now inside arm
between 1 st and 2 nd rungs. Assume normal carrying
position.
NOTE: Above operation should be performed as one
fluid movement.
.05 Spotting:
Avoid unnecessary blocking of doors, passageways, etc.
Ladders are generally spotted so that when raised, the
top of the ladder will be to the left side of the window to
facilitate getting on or off.
Ladders placed for climbing are to be set with the rungs
away from the building and the base resting evenly. The
proper climbing angle of a ladder is approximately 70
degrees. To obtain this angle, the base of the ladder
should be placed at a distance from the building or
objective equal to approximately 1/4 the desired height.
.06 Raising:
Two basic methods of raising ladders are the flat and
beam raises. Overhead wires, other obstructions and
limited space will dictate the type of raise used.
.07 Lowering In
One-member
Foot ladder on center of bottom rung. Span beams
shoulder high; use body weight to prevent base of
ladder from sliding out; lower in to objective; watch the
top of the ladder. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
NOTE: Incline the foot with heel off ground so the toes
will not be under the fly.

6/7-02.07
Two-member.
Front member foots ladder on center of bottom rung.
Span beams shoulder high. Use body weight to prevent
base of ladder from sliding out. Lower in to objective;
watch the top of the ladder.
Rear member watches base. Spans the beams shoulder
height or above, steps back and assumes the weight.
(Figure 2)
Figure 2
Three-Member:
Front members foot beam of ladder with outside foot,
inside foot to rear. Both members span beams shoulder
high and lower ladder into objective watching top of
ladder. Rear member watches base, spans beams
above shoulder height, steps back and assumes weight
of ladder. (Figure 3)
Page 8
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 3

6/7-02.08
.08 Shifting and Moving
Shifting Large Ladders:
Two -members at front of ladder grasp most convenient
common rung with inside hands, palms up, hands near
closest beam, thumbs under rung. With outside hands,
reach up and span beams; working together lift base
only enough to shift to desired position. Right member
responsible for top placement of ladder, left member for
base. Lift with legs, keeping back straight. Move base
slightly ahead of top of ladder. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
When shifting large extension ladders (p strapping fly)
one member shall capture halyard front side of ladder.
Incorporating halyard shifting will prevent dogs from
unlocking prevent premature release of fly section.
NOTE: On 35' extension ladder, base member to front
of ladder and directs right and left m in proper
placement of ladder.
Page 9
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Shifting Small Ladders:
One member grasps most convenient rung near center
with either hand, palm up, thumb under rung. Span
beam with other hand. Face direction of travel. Lift
ladder only enough to shift to desired position. Watch
top of ladder keeping base slightly ahead of top. (Figure
5)
Figure 5

6/7-02.09
Moving One-Member Straight Ladder:
Bring ladder to vertical position; with hands well apart,
bottom hand palm up, top hand palm down; grasp
centers of most convenient rungs. Watch top, using legs
lift ladder high enough for bottom rung to clear legs,
balance and move. If ladder becomes unbalanced,
ground base and place foot on center of bottom rung
until ladder is stabilized. Watch top of ladder with
occasional glances down to check direction and footing.
(Figure 6)
Page 10
Figure 6
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
.09 Securing
Ladders raised to fire escape balconies shall be secured
to balcony railing with a ladder strap. (Figure 7) Strap
balcony railing and stanchion to the beam and nearest
rung of ladder. Members should be on balconies, inside
windows, or on roofs to strap ladders. Ladders shall be
held or footed while in use until they are strapped. When
working from ladders, members should be locked in.
Figure 7
Ladders raised to windows may be secured by strapping
rung to a pike pole, crowbar or other similar object
placed horizontally just inside window. On roofs, hay
hooks and straps may be used.
When it is not possible to secure ladders at the top, the
base shall be made safe against slipping while members
are climbing or working on them, by footing. It is an
extreme hazard to be locked in on a ladder that has not
been secured.
On extension ladders, the fly shall be strapped to the
main. Place strap around bottom rung of fly and
adjacent rung of main section. It is very important that
the top of a ladder be secured before working a hose
stream from it, as the nozzle reaction tens to push the
tip of the ladder away from the building. In emergencies
where it is not possible to secure the top of the ladder
from which a hose stream must be used, the ladder
should be used at a flatter-than normal angle. Care must
be taken not to overload the ladder when in this position
and the base must be secured.
.10 Climbing (up or down)
Ascending, look toward the rungs just above the head.
Descending, look toward the rungs just below the head.
Climb with hands grasping the center of the rungs, body
erect, shoulders at an arm's length from the ladder,
knees in line with the body, balls of the feet on the
rungs. The legs carry the weight and the arms maintain
balance and stability. Do not reach up to pull with the
arms. Ascend briskly, but smoothly, feet and hands
working together,

6/7-02.11
taking every rung with the feet and every other
rung with the hands. When descending, grasp
each rung alternating hands. The feet and hands
should contact appropriate rungs at the same time
to develop a rhythm that is essential to smooth
climbing. (Figure 8)
Figure 8
NOTE: If carrying a heavy load, it may be necessary to
take every rung with hands.
.11 Locking In
To work efficiently, it is necessary to "lock in" when
working from a ladder to permit the free use of both
hands. Lock in with the leg on the side opposite that on
which the work is to be performed.
1. Climb ladder to desired height.
2. Stand on one foot and place other foot and leg
through ladder over the second rung above the
one on which the foot rests.
3. Bring foot back through ladder, under rung; hook
foot on beam and position leg with back of knee
against rung.
Page 11
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
4. Move supporting foot down to a rung that allows
for maximum comfort and working stability. Foot
parallel on rung, heel or toe against beam. (Figure
9)
Figure 9
.12 Lowering
In general, the operations necessary to lower ladders
are the reverse of those used in raising.
Be sure the area is clear before lowering. Check
overhead and ground obstructions. When one member
lowers a ladder, member should use every rung, placing
hands near the center of the rungs.
If more than one member is lowering, the base member
is responsible for the safety of the operation. Two
members working side by side to lower a ladder should
work in unison, placing outside hand on the beam and
inside hand on every other rung. Keep arms straight.
Avoid the tendency to work too fast when lowering a
ladder.

6/7-02.13
.13 Ventilating
Ladders may be used to advantage in ventilating above
ground where windowpanes are encountered. With the
ladder held in position some distance away, allow top to
fall against the glass. Watch for glass falling or sliding
down beams of the ladder.
NOTE: Turning the ladder so that only one beam strikes
the glass will reduce the possibility of glass sliding down
the beams.
Page 12
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS

6/7-03.01
-03. STRAIGHT LADDER, 16 AND 20
FOOT
.01 Uses
Sixteen and twenty-foot straight ladders are generally
used for reaching roofs of one story structures, windows
on second floors, etc. The 20-foot straight ladder can
sometimes he used to reach the lowest fire escape
balcony.
.02 Lifting & Carrying
With ladder in park position, stand at center of ladder,
rungs toward member. Facing away from direction of
travel with inside foot to the rear of outside foot.
Keeping back straight, bend legs and grasp main beam
of ladder at balance point. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
In one continuous motion
1. Straighten legs while lifting ladder with inside arm
until top beam is just above shoulder height.
2. Pivot 180 degrees into ladder while placing
outside hand and arm between the two center
rungs of ladder. The top beam is brought to rest
on shoulder. The inside hand is fully extended and
grasping bottom truss beam.
Page 13
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
3. The outside hand is removed from ladder.
4. Rungs next to body, arm through ladder at center,
top beam on shoulder, hand grasping well forward
on truss beam, pulling rung back against shoulder
for stability.
5. Carry ladder with top beam slightly below eye
level. (Figure 2). For safety to others, dip the base
of ladder low before turning corners or when
changing direction to avoid striking someone in
front of or behind you.
Figure 2

6/7-03.03
.03 Raising
1. Carry toward objective.
2. While approaching objective, place outside hand
on second rung in front of shoulder; little finger
against top beam. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
3. While in this position, slide inside hand along truss
beam. Pass inside elbow back between body and
rung, grasp rung which is against shoulder with
inside hand, little finger against bottom beam.
(Figure 4)
Page14
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 4
4. Raise inside elbow to bring rungs to horizontal
position. Maintain proper carrying angle... shoes
slightly below eye level. (Figure 5)
Figure 5

6/7-03.04
5. "Trombone" ladder as you approach objective so
that shoes of ladder contact ground at base of
objective. (Figure 6)
Figure 6
6. As ladder base contacts objective at ground level,
dip the knees slightly and then as the knees are
straightened, push ladder off shoulder and
continue to raise ladder, grasping centers of most
convenient rungs. Capture bottom rung against
objective using foot corresponding to top hand,
placing foot parallel to rungs. (Figure 7)
Page 15
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 7
NOTE: Steps 2 through 6 are accomplish without
stopping forward motion.
7. With hands well apart, grasp centers of m
convenient rungs, palms facing each other, ladder
clear of ground; pull base away from building to
adjust proper climbing angle a position.
8. Secure ladder if possible.
.04 Lowering
1. Grasp convenient rungs, hands well apart, palms
facing each other; watch top, move base of ladder
into objective and capture bottom rung, using
same method as in raising.
2. Keeping foot on bottom rung and holding
convenient rung with corresponding hand, turn
toward direction of travel; check clearance.
3. Before moving foot off bottom rung, allow top of
ladder to move away from objective, recapture
bottom rung.
4. Turn and face ladder, and with both hands, start to
lower, using center of every rung. When one hand
reaches the first rung past center, place other
hand through the rungs in center of ladder,
pivoting body 180 degrees. Grasp well forward

6/7-03.05
on truss beam, lower ladder onto shoulder and walk off,
pulling rung into shoulder.
.05 Lowering to Ground
Come to a complete stop, inside foot to rear. With
outside hand, grasp main beam with thumb between
shoulder and rung, palm down. Hop ladder off shoulder,
pivot 90 degrees, and allow ladder to land on forearm.
(Figure 8)
Figure 8
Readjust outside hand to center of ladder; remove
forearm, pivot 90 degrees, and using legs, lower ladder
to park position. Do not bend back
Page 16
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS

6/7-04.01
-04. STRAIGHT LADDER, 24-FOOT
01 Uses
Twenty-four foot straight ladders are used for reaching
roofs of one-story buildings, windows on second floors,
fire escape balconies, etc. This ladder is normally raised
by two members, however, in an emergency situation it
may be raised by one member using 20 foot straight
ladder evolutions.
.02 Lifting and Carrying
With ladder in rest position, members take place on
proper side of ladder, base and top, facing away from
direction of travel. Squat with inside foot to rear. Base
member grasps ladder on top beam with inside hand,
little finger against first rung. Top member grasps top
beam with inside hand, little finger against second rung
from top (Figure 1)
Figure 1
On command from base member, both members lift
ladder, pivot 180 degrees into ladder and place outside
arm between first and second rungs, grasp lower beam,
arms binding rungs. Step off towards objective, ladder
carried at arms length. (Figure 2)
Page 17
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 2
NOTE-. Never place hand over end of shoe.
.03 Returning to Ground
Members stop with inside foot to rear, reach across body
with outside hand and grasp top beam. Release inside
hand, pivot 180 degrees into ladder and lower to ground.
.04 Flat Raise
1. While approaching objective, base member picks
spot, reaches across body with outside hand,
grasps top beam, turns head slightly to rear and
gives command "flat raise." (Figure 3)

6/7-04.04
Figure 3
2. Upon this command, top member places outside
hand on second rung in front of body, little finger
against top beam, inside hand on next rung back
with little finger touching bottom beam. (Figure 4)
Page 18
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 4
3. When spotting point is reached, base member
stops with inside foot forward and stops all forward
motion of ladder by a slight backward pull.
4. Base member releases grip on bottom beam,
withdraws inside arm from between first and
second rungs as he/she grounds bottom beam
slightly behind heel of inside foot.

6/7-04.04
5. Place inside hand on top beam, forming a
baseball grip, pivot 180 degrees on inside foot and
foot grounded beam with outside foot. (Figure 5)
Figure 5
6. Release inside hand from top beam and push top
beam to ground using outside hand; place outside
foot on beam. (Figure 6)
Figure 6
7. Base member places hands on knees at this point
and waits for ladder to reach him/her. As the base
is footed and turned rungs down, top member lifts
ladder over his/her head and continues to raise,
grasping centers of most convenient rungs.
(Figure 7)
Page 19
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 7
8. When ladder reaches a near-vertical position,
both members perform moving pivot if necessary.
(Figure 8)
Figure 8
9. Front member (top member) places foot on
bottom rung next to inside beam; base member
pivots ladder towards building; both members
span beams shoulder high. When pivot is
complete, top member slides foot to center of the
rung and watches top; rear member steps back.

6/7-04.05
10. Both members lower ladder into objective. Front
member guides the top. Rear member watches
base. (Figure 9)
Figure 9
11. Front member secures ladder, if possible.
.05 Lowering Flat
1. Both members span beams shoulder high. Front
member foots center of bottom rung.
2. Rear member (base member) pushes ladder to
raise from objective to vertical position and foots
convenient beam.
3. Pivot if necessary, both members foot pivoting
beam.
4. Rear member foots both beams as front member
steps back to lower ladder.
5. Rear member watches for overhead or other
obstructions as front member lowers ladder.
6. Front member lowers ladder, hand over hand,
using the center of each rung until last rung is
reached.
7. As front member reaches last rung, the free arm is
held out horizontally while still facing base of
ladder.
8. Rear member removes foot from the beam
indicated by the front member's outstretched arm,
with same side hand picks up the unfooted beam.
(Figure 10)
Page 20
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 10
9. As ladder is lifted to vertical, rear member steps
to the rung side of the ladder grasping shoes of
top beam with inside hand palm down; outside
hand grasps second rung, thumb against top
beam. (Figure 11)
Figure 11
10. As rear member picks up ladder, front member
turns ladder on edge, pivots toward ladder rungs
to body and places free arm between first and
second rungs to carry.

6/7-04.06,
11. As front member moves away, rear member lifts
ladder, removes inside hand from beam, reaches
through first and second rungs and assumes
proper carrying position.
.06 Beam Raise
1. While approaching objective, base member
chooses spot, reaches across body with outside
hand, grasps top beam turns head slightly to rear
and gives command "Beam Raise." Upon this
command, top member places outside hand on
second rung in front of body, little finger against
bottom beam. Inside arm remains in binding
position.
2. When spot is reached, base member stops with
inside foot forward and stops all forward motion of
ladder by giving a slight backward pull.
3. Base member releases grip on bottom beam,
withdraws inside arm from between first and
second rungs as bottom shoe is being grounded
slightly behind, heel of inside foot.
Page 21
Allows outside hand to remain on top beam and
places inside hand on top beam forming a
baseball grip.
Pivots on inside foot and foots grounded beam
with outside foot.
Reaches toward top with both hands and grasps
truss beam in one hand and main beam in other.
(Figure 12)
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 12
4. After preceding operations are performed by base
member, top member lifts ladder with outside
hand, simultaneously withdrawing arm from
between rungs; places inside hand on underside
of lower beam. (Figure 13)
Figure 13
5. Base member continues to foot bottom beam with
foot at right angle to beam; changes position

6/7-04.07
of hands as necessary to stabilize and assist in
raising ladder.
6. Top member raises ladder over head with both
hands spanning bottom beams and continues
raising ladder hand over hand. (Figure 14)
Figure 14
7. As ladder nears vertical position, top member
captures bottom rung with outside foot against
inside beam. (Figure 15)
Page 22
Figure 15
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
8. Front member (top member) moves foot to center
of bottom rung; both members span beams
shoulder high; rear member steps back.
9. Both members lower ladder into objective. Front
member guides the top. Rear member watches
base.
10. Front member secures ladder if possible.
.07 Beam Flip
This technique may be necessary to facilitate proper
ladder positioning so rungs are away from the objective
prior to raising ladder to objective.
1. When base member reaches spot, base member
will give command, "beam flip."
2. Both top and base member will place both hands
on rungs in front of body, little finger against
bottom beam. (Figure 1)
Figure 1

6/7-04.08
3. Both top and base members will position their
outside foot with their heel on the ground and their
toe up, Figure 2)
Figure 2
4. Both top and base member will lower ladder
slightly towards ground to assist in capturing beam
when flipped.
5. Base member gives command, "flip."
6. Both top and base member will allow top of the
ladder to rotate away from their body, (Figure 3)
capturing top beam under their outside foot.
(Figure 4)
Page 23
Figure 3
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 4
7. Both top and base member will now use the beam
raise procedure to complete the evolution.
.08 Lowering on Beam
1. Both members span beams shoulder high. Front
member foots center of bottom rung.
2. Rear member pushes ladder to raise from
objective to vertical position and foots convenient
beam.
3. Rear member then foots inside of lowering beam.

6/7-04.08
4. On command from base member, top member
moves to footed side of ladder, foots beam and
grasps main and truss beams shoulder high.
(Figure 16)
Figure 16
5. Top member breaks ladder over foot and lowers
hand-over-hand spanning the bottom beams.
6. As top member begins to lower ladder, base
member grasps main and truss beams to assist in
lowering ladder.
7. As top member nears fourth rung from top, base
member grasps second rung from bottom with
outside hand. (Figure 17)
8. As top member moves away, base member pivots
around to rung side of ladder and prepares to step
off. (Figure 18)
Page 24
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 17
Figure 18
9. Rear member lifts ladder, removes inside hand
from beam, reaches through first and second
rungs and assumes proper carrying position.
10. As rear member picks up ladder, front member
pivots toward ladder rungs to body and places free
arm between first and second rungs to carry.

6/7-05.01
-05. EXTENSION LADDERS
GENERAL
.01 Extending Fly
Extension ladders should normally be extended one foot
above window sills or fire escape balcony railing, and a
MINIMUM of three feet or more above parapet walls,
roofs, etc.
.02 Locking Fly
Never reach through rungs to lock the fly of extension
ladders. Serious injury can result if halyard breaks or
control of ladder is lost.
.03 Shifting Base
The base of an extension ladder may be shifted toward
the building or to either side after it is lowered in. DO
NOT move the base away from the building unless the
sections are strapped together.
.04 Separating Ladders
Extension ladders can be taken apart to make two
straight ladders, however it is not practical with ladders
having a halyard.
Page 25
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS

6/7-06.01
-06. EXTENSION LADDER, 12-FOOT (one
member)
.01 Uses
Twelve-foot extension ladders are useful for inside work
and as a stepladder. These ladders are made in two
seven-foot sections. A short D-handled pike pole is
usually carried attached to the fly.
.02 Lifting and Carrying
Fly section up, base to member's right, using third and
fourth rungs from top, curl ladder, bring to near vertical.
Using waist high rungs, bend at the knees, back straight.
Lock arms and straighten legs raising ladder slightly off
the ground. To clear obstructions at rear, take 3 to 4
steps lifting ladder to horizontal carrying position. Base
will be forward, main section against face, bottom beam
on shoulder. Ladder is carried with both hands. Proper
carrying angle is the center of bottom rung at eye level.
(Figure 1)
Figure 1
.03 Raising
1. Carry to desired location, locate spot, trombone to
ground base.
2. Spot ladder, fly out, in a vertical position. Pivot if
necessary.
Page 26
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 2
3. Step to front of ladder and assume knee/foot lock
position. Span footed beam high with inside hand.
4. Place outside foot 18 to 24 inches in front of
ladder and parallel with rungs. (Figure 2)
5. Reach down with outside hand, palm up. Grasp
third rung from bottom of fly, raise fly and engage
locks on third rung from bottom of main section.
As fly is raised, lean ladder away from body to
allow locks to engage.
6. Grasp bottom rung of fly with right hand, palm up,
raise fly to desired height. Lean ladder away from
the body allowing locks to engage on the rung of
main section.
7. Step to front of ladder, span both beams shoulder
high, foot center of bottom rung, watch top, lower
in.

6/7-06.04
Removing pike pole (if necessary).
With either leg, foot center of bottom rung. With
convenient hand, palm down, tightly grasp adjoining
rungs of fly and main section. With heel of other hand,
free D-handle and remove pike pole. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
Replacing pike pole.
Reverse procedure as removing.
.04 Lowering
1. Foot the ladder on center of bottom rung. Span
beams shoulder high and pull the ladder to a
near-vertical position.
2. Assume knee/foot lock position, span footed beam
high with inside hand.
3. Place outside foot 18 to 24 inches in front of
ladder and parallel with rungs.
4. With outside hand, palm up, grasp bottom rung of
fly.
5. Unlock, lower fly and engage locks on third rung
from bottom on main section. Lean ladder away
from body to allow locks to engage.
6. Reach up and grasp third rung of fly. Unlock and
lower fly engaging locks on bottom rung of main
section.
Page 27
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
.05 Returning to ground
1. Step to side of ladder, grasp waist high rung with
both hands, palms up, place beam against
shoulder, main section against face. Pivot if
necessary.
2. Lift and carry to desired location.
3. Locate spot, trombone ladder.
4. With inside hand palm up, grasp 4th rung from
top, against outside beam, remove outside hand
from ladder, remove beam from shoulder, side
step and pivot ladder 180 degrees (Figure 4)
Figure 4
5. Lower ladder using reverse curl procedure.
.06 Stepladder
1. Foot ladder the same as for raising.
2. Lean ladder away from body.
3. Grasp fly, palm up, by third rung from the bottom.
4. Lift fly slightly to disengage locks.
5. Lower fly to engage pins on top of fly into slots at
top of main beam.
6. Step back with base of fly to complete operation.

6/7-07.01
-07. EXTENSION LADDER, 14-FOOT (one
member)
.01 Uses
Fourteen-foot extension ladders are useful for inside
work. They are used to access attics through scuttle
holes, can be made into stepladders, etc. These ladders'
are made of two nine-foot sections. A pike pole is
usually carried attached to the fly.
.02 Lifting and carrying
Main section up, base to member's left, using third and
fourth rungs from top, curl ladder, bring to near vertical.
Using waist high rungs, bend at the knees, back straight.
Lock arms and straighten legs raising ladder slightly off
the ground. To clear obstructions at rear, take 3 to 4
steps lifting ladder to horizontal carrying position. Base
will be forward, main section against face, bottom beam
on shoulder. When ladder is balanced on shoulder,
remove outside hand. Proper carrying angle is with top
shoe slightly below eye level. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
.03 Raising
1. Carry to desired location, recapture with outside
hand, trombone to ground base.
2. Spot ladder, rungs out, in a vertical position.
Page 28
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
3. Step to rear of ladder. Assume knee/foot lock
position.
4. Place rear right foot 18 to 24 inches behind ladder
and parallel with rungs.
NOTE: Before extending ladder, remove pike pole
and set it against the wall or other convenient
place, away from base of ladder. (Figure 2)
Figure 2
5. Span footed beam high with inside hand; pull
down and push on ladder, transferring the
downward pressure through the ladder to the
opposite beam for positive control.

6/7-07.04
6. Reach down with outside hand, palm up. Grasp fly
third rung from bottom, raise fly and engage locks
on third rung from bottom of main section. (Figure
3)
Figure 3
7. Grasp bottom rung of fly with outside hand, palm
up, raise fly to desired height. NOTE: Make sure
locks are engaged on the rung of main section.
8. Span beams, step around to front of ladder.
9. With heel off the ground and foot inclined, foot the
ladder on center of bottom rung; span beams
shoulder high and lower-in to objective.
.04 Lowering
1. Foot ladder on center of bottom rung; span beams
shoulder high and pull ladder to vertical position.
2. Step to rear of ladder, assume knee/foot lock
position. Span footed beam high with inside hand.
3. Place outside foot 18-24 inches behind ladder,
parallel with rungs.
4. With outside hand palm up, grasp bottom rung of
fly.
5. Unlock, lower fly and engage locks on third rung
from bottom of main section.
6. Reach up and grasp third rung of fly. Unlock,
lower fly and engage locks on bottom rung of
main section.
Page 29
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
7. Replace pike pole.
.05 Returning to the Ground
1. Step to the side of the ladder, and grasp the waist
high rungs. Place the ladder against your
shoulder, main section against face. Pivot if
necessary.
2. Lift and carry to desired location.
3. Locate spot, trombone ladder.
4. With outside hand palm up grasp 4th rung from
top, against outside beam, remove inside hand
from ladder, remove beam from shoulder,
sidestep and pivot ladder 180 degrees. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
5. Lower ladder using reverse curl procedure.
.06 Improvising Stepladder
1. Lay ladder on ground, rungs down, remove pike
pole.
2. Push fly forward slightly to release locks; lift fly at
base; pull back to release fly from guides.
3. Turn fly over, end for end, rungs up. Insert base of
fly into upper end of main section by reaching
down between rungs of fly and lifting main section
slightly; engage locks on upper rung of main
section.
4. Strap the second rungs from the top together with
a ladder strap; raise ladder to an upright position.

6/7-08.01
-08. EXTENSION LADDER, 20-FOOT (one
member)
.01 Uses
Twenty-foot extension ladders are used to reach roofs of
one story structures, second floor windows, etc., and
occasionally the lowest fire escape balconies. These
ladders are made of two 12-foot sections.
.02 Lifting and Carrying
Main section up, base to member's left, using fourth and
sixth rungs from top, curl ladder, bring to near vertical.
Inside hand may be used at this time to support and
balance the ladder by spanning the inside beam. Using
chest high rungs, bend at the knees, back straight. Lock
arms and straighten I s raising ladder slightly off the
ground. To clear obstructions at rear, take 3 to 4 steps
lifting ladder to horizontal carrying position. Base
forward, main section against face, bottom beam on
shoulder. Ladder is carried with both hands. Proper
carrying angle; top shoe slightly below eye level. (Figure
1)
Figure 1
.03 Raising
1. Carry to desired location. Trombone to ground
base.
2. Pivot (if necessary) base parallel to the objective
with rungs out, ladder vertical. Ground outside
beam.
3. Assume knee/foot lock position.
4. Place outside foot in comfortable position.
Page 30
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
5. Grasp halyard with hands at about head level,
thumbs up; keep elbows up, forearms horizontal
to control the ladder; allow ladder to lean slightly
away from body toward the objective, balance
ladder with the halyard as fly is raised. (Figure 2)
Figure 2
6. Pull halyard hand-over-hand elbows high, raising
fly to desired height.

6/7-08.04
7. With hand on same side as beam that is
controlled by knee/foot lock, lock fly by a quick
upward pull on halyard while momentarily
releasing downward pull with upper hand. (Figure
3)
Figure 3
8. Span beams shoulder high; foot the ladder on
center of bottom rung; and lower into objective.
.04 Lowering
1. Foot ladder on center of bottom rung; span beams
shoulder high and pull ladder to near vertical
position.
2. Assume knee/foot lock position, placing rear foot
in a comfortable position.
3. Grasp halyard with hands at head level, thumbs
up; keep elbows up, forearms horizontal to control
the ladder. Allow ladder to lean away from body
toward the objective.
4. Pull halyard, raising fly to release dogs. Lower fly
section hand-over-hand, locking dogs on bottom
rung of main. Use same locking method as in
raising.
Page 31
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
.05 Returning to Ground
1. Step to side of ladder and grasp chest high rungs.
Place ladder against shoulder. Pivot if necessary.
2. Lift and carry to desired location.
3. Locate spot, trombone ladder.
4. With outside hand palm up, grasp sixth rung from
top against outside beam, remove inside hand
from ladder, remove beam from -shoulder,
sidestep and pivot ladder 180 degrees. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
5. Lower ladder using reverse curl procedure.

6/7-09.01
-09. EXTENSION LADDER, 24-FOOT (two
member)
.01 Uses
Twenty-four foot extension ladders are used for reaching
roofs of one-story buildings, windows on second floors,
fire escape balconies, etc. They are made of two 14-foot
sections.
.02 Carrying
Rungs next to the body, arm through the ladder between
the second and third rungs at top and base of the ladder.
Hand forward so arm binds the rung, grasp bottom
beam; weight is carried at arm's length. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
.03 Raising
1. The 24' extension ladder may be raised to the
vertical position using the flat or beam evolutions
established for the 24-foot straight ladder.
2. When ladder is raised to vertical, rear member
spans the beams, steps back and controls ladder.
(Does not foot beam.)
3. Front member assumes knee/foot lock.
Page 32
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
4. Grasp halyard with hands at about head level,
thumbs up. Keep elbows up, forearms horizontal
to control ladder; allow the ladder to lean slightly
away from body toward the objective. (Figure 2)
Figure 2
5. Pull halyard hand over hand elbows high, raising
fly to desired height.
6. With hand on same side as beam that is
controlled by knee/foot lock, lock fly by a quick
upward pull on halyard while momentarily
releasing downward pull with upper hand.
7. Front member foots the ladder on center of the
bottom rung. Both members span beams shoulder
high and lower into objective.
NOTE: Because of the length, and weight of the
24-foot extension ladder, it is considered to be a
two-member ladder. However, in an emergency, it
may be necessary for one member to raise it
alone. In such a situation, pick it up with the fifth
and seventh rungs from the top and raise as a
20-foot extension ladder.
.04 Lowering
Ladder should be lowered in the flat position using
reverse order of raising.

6/7-10.01
-10. EXTENSION LADDER, 35-FOOT
(three member)
.01 Uses
Thirty-five foot extension ladders are used to reach fire
escape balconies, roofs of two- and some three story
buildings, second and third floor windows, etc. These
ladders are generally made of two 20-foot sections. This
ladder is normally raised by three members.
.02 Removing from Truck
1. Release locking pins.
2. Top and base member stand at ends of ladder,
facing each other, with inside foot forward. Grasp
bottom of lower beam near end with inside hand,
palm up, with the outside hand, reach across and
grasp end rungs near the center , thumbs up,
stand with head and body clear of
Figure 1
3 Center member takes position one-third from top
of ladder, faces direction ladder is to be carried.
Grasps center of convenient rung with inside
hand, and top beam with outside hand, palm
down. (Figure 2)
Page 33
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 2
4. On command of base member, all members pull
ladder from apparatus and lower top beam so that
ladder is flat at shoulder level.
a. As top beam is lowered, end member with
back toward direction of travel pivots to face
direction of travel, placing member between
ladder and apparatus. Continuing to hold
bottom beam on palm of hand while
pivoting, member drops outside hand from
rung and carries ladder beam on palm of
inside hand at or near shoulder level.
(Figure 3)
Figure 3

6/7-10.03
b. Member facing direction of travel, passes
ladder in front of face as top beam is lowered,
placing body between ladder and apparatus.
Member moves hand from rung to beam next
to shoulder and carries ladder beam on palm
of inside hand at or near shoulder level, drops
outside hand.
NOTE: Members keep their head and body
clear of beam ends as ladder is removed and
top beam lowered.
c. Center member lowers top beam to shoulder,
placing ladder between member and the
apparatus. Member guides top beam with
outside hand on beam to protect head and
shoulder; moves inside hand from rung to
beam and carries on palm of inside hand at or
near shoulder level. Outside hand is dropped
to side.
.03 Carrying and Raising
1. All members carry ladder on palm of inside hand
at or near shoulder level.
2. As ladder nears objective, top member moves up
quickly and smoothly, stopping adjacent to center
member.
3. Nearing objective, base member checks to insure
that top member has moved up. Base member
reaches across body, grasping shoe of inside
beam with outside hand, palm up (never placing
hand over end of shoe). Member lowers ladder
and reaches over beam, with inside hand grasps
first or second rungs near center, palm up. Carries
at arm's length with hand on the rungs only; if
close to spotting position, outside hand may
remain on beam preparatory to spotting. (Figure
4)
Page 34
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 4
4. As the base member approaches spotting
location, member grasps shoe of inside beam with
the outside hand (never place hand over end of
shoes), stops at the spotting location with the
outside foot forward and the foot next to the
ladder adjacent to the spotting location (Figure 5).
To halt forward motion of ladder, make a positive
stop by pulling back on ladder before grounding
base.
Figure 5

6/7-10.03
NOTE: This step should ordinarily be
accomplished not less than 15 or 20 feet from' the
spotting position to facilitate spotting and control
of the ladder.
5. Base member removes outside hand, with inside
hand on rung, stiff arms ladder to ground, while
pivoting around to foot both beams. (Figure 6)
Figure 6
6. After beams are footed, base member takes hand
from rung, places both hands on knees in a slight
crouch (Figure 7). Do not lean forward, but grasp
the beams as they come within reach while
maintaining balance.
Page 35
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 7
7. When the ladder is spotted and footed, top and
center members raise ladder in unison, outside
hands on beams, inside hands on rungs. (Figure
8)
Figure 8

6/7-10.03
NOTE: Members of unequal heights should adjust
position accordingly.
8. If necessary, members perform moving pivot
when ladder reaches a near-vertical position.
NOTE: Front member on pivot beam side, foots
that beam as soon as member is in position.
9. All members foot ladder. Rear member foots only
one beam; spans the beams shoulder high and
allows ladder to lean slightly toward objective.
Front member left side spans beams at
convenient height to allow front right member to
raise fly. (Figure 9)
Figure 9
10. Rear member pulls down on halyard to lock fly
using hand on footed side. (Figure 10)
Page 36
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 10
11. All members span beams shoulder high. Front
members continue to foot ladder; rear member
steps back, takes weight and lowers ladder into
objective. Front members watch top of ladder,
rear member watches base. (Figure 11)
Figure 11
12. Front member, right side, secures ladder.
13. Base member foots ladders while ladder is being
secured.

6/7-10.04
.04 Lowering
1. Front members foot ladder.
2. Rear member pushes ladder away from objective
to near vertical position, and foots one beam of
ladder.
3. Front member, right side, lowers fly.
4. Rear member removes foot from beam and lock,
fly on bottom rung of main using the outside that
foot to engage opposite lock. (Foot parallel to
rungs.)
5. Pivot ladder if necessary. Foot pivot beam at front
and rear while pivoting.
6. Base member foots both beams and determines
which member will be the top member.
7. Front members lower ladder hand over outside
hand on beam, inside hand on rungs.
8. As top and center members start lowering ladder,
base member removes hand from beam on side
toward center member grasps bottom rungs next
to same beam; after securing rungs with bar
member removes foot from beam and places
behind ladder, parallel with rungs. Other foot
remains on beam on side towards top member.
Crouch, bracing arm against rear knee, pushing
down on rung to keep base secure. Base member
then slides hand on beam down toward base;
keeps back straight and head up; watches top and
center members. (Figure 12)
Figure 12
9. When top and center members reach center of
ladder, base member calls "center".
Page 37
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
10. Base member removes foot from beam, remains
in crouch position, passes ladder across body
raising base of ladder to shoulder height, places
beam in palm of inside hand. (Stay clear of beam
ends.) Keeps back straight. Stands and carries
ladder at or near shoulder level. (Figure 13)
Figure 13
11. On the command "center", top and center
members lower ladder to shoulder height with
inside hand, pivot 180 degrees into ladder
transferring beam to new inside hand. Step off.
12. Top and center members adjust their positions to
properly carry ladder.
05 Replacing
1. Base member calls "that's high" when the Truck is
reached.
2. Base member then grasps both beams at the end
of the ladder and commands the other members
to "prepare to replace".
3. On this command, the center member grasps
convenient rungs. The top member faces the base
member and grasps both beams.
4. Base member then commands "replace." At this
command, all members in a coordinated effort
return ladder to its position on the Truck. (Figure
14)

6/7-10.06
Figure 14
NOTE: Because of the length and weight of the 35foot
extension ladder, it is considered a three member
ladder. However, in some emergencies, it may be
necessary for two members to raise the ladder. Use the
same basic procedures as with a 24-foot extension, two
member operation.
EXTENSION LADDER, 35-FOOT (two member)
.06 Removing from Truck
1. Release locking pins.
2. Top (Figure 1) and base (Figure 2) members
stand at ends of ladder. While facing ladder, place
foot forward that is opposite the direction of travel
and grasp the center of the second and third rungs
from top and base of ladder.
Page 38
Figure 1
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 2
3. On command of base member, members pull
ladder from apparatus and lower ladder to the
thigh of the inside leg. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
Both members place in side arms between second
and third rungs at top and base of ladder. Hand
forward so arm binds rung, grasp bottom beam;
weight is carried at arm's length. (Figure 4)

6/7-10.07
.07 Carrying and Raising
1. Both members place inside arms between second
and third rungs at top and base of ladder. Hand
forward so arm binds rung, grasp bottom beam,
weight is carried at arm's length. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
2. When approaching objective, base member
reaches across body with outside hand and grasps
top beam (Figure 5) for control.
Page 39
Figure 5
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
3. Base member reaches objective and stops with
outside foot forward (Figure 6). Member withdraws
arm from between rungs and grasps first rung in
front of body with index finger against top beam.
Member lowers the ladder to the ground with
outside hand on top beam (Figure 7). Member
then pivots on outside foot around base to face
the top member, and foots the grounded beam
with member's outside foot. (Figure 8)
Caution: Injury may result if base member turns
ladder flat.
Figure 6
Figure 7

6/7-10.07
Figure 8
4. Top member, after ladder stops, places outside
hand on second rung in front of inside arm, little
finger touching the top beam. Inside hand grasps
rung closest to the body with the little finger
against the bottom beam. (Figure 9)
Page 40
Figure 9
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
5. Top member turns ladder flat as ladder is brought
over head. (Figure 10)
Figure 10
6. Base member, when ladder is flat, shall foot both
beams with hands on knees in a slight crouch.
(Figure 11)
Figure 11

6/7-10.07
7. Top member, with ladder over member's head,
will raise ladder, grasping centers of most
convenient rungs. (Figure 12)
Figure 12
8. Base member does not lean forward as ladder is
raised, but grasps the beams as they come within
reach while maintaining balance.
9. Both members, when the ladder is vertical, shall
foot the pivot beam and pivot the ladder if
necessary. (Figure 13)
Figure 13
10. Both members shall foot the same beam (either
beam) as the fly is extended.
Page 41
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
11. Top member is to extend the fly using
hand-overhand method.
12. Top member indicates that the fly is high.
13. Base member shall pull down on halyard, locking
the dogs when the fly is high, using the hand on
same side as the foot that is footing the beam.
Figure 14)
Figure 14
14. Top member to span the beams approximately
shoulder height, and continues to foot the beam.

6/7-10.07
15. Base member to span the beam above shoulder
height, and to step back to take the weight of the
ladder when the ladder is lowered into the
objective. (Figure 15)
Figure 15
16. Top member watches top of the ladder as the
ladder is lowered into objective.
17. Base member watches base of the ladder.
18. Top member secures ladder.
19. Base member foots ladder while ladder is being
secured.
Page 42
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS

6/7-11.03
-11. EXTENSION LADDER (BANGOR),
50-FOOT (six members)
.01 Uses
Fifty-foot extension ladders are used to reach roofs of
three- and some four-story buildings, third and fourth
floor windows, etc. These ladders are generally made of
two 28-foot sections and are provided with tormentor
poles to raise, guide, and brace the ladder. This ladder
is normally raised by six members.
.02 Removing From Truck
1. Two members grasp bottom rungs, pull ladder out
of bed, move out with ladder.
2. Second pair of members (one on each side) assist
in pulling ladder from bed and as center of ladder
nears end of bed, grasp beams and move out with
ladder.
3. Third pair members (one on each side), assist in
pulling the ladder from bed, and as top of ladder
nears end of bed, grasp beams. Move out until
ladder clears apparatus and signal all members to
lift ladder.
4. All members facing base, lift ladder to shoulder
height, and carry on palm of inside hand at or
near shoulder level. Pivot to reverse direction as
necessary. The signal to reverse will be given by
rear right member as indicated by direction of
travel.
.03 Raising
1. Carry to desired location. (Figure 1)
Page 43
Figure 1
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
2. As ladder reaches spotting position, right base
member signals all members to halt, stopping with
inside foot to rear. On signal from base member,
all members reach over with outside hand, grasp
truss of fly, (Figure 2), pivot 180 degrees and
lower ladder to the ground in unison. Bend knees,
head up and back straight, feet and toes clear,
and fingertips clear of main section when
grounding.
Figure 2
3. If necessary to readjust the position of the ladder
before raising, all members on command of the
right base member, lift ladder and move as
necessary.
4. Base members release tormentor poles; top
members take position to receive poles.

6/7-11.03
5. Base members raise poles up and over, passing
to center members who in turn pass poles to top
members. Do not step under poles. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
6. Top members face base of ladder, receive poles
from center members in outstretched inside arm.
Guard against misdirected pole with outside hand.
Do not attempt to grasp pole with hands until after
it has been released by center members.
7. Base members foot ladder; place ball of outside
foot well up on ladder shoe; allow heel to rest
firmly on ground. Press down firmly on knee with
outside hand, lock inside arms around each other.
(Figure 4)
Page 44
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 4
8. Top members (pole members) grasp ends of
poles in right hands, spur between fingers. With
arms outstretched, grasp poles from underside
with left hands, Both pole 'Members kneel on right
knee (clear of ground), spurs one foot out of line
with beams; right hand close to ground. (Figure 5)
Figure 5

6/7-11.03
9. Center members face top of ladder with inside
foot to rear. Bend knees with back straight and
head up. With inside hand, grasp truss beam of fly
section 12 inches toward base from tormentor
swivels. (Figure 6)
Figure 6
Upon receiving ready signal from base and pole
members, the right center member gives
command to raise ladder.
10. Center members lift ladder, pivot under ladder to
face base, and raise ladder to a vertical position.
Work together, outside hand on beam, inside
hand on convenient rungs.
11. As center members raise top of ladder from
ground, pole members follow with poles, right
hand close to ground, applying only enough
pressure to "find" weight of the ladder.
12. When center members have ladder at arms length
above heads, pole members take weight firmly
and smoothly from center members and raise
ladder to a vertical position. (Figure 7)
Page 45
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 7
NOTE: Until the ladder reaches a near-vertical
position, it is extremely important for pole
members to maintain correct relative position. IF
LADDER STARTS TO DRIFT, POLE MEMBERS
MUST FOLLOW LADDER, MAINTAINING THE
SAME POLE-TO-BEAM ANGLES AS AT THE
BEGINNING OF THE OPERATION.
A seventh member, if available, may be stationed
at the side of the ladder near the base, to control
the ladder by grasping the beam and pushing or
pulling as necessary.
13. As ladder approaches the near vertical position,
base members grasp the beams as they come
within reach. Do not lean forward to do so.
14. When the ladder reaches vertical position, front
and rear members foot beams with their outside
feet; they then span the beams shoulder high to
steady the ladder.
15. On signal from right base member, pole members
reposition themselves, one at a time. Front pole
member directly in front of the objective, in line
with appropriate beam; side pole member 90
degrees from front pole member and standing
with pole parallel to the building.

6/7-11.03
NOTE: When approaching objective from an
angle, pole member closest to building is the
designated side pole member. (Figure 8)
Figure 8
Regardless of the angle at which the ladder was
raised, whether it is straight toward, parallel to, or
at some intermediate angle to the objective, the
pole members should position themselves in the
above relationship to the building before pivoting
the ladder or lowering in.
16. Pole members check ladder for vertical position;
adjust if necessary.
17. If necessary to pivot ladder, side pole member
will, on direction of right base member, cause
proper shoe to be raised off the ground NOT
MORE THAN HALF AN INCH.
18. Members at base pivot ladder toward objective,
rungs out. Pivot beam to be footed front and rear.
Page 46
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
19. During pivoting operation, front pole member and
front members watch top. Base members and side
pole member watch base; pole members maintain
their position to keep top of ladder under control.
Front pole member compensates for beam
pivoting away from member by movement of body
and arms. Keep pole spur to rear of body.
20. After pivot is complete, both ladder shoes resting
firmly on the ground, pole members position the
ladder for extending the fly. Ladder should lean
slightly toward the objective.
21. On signal from side pole member, front members
working together extend fly. Rear member, left
side, pulls slack halyard through to rear of ladder
while fly is being extended. (Figure 9)
Figure 9

6/7-11.03
Pole members watch top of ladder. Side pole
member signals when fly is extended to desired
height. Rear member, right side, as fly is being
extended, spans beams to steady ladder. When
desired extension is reached, pulls down on
halyard with outside hand to lock fly. (Figure 10)
Figure 10
22. Front members span beams shoulder high and
lower into objective, Rear members span beams
shoulder high, step back, and assist lowering in,
Front pole member lowers top of ladder into the
building. Side pole member guides ladder as
directed by front pole member. (Figure 11)
Page 47
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 11
23. After ladder is lowered in, rear member, left side,
secures halyard to the most convenient rung with
"bangor ladder knot." (Figure 12)
Figure 12

6/7-11.04
Pole members place poles parallel with building.
Do not force poles into position. (Figure 13)
.04 Lowering
Figure 13
Operations are the reverse of raising except:
1. Bangor ladder knot is untied after ladder is in a
vertical position.
2. Side pole member may help pull top of ladder from
building, but must take position at side of ladder
before fly is lowered.
3. Right front member lowers the fly.
4. Right rear member locks fly with side of outside
foot, foot parallel to rungs.
5. Right rear member repositions pole members in
front of ladder.
6. After checking for obstructions, right rear member
signals "all clear" and center and pole members
begin lowering ladder.
7. When center members are approximately one foot
before the tormentor swivels, right rear member
calls "center".
8. Center members take weight on palm of inside
hand at shoulder height, reach over with outside
hand and grasp truss beam, coordinate motions,
(Figure 14); pivot 180 degrees, bend the knees and
with head up and back straight, lower the ladder to
the ground,. When grounding, keep feet clear of
ladder; keep fingertips clear of main section.
Page 48
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 14
9. As center members lower the ladder to the
ground, pole members spread out to clear poles
from top of ladder.
10. Replace poles.
.05 Picking Up from Ground
1. Members position themselves at base, center and
top, one at each position on each side of the
ladder, facing opposite direction of travel. Inside
foot to rear.
2. Bend the knees back straight and head up; grasp
truss beam of fly.
3. The signal to lift the ladder will be given by the
right rear member. On the command to lift, all
members lift ladder to shoulder height as they rise
and pivot into ladder 180 degrees. (Figure 15)
Figure 15

6/7-12.01
-12. ROOF LADDERS
.01 Uses
Roof ladders are 10, 12, 14, 16, and 20 feet in length.
They have collapsible hooks and are used for working
on pitched roofs to distribute weight and to avoid
slipping. They may also be used as a straight ladder.
.02 Carrying
Roof ladders are carried the same manner as 16 and
20-foot straight L ladders or 14- and 20-foot extension
ladders. Hooks are generally carried to the rear.
.03 Raising: 10,12, and 14 Foot (one member)
1. Member spots base of roof ladder against base of
ground ladder; or base of objective.
2. Grasp second rung from hooks with one hand and
open the hooks toward STRAIGHT SIDE OF
BEAMS with other hand. To open hooks, grasp,
push and turn. (Figure 1)
Page 49
Figure 1
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
3. Turn straight side down, raise and lean roof ladder
against ground ladder, hooks away from ground
ladder. (Figure 2)
Figure 2
4. Proceed up ground ladder, place arm between
second and third or more convenient rungs on
roof ladder.

6/7-12.04
5. Balance roof ladder on shoulder and climb using
both hands. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
6. Lock in on ground ladder at roof level.
7. Remove roof ladder from shoulder and slide
ladder onto roof, hooks down.
8. Push roof ladder up roof until hooks pass ridge.
Make sure flat side of ladder is down.
9. Pull hooks into opposite side of roof to secure
ladder.
.04 Raising: 16 and 20 Foot (two member)
1. Base member stops at ground ladder, foots roof
ladder, rungs up. Top member opens hooks,
raises ladder and leans against edge of ground
ladder, hooks out.
2. As base member foots roof ladder, top member
climbs ground ladder and places arm between
second and third rungs of roof ladder.
3. Top member steadies roof ladder; base member
climbs ground ladder until his/her head is even
with second rung below feet of top member,
places arm between convenient rungs of roof
ladder.
4. Both members climb in unison. (Figure 4)
Page 50
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 4
5. When top member reaches roof level, base
member locks in. Top member locks in after base
member. NOTE: When taking a roof ladder over a
parapet wall or onto a flat portion of a multi
pitched roof, top member may get off ground
ladder and onto roof after base member has
locked in.
6. When both members are locked in (or base
member locked in and top member on roof), both
members slide ladder onto roof, working hand
over hand with rungs of roof ladder.
7. Turn hooks down, push roof ladder up roof until
hooks pass ridge.
8. Pull hooks into opposite side of roof to secure
ladder.
NOTE: If used as a one member ladder, climb
with arm between most convenient rungs slightly
above middle of ladder; the weight above the
shoulder will facilitate sliding roof ladder onto the
roof.

6/7-13.01
-13. HOISTING AND BRIDGING
.01 Hoisting Ladders
Situations may arise where it becomes necessary to
hoist ladders to roofs or upper floors of buildings. An
equipment rope and hose roller are generally used for
this purpose.
.02 Hoisting to Roof
1. Two or more members obtain hose roller and
equipment fine; proceed to roof or window on
upper floor. Secure hose roller to edge of roof or
window ledge, drop equipment bag after securing
eye of line at rooftop; place line over hose roller.
2. Members on ground lay ladder in position to be
hoisted, rungs down; secure equipment line to
ladder.
3. Members on roof or in window hoist ladder;
members on the ground turn ladder so equipment
line will be between ladder and objective. (Figure
1)
Figure 1
4. When top of ladder is slightly above hose roller,
member on roof passes bight of slack line
between first and second rungs and hooks bight
over end of beam; allows loop to lengthen as
ladder is hoisted. (Figure 2)
Page 51
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 2
5. Continue to hoist ladder; when ladder knot
reaches hose roller, member with loop break &
ladder over hose roller. (Figure 3)
Figure 3
6. Other members turn ladder on edge; pull in on
roof.

6/7-13.03
7. When lowering, ladder should be between
equipment line and building. (Figure 4)
Figure 4
.03 Hoisting to Upper Floors
1. Two or more members obtain hose roller and
equipment rope, and proceed to the roof or a floor
above where ladder is desired. They secure hose
roller to edge of roof or window sill; drop rope bag
after securing eye of rope. Place rope over hose
roller.
2. One or more members proceed to window of floor
on which ladder is desired.
3. Members on the ground lay ladder in position to
be hoisted, rungs down; secure rope to ladder.
4. Members on roof or upper floor hoist ladder;
members on the ground turn ladder so rope will be
between top of ladder and building. When
lowering, top of ladder should be between rope
and building.
5. When base of ladder is even with desired window,
members at window grasp base of ladder, signal
members aloft to lower. Pull base in window as
ladder is lowered. (Figure 5)
Page 52
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 5
.04 Bridging
Emergencies may arise where it is necessary to bridge
between buildings to effectively carry on operations.
Straight ladders only should be used for this purpose.
Steps I through 5 are the same as "hoisting to upper
floors."
6. When ladders nears horizontal position, members
at base push ladder toward opposite

6/7-13.05
7. When ladder comes to rest on opposite window
sill, members at base turn ladder truss down.
(Figure 6)
Figure 6
8. Members above remove slack and secure rope.
.05 Alternate Method of Bridging
Operations are same as above, with the following
exceptions:
1. When base of ladder is even with desired window,
members at window grasp base of ladder and turn
top of ladder between rope and building. Signal
members aloft to lower, and pull base in window
as ladder is lowered.
NOTE: Rope leads over top rung. (Figure 7)
Page 53
LADDERS AND EVOLUTIONS
Figure 7
2. When ladder comes to rest on opposite window
sill, members above remove slack and secure
rope.

6/8-01.01
01. SALVAGE -GENERAL
The term "salvage" as applied to the fire service is
defined as "the protection of buildings and their contents
from unnecessary damage due to water, smoke and
heat."
.01 Salvage Operations
Tools and equipment used in salvage operations include
but are not limited to the following items:
Salvage Covers
Floor Runners
Plastic
Staple Gun
Lath
Squeegees
Salvage Pan
Submersible Pump
Water Vac
Hose
Ladders
Pike Poles
2,Hooks
Salvage Cord
Shovels
Sawdust
Sprinkler Shut-offs
Blowers
Salvage operations include:
1. Placing of waterproof covers and/or plastic to
protect stock, furniture, fixtures and machinery
from water and debris.
2. Use of waterproof covers and/or plastic to "bag"
floors to retain water.
3. Diverting and removing water from a building.
4. Controlling the flow of water from sprinkler
systems.
5. Moving contents where it is not possible to
provide protection within the effected area.
6. Placing of blowers and/or using built-in
ventilating systems to remove smoke.
7. Drying machinery, furniture, stock, etc.
8. Providing temporary covering for roofs or other
openings to protect contents and interior of
buildings from the elements.
.02 Storing Salvage Covers
To permit convenient handling and easy manipulation,
salvage covers are folded and stored or carried on
apparatus in a standard manner. Covers must be
thoroughly cleaned and dry before folding.
NOTE: Rubberized duck covers require the application
of soapstone.
Page 1
SALVAGE
.03 Folding Salvage Covers
Accordion fold:
1. Place cover on a clean dry surface, finished
side up.
2. Two members take positions at opposite ends of
the cover, turning corners in a short distance.
3. Place outside hand flat on end of cover three
feet in. With inside hand, reach over and grasp
corner, and fold over. (Figure 1)
Figure 1
Repeat above operation on opposite side.
4. Place hand flat on the border of the two folds in
center; reach over with other hand and fold.
Cover -is now 1/4 of its full width.
5. Remove air by pushing floor brushes the length
of cover.

6/8-01.04
6. Two members face each other at one end of cover
and fold end in approximately 8-10 inches. Place
outside hands on inside edge of fold, palms down.
Place inside hands, palms up, under edge of cover
8-10 inches from outside hands. (Figure 2)
Figure 2
7. Bring inside hands up and over outside hands,
making fold. (Figure 3) Keep all folds even.
Continue until end fold is reached tucking end
fold under.
Figure 3
8. Secure both ends of cover with salvage cord or
large rubber bands.
Page 2
SALVAGE
.04 Carrying Salvage Covers
This method shown (Figure 4) allows the free use of
both hands for climbing ladders, fire escapes, etc. The
use of either shoulder is acceptable.
Figure 4
When carrying two salvage covers at the same time, the
second cover is most easily carried on the forearm and
hip opposite the shoulder being used. (Figure 5)
Figure 5

6/8-01.05
.05 Throwing Salvage Covers
One Member Throw.
This is a quick method of covering stock, counters,
merchandise or furniture where there is no danger of
breakage. In making this throw, the use of either arm is
acceptable. The directions given are for a right handed
person.
1. Place center of folded cover over left forearm;
grasp bottom fold with thumb and fingers of left
hand.
2. With palm down, reach in with right hand next to
body; grasp three or four top folds. (Figure 6)
Figure 6
3. Swing right arm over shoulder, allowing folds to
fall back of right hand. (Figure 7)
Page 3
SALVAGE
Figure 7
4. Throw cover as IS putting, a shot; elevate left
arm; retain grip with left hand while throwing.
(Figure 8)
Figure 8
5. Unfold cover; allow it to drape over object or
material; tuck in cover at bottom to prevent
obstructing an aisle and to allow water to drain
clear of cover.
Counter Pay-Off.
A two-member operation used where conditions require
the careful placing of a cover to avoid displacing or
damaging goods. Counters or tables displaying fragile
merchandise are best covered by this method.
1. With center fold of cover next to counter, one
member holds folded cover with both forearms;

6/8-01.05
grasping bottom fold with both hands palms up.
(Figure 9)
Figure 9
2. Second person grasps the top fold with both
hands palms down; walks backward until the
cover is stretched taut. During this operation,
first member elevates his forearms to hold
tension on the cover and to keep it off the floor.
(Figure 10)
Figure 10
3. Move cover over counter; gently lower center
fold of cover to center of counter.
Page 4
SALVAGE
4. Unfold cover and drop it over the sides of counter.
(Figure 11)
Figure 11
5. Tuck bottom edges of cover in close to counter
to keep aisles free.
Two-Member Balloon:
Used in covering piles of merchandise or objects over
which there is plenty of room to float a cover. This
method permits the complete covering of materials
quickly and effectively if the top of the object or material
to be covered is within reach.
1. One member holds folded cover with both
forearms; grasps bottom folds with both hands.
(As in counter pay-off).
2. Second member grasps top fold with both
hands; walks backward until cover is stretched
taut. During this operation, the first member
elevates his forearms to hold tension on cover.
3. Both members turn cover so the double fold is
up and the center of the cover is hanging down.
Grasp a fold in each hand, keeping cover
elevated.

6/8-01.06
4. Both members pull cover taut; feet well braced;
inside foot back; elbows high; palms down.
(Figure 12)
Figure 12
5. Both members working in unison snap cover up
quickly so that air can get underneath, forming a
balloon; let go with outside hands; float cover
over object with inside hands. (Figure 13)
Figure 13
6. Drape cover over object; tuck in at bottom.
Page 5
SALVAGE
.06 Removing Salvage Covers
1. Two members take positions at opposite ends of
cover.
2. Grasp the corners of one side and fold to top of
counter. (Figure 14) Repeat the process on
other side.
Figure 14
3. Members then take positions opposite each
other at one end of cover.
4. Each member grasps end of cover; raise it clear
Figure 15
5. Both members walk forward, folding raised
portion over.

6/8-01.07
6. Continue making folds until near end of cover.
(Figure 16)
Figure 16
7. When near end of cover, members grasp end of
cover and lap over folds. (Figure 17)
Figure 17
8. One member raises folds and pivots away from
counter placing folds over shoulder at same
time. (Figure 18)
Page 6
SALVAGE
Figure 18
Other member assist in placing remainder of cover on
first member's shoulder.
.07 Sealing/Bagging
When a number of covers are required to protect large
areas, it becomes necessary to seal the covers
(commonly referred to as bagging). If a proper seal is
not made, damage to the area may occur.
1. Lay cover finish side up.
2. Fold the end edge or side of cover back
approximately one foot.
3. Grasp adjoining cover; pull it over the one-foot
lap of first cover until edges are even.

6/8-01.08
4. With members well spaced, all members grasp
both edges and roll together until lap is
completed. (Figure 19)
Figure 19
5. When sealing floors, a one-foot minimum lap up
walls should be considered.
6. Plastic may be used in lieu of covers.
NOTE: Plastic becomes slippery when wet or
folded over itself.
.08 Hanging Salvage Covers
Merchandise stored on shelves or racks may be
protected by hanging covers, however it is more
efficient to use plastic.
If covers are used, hang them by means of salvage
cord, salvage hooks, or nails placed through the
grommets. (Figure 20). Allow covers to overlap.
Page 7
SALVAGE
Figure 20
Weights placed along the top edge of a cover can be
used to hold it in place. If possible, hang covers at a
point higher than the shelving.
When using staples in conjunction with plastic, double
over edges to prevent plastic from tearing.

6/8-01.09
.09 Drains
Stairway Drain:
A method of directing water from upper floors. The
number of covers used is dependent upon the length of
the stairway. Covers, are laid starting at the bottom and
working to the top. (Figure 21)
Figure 21
As covers are laid up stairwell, members open cover
and secure to handrails or walls. The upper cover must
overlap the lower one. The top edge of the upper cover
should be placed beneath the lip of the top step. Covers
should be formed into steps to allow safe foot traffic and
to preclude the possibility of breakdown.
NOTE: Plastic shall not be used for drains on stairways
that are used for foot traffic.
Page 8
SALVAGE
Window Drain:
When leaks are in close proximity to a window, this
drain can be used to direct water to the outside of a
building. (Figure 22)
Figure 22
These drains may also be used in conjunction with catch
basins and submersible pumps.

6/8-01-09
Window drains can be used in numerous configurations.
The following two are the most common.
Window Drain with Ladder:
1. Place a straight ladder, rungs down, so one end
extends over window sill; secure in place.
2. Place other end of ladder under leak; support
same at an angle by securing it to an
improvised step ladder or by best available
means. (Figure 23)
Page 9
Figure 23
SALVAGE
3. Place a folded salvage cover on ladder, starting
at end extending over window sill. (Figure 24)
Figure 24
4. Secure cover to ladder forming a trough.
5. If necessary, place second cover in similar
manner, allowing it to overlap the first cover.
6. If needed, form a chute under leak to guide
water into the prepared trough.
Pike Pole Drain:
1. Spread a salvage cover out flat, finished side
up.
2. Lay two pike poles along opposite edges.
3. Insert points of hooks through top grommets;
fold edge of cover down enough to clear hooks.
4. Lap cover over pike poles; roll poles and cover
toward the middle until the desired width is
reached.

6/8-01.10
5. Place handle end of drain out of window; fasten
upper end by placing pike pole hooks over rungs of
ladders, pipes, high pieces of furniture or by driving
points of pike poles into the wall. (Figure 25)
Figure 25
Keep cover taut making sure it is at highest possible
angle.
Page 10
SALVAGE
.10 Catch-basins
A method of using a salvage cover or plastic to impound
water leaking through ceilings that cannot be directed to
the outside of a building by means of other improvised
drains.
1. Place objects such as ladders, chairs, sofas,
footstools, benches, etc., in position to form a
square, circle or triangle.
2. Place cover over assembled material, finished
side up; allow center of cover to bag and outer
edges to drape over furniture, etc.; tuck in at
bottom. (Figure 26)
Figure 26
3. Water is removed from a catchall by siphoning,
pumping, etc.
.11 Dewatering
When normal methods of water removal are impractical,
the following alternates may be used:
Sewer pipes, scuppers, floor drains, toilet bowls, etc.
Before removing toilet bowls, be sure water supply is
shut off. When using these methods, care must be used
to insure that drains do not become clogged with debris.

-01. GENERAL
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
6/11-01.01
A 11-98
.01 SALVAGE COVERS - CHANGING AND MAINTENANCE: Salvage covers shall be removed from apparatus and replaced with
clean, dry covers at least once each two calendar months or within 24 hours when damp or dirty. Make proper entries on F-128 (Hose
and Salvage Cover Record) and F-2 (Journal).
A. Covers removed to comply with the two-calendar-month change shall be wetted, properly dried and inspected.
B. Covers used in line of duty shall be examined, repaired if needed, washed and properly dried.
NOTE: All repairs to salvage covers are the responsibility of station personnel. Salvage cover repair kits are maintained at each
Battalion office, along with a plasticized instruction sheet for making repairs. Covers which are severely damaged and beyond
station personnel's capability to repair shall be forwarded to Supply and Maintenance.
.20 LADDERS - PAINTING OF: All Department ladders shall be painted as follows:
A. Fire-fighting ladders:
1. Wood portion - use varnish. Polyurethane and verathane-type products are not to be used on wood ladders.
2. Ladder shoes - paint with aluminum or approved color paint.
B. Station maintenance ladders:
1. Ladders currently assigned shall be maintained as at present.
2. When new ladders are issued, their original varnish finish shall be maintained with additional protective coats of varnish.
.30 CHAIN AND ROTARY SAWS AND SMOKE EJECTORS - CLEANING: These tools shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use.
Kerosene, #325 solvent or Diesel Fuel may be used for this purpose. Water shall not be used.
.40 CHAIN AND ROTARY SAWS - USE OF: Operators of power saws shall use extreme caution at all times, particularly when cutting
into unknown and concealed spaces. Under these conditions, use both the leather and rubber gloves provided for protection against
electrical shock. Goggles or face pieces shall always be worn when operating power saws. Refer to Vol. 3, 6/2-01.61.
.45 RESPIRATOR MASKS - STERILIZATION OF: After each use, the filter shall be replaced and the respirator cleaned and sterilized.
Sterilization is ineffective if there is any foreign matter or debris left on the respirator; therefore:
A. Scrub the respirator with soap or detergent in hot water (temperature the same as would be used to wash dishes).
B. Visually inspect, scrub off any remaining foreign particles with a rag, sponge or brush.
C. Rinse and shake, then air dry or wipe with a clean towel.
(Manop14) Page 1

6/11-01.50
A 11-98
-01. GENERAL (Continued)
.45 RESPIRATOR MASKS - STERILIZATION OF:
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
D. Spray or coat with Department supplied disinfectant, wet all surfaces. Do not wipe dry. Air dry only.
E. Install new filter and store in Department-supplied container. The respirators must be stored in their natural shape.
Any unnatural strain will crack or deteriorate the respirator in storage.
Consult instructions supplied with each respirator concerning the fit on chin and face.
.50 CARE OF CANTEENS: When canteens must be available for continuous use, they shall be refilled daily. Canteens shall
be rinsed with a strong solution of bicarbonate of soda and warm water, as follows:
A. When new, before using.
B. After storage, before placing into continuous service.
C. Monthly when in continuous use; when not in use, canteens shall be stored upside down with the caps off.
.60 BREATHING APPARATUS: Each Department member shall inspect their breathing apparatus daily and after each
use. The daily inspection shall be conducted as soon as practicable after members of the off-going platoon are relieved.
The procedures in Vol. 3, 6/3-06.01 (SCBA) shall be used as a guide.
.65 PERSONAL ALERT SAFETY SYSTEM – (P.A.S.S.): Each Department member shall inspect their P.A.S.S. devices daily
and after each use. The daily inspection shall be conducted as soon as practicable after members of the off-going platoon
are relieved. P.A.S.S. device batteries shall be changed annually on the first Monday in September (Labor Day). Battalion
Commanders shall insure that enough batteries are available for this change by forwarding an F-80 Requisition to Supply
and Maintenance by August 1st. Instructions and proper operational check procedures are outlined in Book 75, Safety
Bulletin #12.
.70 PORTABLE GASOLINE ENGINES - CHECK: Refer to Vol. 3, 7/1-24.60 (required checks).
.75 SECURITY OF PORTABLE RADIOS: To preclude the loss of radios, the following security guidelines shall be adhered
to by all Fire Department personnel:
A. A daily inventory of all portable radios shall be performed with journal entries made where appropriate/applicable.
The journal entry shall identify the radio number and the person assigned.
B. Each member is personally responsible for the security of the radio (including its extension MIC) assigned to them
and will be held accountable for any loss.
C. Fire Suppression personnel shall normally carry their radios in their turnout coats in the radio pouch with the
extension MIC securely attached to a suitable radio clip.
Page 2 (Manop14)

-01. GENERAL (Continued)
.75 SECURITY OF PORTABLE RADIOS: (Continued)
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
6/11-01.50
A 03-01
D. On EMS responses, the portable radio shall either be carried by the member in a radio belt clip or left in the turnout
coat, which shall be placed in a secure place on the apparatus such as in a compartment or in the cab of the vehicle.
E. Members carrying radios during non-emergency activities where the turnout coat is not worn or a radio pouch is
not available on the uniform, shall carry the radio in the belt clip provided by the Department. (Several radios have
been lost because they were left sitting unattended and were forgotten.)
In all cases when personal negligence is determined to be a factor in the loss, the Department will consider the level of
responsibility to be borne by the member for the loss, with commensurate discipline administered as appropriate.
.80 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS: Combustible gas indicators are assigned to all Battalion sedans, Fire Boats 2 and
4, and to the Fire Prevention Bureau.
Upon Notification from Operations Control Dispatch that such equipment is needed, responsible officers shall see that
response is made with a qualified operator. Such response shall be emergency, unless otherwise notified.
Combustible gas indicators may be loaned directly from field units to members of the Fire Prevention Bureau who have
been properly instructed in their use.
Responsible officers shall contact OCD immediately, whenever this equipment is:
A.Unavailable, (loaned out, inoperative, sent in for repair, reassigned, etc.).
B.Returned from loan or repair.
Combustible gas indicators shall be checked monthly and the results of such check shall be recorded on the F-973,
(Equipment Check Record).
For additional information regarding combustible gas indicators, refer to Vol. 3, 6/2-01.17.
For repair, refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-96.50.
.85 RESCUE AMBULANCE GURNEYS:
The patient gurney used by Department rescue ambulances is a multi-positional device to facilitate patient movement
in confined areas and allow ambulance loading with a minimum of effort. Although able to be operated by one person,
it is a long-standing Department procedure that when occupied, a minimum of two members is necessary to operate the
gurney to ensure both patient safety and gurney stability.
(Manop14) Page 2A

-01. GENERAL (Continued)
.50 DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER - MAINTENANCE:
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
A.Check periodically and after use to detect deteriorated, worn, or damaged parts.
B.Check nozzle periodically for any obstruction or collection of moisture.
6/11-01.90
A 5-81
C.Pressurized dry chemical extinguishers shall be kept fully charged at all times. The pressure gauge should be checked daily for a
full charge. The extinguisher will function effectively only so long as the air pressure is between 125 and 175 psi.
D.Once each month perform the above checks and then remove the extinguisher from the rack, invert it, and shake to preclude any
possibility of the chemical caking. Make proper entry on F-973, (Equipment Check Record).
For additional information regarding dry chemical extinguishers, refer to Vol. 3, 6/3-01.01, page 26.
.94 LIFE NETS - MAINTENANCE: Life nets are kept for many years in active service. A net may be used only once during its entire
life on an apparatus. Because of this, proper inspection, care, and maintenance are very critical. The following requirements are the
minimum acceptable.
A.Inspect the Life Nets
The life net should be fully inspected monthly to determine that:
1. There are no holes or tears in the fabric.
2. That the leather straps riveted to the fabric are not ruptured or cut.
3. That the hinges lock properly and that the hinge sleeves lock automatically.
If the above inspection is satisfactory, then there is no reason why the net cannot be safely used. If, however, there is any doubt
contact Supply and Maintenance for instructions. Do not test the net by dropping a dead weight, such as a sandbag into it.
B.Care and Maintenance of Life Net Fabric
1. The net should never be stored when any part of it is damp or wet.
2. Occasionally on dry days, the net should be penned and placed in a shady area. Keep the net out of the sun.
3. Keep acid fumes, paint, and chemicals from coming in contact with the fabric parts of the net.
4. Use the net occasionally to keep the canvas and pad flexible.
C.Care and Maintenance of the Spring Rods
Each of the 32 spring rods should be lubricated periodically by using silicone spray. This will lubricate the rod and not smear
on the fabric bottom. Do not use oil. The strap bolder must slide freely on the rods when impact takes place.
D.Care and Maintenance of the Hinges
Hinges should have an occasional drop of oil so that they will work freely. Any binding should be reported to Supply and
Maintenance promptly.
E.Rub the straps four or five times a year with Neat's-foot oil on a rag. Do not get oil on the fabric. If the leather has become wet, rub
the moisture off with the same oil. Do not attempt to dry the leather by artificial heat.
(a:Manop14) Page 3

6/11-25.01
A 5-81
-25. HOSE
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
.01 HOSE CHANGE: Fabric jacketed hose shall be removed from apparatus and replaced with clean, dry hose at least
once each three calendar months. Fabric jacketed hand lines, shall be changed within 24 hours when damp or dirty, fabric
jacketed supply lines shall be changed weekly or more frequently if damp or dirty. Before hose is removed from apparatus
for change, replacement sections shall be prepared and examined. Hose change will be made with as much speed as is
consistent with safety. One bed of hose will be changed at a time. The procedures in Vol. 3, 6/6-01.01, Page 51 should
be used as a guide. Make proper entries in F-2, (Journal) and on F-128. (Hose and Salvage Cover Change Record).
.36 HOSE - HOW CARRIED: Hose carried on apparatus shall be securely coupled and orderly in arrangement.
.48 GASKETS: Special care shall be exercised to see that hose gaskets are in place and that those which have
deteriorated are replaced.
.60 SUCTION HOSE - SMALL TYPE: The small hard suction hose assigned to tanks and similar apparatus, shall not be
subjected to pressure.
.72 PICKING UP - HOSE: When "picking-up" hose, it shall be replaced on apparatus in readiness for immediate use. Care
shall be exercised in "breaking" hose lines inside buildings to see that water damage is kept to an absolute minimum.
.84 HOSE LINES - SAFE USE OF: To provide greater safety to personnel and equipment while using hose lines, the
following procedures shall be adhered to:
A.Nozzles shall be shut off after attachment to hose lines and at any other time the flow from the nozzle ceases.
B.When practicable, hose lines that are to be operated from ladders, roofs, or other heights shall not be charged with
water until after such lines have been secured in position.
Where possible, hose to upper floors shall be laid on ladders and secured. Where ladders are not available such hose
lines must be supported by hose straps or other means to provide safe operation in the event of hose failure.
C.When practicable, water shall be drained at the street level before lowering hose from ladders, roofs, or other heights.
D.No member shall either jokingly or maliciously direct or cause a stream of water from a line or extinguisher to be
directed upon any person or into any premises unnecessarily.
E.Horizontal movement of large streams (2-1/2" or larger hose) from an aerial ladder, shall not exceed 15 in either
direction from an "in-line" position with the beam and truss. Horizontal movement in excess of this amount will be
accomplished by rotating the turntable.
Page 4 (a:Manop14)

-25. HOSE (Continued)
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
6/11-25.89
A 8-90
.89 CLEANING: Dirty hose, suctions and bypasses shall be washed with clear, cold water only. Station Commanders shall
contact the Captain, Equipment Engineering Unit, at Supply and Maintenance Division for instructions regarding hose
contaminated with substances which cannot be removed with clear, cold water.
.94 REPAIRS: Hose shall be repaired by Supply and Maintenance Division (refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-16.21, Exchange or Repair
of Items Available). Members shall not attempt to repair damaged hose threads or swivels (flake graphite may be used
as a lubricant). Oil is prohibited.
Damaged hose forwarded to Supply and Maintenance Division for repair shall be clean, dry, rolled, and tied in two places.
Small burns in the outer jacket do not constitute damaged hose. Before sending in for replacement or repair, test hose
as per Volume 3, 6/11-25.96. If hose is determined to be in need of repair, mark damaged area by wrapping the hose with
black tape at the location(s) where repairs are needed. Hose shall be rolled with the female coupling forming the core,
unless the female coupling needs repair. In that case, the male coupling should form the core. Attach a F-175 tag with
a clear description of the problem; i.e., hole 10' from male coupling, female swivel will not turn, etc. Refer to Volume 4,
8/7-40.00, FORWARDING ITEMS.
.96 HOSE TESTING: Station Commanders shall cause all rubber lined double jacketed hose, by-passes and soft suction
hoses and synthetic nitrile "all-rubber" hoses (2" high-rise hose, 2-1/2" high-rise pigtails and 3" ladder pipe hose) to be
tested annually using fire apparatus pumps. NOTE: All hard suction hoses shall be tested annually, during the annual
pump test, by the pump test engineer. New and repaired hose shall be tested as soon as possible after receipt by the
station.
A.Frequency - Hose shall be tested annually. Maximum period between tests shall be 12 months.
NOTE: When a section of hose appears to be in unreliable condition, it shall be tested as soon as practical.
B.Test Standards
1. Pressure
a. All rubber lined double jacketed hose, (except one inch), by-passes and soft suctions, single jacketed ladder
pipe hoses, all synthetic nitrile "all-rubber" hoses (2" high-rise hose, 2-1/2" high-rise pigtails and 3" ladder
pipe hose) and one-inch rubber reel hose (on 1978 Ford Patrol Tanker), shall be tested at 300 P.S.I.
b. One-inch double jacketed hose shall be tested at 400 P.S.I.
(Manop14) Page 5

6/11-25.96
A 8-90
-25. HOSE (Continued)
.96 HOSE TESTING: (Continued)
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
NOTE: The N.F.P.A. 1962 Standard (1987 Edition) for "Care, Use and Service Testing of Fire Hose", requires that all fire
hose manufactured after July 1, 1987, shall be stenciled "Service Test to P.S.I". This service test pressure is the
pressure at which the hose is rated for the annual testing of the hose by the Fire Station. Please note that the
pressure marked on the hose may be different than what is required per the Manual of Operation. In the event
that the pressures are different, the pressures stated in the Manual of Operation shall be followed.
2. Duration - five minutes at required pressure.
3. Length of line - 300 feet maximum at one outlet.
C.Procedure: A hose line bursting under pressure can be hazardous due to compressed air and/or pump volume. In order
to minimize the danger to members while testing hose, the following procedure will be followed:
1. Lay out hose from the pump outlet with no sharp kinks or bends. Attach shut off butt.
2. Bleed off air.
a. Open the shut-off and elevate above the level of the discharge gate.
b. Fill the hose with water, controlling the flow by feathering the pump discharge gate.
3. Gradually increase the pump pressure to the required test pressure. At the same time, control the flow at the
pump discharge gate. Limit the flow to the amount needed to assure some supply from the pump.
4. Close shut-off butt for the remainder of the test.
5. The pump operator shall remain on the alert at the control panel.
6. Inspect hose and coupling for leaks or failures of any kind during test.
7. Forward hose needing repair to Supply and Maintenance (refer to 6/11-25.94).
D. RECORDING:
1. Complete and forward F-129, Annual Hose Test Record.
2. Make journal entry of hose test.
.99 ISSUE OF REPLACEMENT HOSE: Station Commanders who determine hose is in need of replacement because of
excessive wear or because the ten year service life has been reached (refer to F-121, Hose Inventory Record) shall contact
the Equipment Engineering officer at Supply and Maintenance Division.
Page 6 (Manop14)

-50. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
6/11-50.01
A 11-92
.01 GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, equipment carried on apparatus is to be identified showing the type of
company and number. Company numbers are not to be cut or burned into wooden handles. Only hose straps, hose
couplings and spanners may be marked with metal stamps or punches by company members. Hose couplings shall be
marked by fire station and hose section number only. Each fire station will be issued a metal stamping number set. Any
marking showing previous company assignment shall be removed.
.17 HOSE: Fire station numbers and section numbers shall be stamped on the male couplings. Each section of each size
shall be sequentially numbered. Soft suctions shall be stamped on the stationary part of the female coupling.
A.Numbers shall be stamped near a lug to prevent wearing off. The numbers shall be stamped from left to right with the
threads on the left and hose on the right.
B.Stamp station number first then the section number. Separate the numbers by a blank space. One hundred series
stations will drop the one i.e., 02 43 (FS 102 Section 43). Fire Stations 6, 9, 66, 99, 89, 68, 98, and 86 are required to
underline the numbers.
.20 HOSE, STENCILING OF: All hose shall be identified by station number. This number shall be applied lengthwise on
the plain side of the hose and to the right of both the male and the female couplings. Apply the numbers from left to right
starting six inches from the coupling. Use 1-1/2" stencils and special paint supplied. Hose shall be rolled so that the
station number shows.
.25 HOSE, COLOR CODING: 3" "all-rubber" ladder pipe hose, 2-1/2" high-rise pigtails, 2" "allrubber" high-rise hose and
1-3/4" synthetic double jacketed hose are color coded. Also, yard hose shall be color coded by spray painting both couplings.
Care should be taken to protect threads and swivels.
A. 3" "all-rubber" ladder pipe hose is all "RED" in color.
B. 2-1/2" "all-rubber" high-rise pigtails are either all "BLUE" or "RED" in color.
C. 2" "all-rubber" high-rise hose is all "BLUE" in color.
D. 1-3/4" synthetic double jacketed hose is all "YELLOW" in color.
E.Yard hose couplings shall be sprayed "RED". This hose shall not be used for fire fighting.
F.Couplings of hose assigned to reserve apparatus shall be sprayed yellow. This hose is exclusively for the reserve
apparatus and should be stored separately.
G.Couplings should be resprayed yearly or as necessary.
H.The practice of spraying paint on couplings to indicate sections tested shall be discontinued. Only the
above-mentioned couplings shall have paint applied as designated above.
(Manop14) Page 6A

6/11-50.30
A 11-92
-50. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
.30 HOSE TOWERS: All hose hung in hose towers shall be removed and rolled weekly, if dry. Hose should not be left on
outside hose towers longer than needed to dry. Hose shall be stored inside, out of the sun.
.34 NOZZLES: These items shall have the company designation painted on the inside. This designation may also be
applied on the outside.
.51 HOSE ADAPTORS: Companies carrying fire hose adapters having both National Standard Thread (NST) and Pacific
Coast Thread (PCT) shall identify them with yellow paint on the unthreaded portion of the adapter.
.68 SALVAGE COVERS: Assigned salvage covers shall be identified with the station number in the corners.
.85 IDENTIFICATION OF APPARATUS: Refer to 7/1-84.00.
-60. MEDICAL SUPPLY CACHE
.01 GENERAL: Medical supply caches are in selected fire stations, Supply and Maintenance Division and Disaster
Preparedness Section. They are designed for rapid deployment of emergency medical supplies to a multiple-casualty
incident, major catastrophe, or anytime an Incident Commander determines their contents are needed.
A cache consists of six ABS plastic boxes, 12 wooden backboards, and a full complement of dressings and bandaging
materials. The cache weighs approximately 300 pounds. Each cache is designed to provide basic first aid and EMT level
treatment for 25 to 50 patients.
Page 6B (Manop14)

-60. MEDICAL SUPPLY CACHE
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
6/11-60.01
A 11-92
.01 GENERAL (Continued): Responsible officers shall place the assigned caches in a secure area protecting them from
damage. Caches are not to be opened except during the annual check or for shipment to, or use at an emergency.
Responsible officers shall contact Operations Control Dispatch Section immediately whenever the cache is:
a.Unavailable (used at emergency, spoiled, reassigned, etc.)
b.Restocked to Department specifications.
.15 INSPECTION: Captain/Paramedics shall be responsible for checking the caches in their district, yearly, during the
month of January. Captain/Paramedics shall check the caches for spoilage and outdated items. The caches shall be
resecured when the cache is operational. Any depleted supplies shall be ordered through Supply and Maintenance
Division.
At the conclusion of the inspection, a letterhead report shall be forwarded outlining the results.
F-225
Forward: Annually
To: Commander, Bureau of Emergency Medical Services Through Channels
Number of Copies: One
Routing: - -
Information Required:
1. Date of the Inspection
2. Number of caches inspected
3. Overall condition of the caches
(Manop14) Page 6C

-75. RADIOLOGICAL INSTRUMENTS - LAFD
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
.01 GENERAL: The radiological monitoring kit (CDV-777) contains the following instruments:
Dosimeter (CDV-740) (CDV-742)
Dosimeter Charger (CDV-750)
Low Range Survey Meter (CDV-700)
High Range Survey Meter (CDV-715) (CDV-720)
NOTE: For additional information on radiological instruments, refer to Vol. 3, 6/2-01.01, Page 22.
6/11-75.01
A 8-90
These instruments (except the dosimeters) are powered by dry cell batteries. These instruments are to be checked
monthly by using the procedures established in this section. At the completion of each check, proper entries are to be
made on Form F-973 (Equipment Check Record).
Batteries shall be visually inspected each month, and the contacts cleaned of any dirt or corrosion. Instruments shall not
be stored with the batteries installed.
.20 DOSIMETER OPERATIONAL CHECK:
CDV-740 - Brown
CDV-742 - Yellow
A.Place the recessed end of the dosimeter over the charging contact of the charger.
B.Depress the dosimeter and look into the eyepiece.
C.Slowly rotate the adjustment knob of the charger and observe the hairline in the dosimeter. It should be possible to
move the hairline from zero to the top of the scale. Reset the hairline to zero.
D.Hold the dosimeter up to the light and check to see that the hairline remains at zero.
E.Read the dosimeters:
1. CDV-740 after 24 hours to determine that the hairline remains within 2% of full scale (2 roentgens).
2. CDV-742 after 4 hours to determine that the hairline remains within 5% of full scale (10 roentgens).
.30 DOSIMETER CHARGER OPERATIONAL CHECK:
CDV-750
A.Zeroing -
1. Turn the range selector switch to the zero position and allow a 2 minute warm-up.
2. Zero the needle with the zero control.
B.Needle Obstruction -
1. Turn the zero control to move the needle from zero slowly up-scale.
2. If the needle will not respond, send the charger in for repair.
(Manop14) Page 7

6/11-75.40
A 8-90
-75. RADIOLOGICAL INSTRUMENTS - LAFD
.40 LOW RANGE SURVEY METER OPERATIONAL CHECK:
CDV-700
A.The selector switch should be turned to the X10 range.
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
B.Open beta shield on the probe and place probe as close as possible to the radioactive sample located on the side of
instrument.
C.The meter should read between 0.5 and 2.0 MR/HR.
1. If the reading is not within the limits, the batteries should be replaced.
2. If new batteries do not bring the reading in the proper range, send the instrument in for repair.
.60 HIGH RANGE SURVEY METER OPERATIONAL CHECK:
CDV-715, CDV-720
A.Turn the selector switch to zero position, wait two minutes to warm up and adjust control to make the meter read zero.
B.Turn the selector switch to the circuit check position. The meter should read within the red band marked "Circuit
Check".
C.Turn the selector switch to the X100 X10 X1 and X0.1 range. The reading should be no more than two scale divisions
up scale.
D.If the instrument reading is low, insert new batteries and repeat the check. A low reading with new batteries, or an off
scale high reading when not in a radiation field, indicates need for repair.
.80 REPAIRS: For repair procedures regarding radiological instruments, refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-68.40.
.90 INVENTORY: Refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-68.60 (Inventory).
Page 8 (Manop14)

-80. EMERGENCY WIRING SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
6/11-80.01
A 4-90
.01 GENERAL: Emergency wiring systems in selected fire stations are designed to provide electrical service to designated
circuits in the event of a power failure.
Emergency power is supplied from a trailer-mounted generator. The proper (single or three phase) generator can be
obtained through Operations Control Dispatch.
.15 TESTING: Station Commanders of stations equipped with emergency wiring systems shall arrange for the system
to be tested yearly during the month of January. Prior to conducting the Annual Emergency Wiring Systems Test (Vol.
3, 6/11-80.01) Station Commanders are to ensure that all surge sensitive equipment such as computers, modems and
rescue ambulance charging circuits have been turned off and unplugged. This equipment is to remain unplugged until
such time as the station has re-established service with the normal power utility.
At the conclusion of the test, a letterhead report shall be forwarded outlining the results.
F-225
Forward:Annually
To: Bureau Commander, through channels
Number of Copies: One
Routing: ----
Information Required:
1. Date of the test.
2. A statement that all three platoons participated in the test.
3. Operational condition of the system.
(Manop14) Page 9

6/11-87.01
A 4-90
-87. HELICOPTER - USE OF
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
.01 LANDING SITE: When helicopters are used and a temporary landing site is necessary, it shall be selected as follows:
A.Selecting the site:
1. For reconnaissance, etc., select a site near the command post but not so close as to interfere with command post
activities.
2. For water fills, select a site remote from the command post.
B.The minimum diameters of the sites are to be 100 feet for the larger helicopters (H-1, H-2, H-3, H-4) and 60 feet for the
smaller helicopters (H-5, H-6).
C.The site shall be free of obstructions, i.e., power poles, light poles, etc.
D.The landing and take off angle, if possible, should not be greater than 25 degrees.
.33 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:
A. 1. Remain at least 100 feet from helicopter unless otherwise assigned.
2. Remain clear of landing site during landing and take off.
3. Before approaching helicopters that are running, secure eye contact with the pilot for approval or obtain
approval from heli-tac personnel and be guided by their instructions.
4. Approach and/or leave helicopters from the front, in full view of the pilot. Stay away from the tail rotor. Keep
head low until out of rotor arc. Never depart or approach helicopters from the uphill side.
5. Carry long-handled tools horizontally when approaching or leaving helicopter.
6. Metal bound cadastral maps shall not be used in the front seat. If it is necessary to use the complete map book,
the following options are available:
B.Embarking
a. The member should sit in a rear seat.
b. The necessary map pages should be removed and the metal binder placed in the rear seat.
1. Enter cockpit head and shoulder first.
2. Secure safety belt.
3. Hold loose items (maps, papers, etc.) securely.
4. Fire helmets and turnout coats, if taken aboard, shall be held in lap or secured in a manner that will not interfere
with the operation of the aircraft or other personnel aboard.
5. Don radio headset, if provided, so that communication with the pilot may be maintained.
Page 10 (Manop14)

6/11-87.33
A 3-79
-87. HELICOPTER - USE OF
.33 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: (Continued)
C. Personnel-In Flight:
1. Smoking is prohibited during take-off and
landing.
2. Keep clear of all controls.
3. Be alert for hazards such as other aircraft,
wires pole etc., And notify the pilot of their
presence
D. Disembarking
Page 11
1. Do not release safety belt or start to leave the
helicopter until it has settled down and the
pilot has given his approval.
2. Unload tools, equipment
3. Leave cockpit head and shoulders first.
YES
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
O. K. NO
ALL CLEAR
.66 HELICOPTER SIGNALS:
The following helicopter signals are to be used when
needed by members duping helicopter operation's to
insure clear. Communications between ground
personnel and occupants of helicopters.

6/11-87.66
A 3-79
-87. HELICOPTER - USE OF
.66 HELICOPTER SIGNALS: (Continued)
LAND HERE
Ready to assume guidance of aircraft by
extending both arms at full length above
head. Palms facing each other, stand with back to
wind.
Page 12
MOVE TO YOUR LEFT
Right arm extended sideways. Continuous
swinging of left arm in front of body indicates
direction of movement.
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
NOTE: A red, ground-crew safety helmet shall be worn when available.
(Helmets are generally carried aboard the helicopter and helitender)
HOVER
Arms extended sideways.
MOVE TO YOUR RIGHT
Left arm extended sideways. Continuous
swinging of right arm in front of body
indicates direction of movement.

6/11-87.66
A 3-79
-87. HELICOPTER - USE OF
.66 HELICOPTER SIGNALS: (Continued)
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
NOTE: A red, ground-crew safety helmet shall be worn when available.
(Helmets are generally carried aboard the helicopter and helitender)
Page 13
MOVE UPWARD
Arms extended horizontally, to the side
beckoning upward, with palms turned up. Speed
0f movement indicates rate of ascent.
COME AHEAD
Both hands raised to eye level, with elbows
flexed and palms turned toward face, and
executing beckoning motions. The rapidity of
hand motions will indicate the speed desired.
MOVE DOWNWARD
Arms extended horizontally, to the side,
beckoning downward with palms turned down.
Speed of movement indicates rate of descent.
HOLD OR STOP
Arms held steady, extended forward and
upward with fists tightly clenched.

6/11-87.66
A 3-79
-87. HELICOPTER - USE OF
.66 HELICOPTER SIGNALS: (Continued)
EQUIPMENT/GENERAL
NOTE: A red, ground-crew safety helmet shall be worn when available.
(Helmets are generally carried aboard the helicopter and helitender)
Page 14
MOVE BACKWARD
Horizontal movement of hands away from
body, palms out.
WAVE OFF
Raise both arms above the head, palms
turned toward the aircraft and move the
arms from side to side, crossing above
RELEASESLING LOAD OR CUT ENGINES
Forearm and hand horizontal to the ground
with hand across throat.
TAKEOFF
Pointing in direction of takeoff
means the helicopter is ready for
take

-01. GENERAL
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-01.01
A 03-01
.01 REQUIRED KNOWLEDGE: Members whose duties may require them to operate and maintain engine and
truck apparatus shall possess a working knowledge of driving, pumping, and aerial ladder operation for all such
apparatus. In addition, members shall be completely familiar with the operation of the apparatus assigned to their
station. This includes limitations, restrictions, operating procedures and proper maintenance.
Department publications (i.e., Apparatus Operator's Training Manual, pertinent log books, etc.) shall be referred
to for the proper operation and maintenance of apparatus.
.12 REQUIRED KNOWLEDGE - HYDRAULICS: All members shall have a thorough knowledge of the methods
used to produce effective fire streams (refer to lessons 9 through 12 in the Apparatus Operator's Training Manual).
.24 OFFICIAL BUSINESS: Department apparatus is to be used only for official business of the Department.
Visitors will be permitted to ride on Department apparatus only when the proper approval is obtained (refer to Vol.
5, 9/7-00.00 Visitor Waiver, F-1109).
.36 REQUIRED KNOWLEDGE - DRIVING:
A. Firefighters shall complete a Driver's Training Program consisting of a written exam administered by the
Division Driver Training Coordinator covering modules 1 through 8 in the Driver's Training Manual, and Chapters
3, 4 and 22 of the A.O.T.M. prior to advancement to Firefighter III.
B. Prior to any member operating Department apparatus non-emergency or for training purposes, the concerned
Company Commander shall ensure that:
1. Member has received the required training as specified in paragraph A.
2. Member holds a valid driver's license or learner's permit for the class of apparatus member is to operate.
3. A certified driver shall accompany non-certified members driving or practicing with any heavy apparatus.
4. Apparatus will be operated in proximity to the location where the apparatus is currently housed.
5. Members are in proper uniform and wearing Department-approved safety equipment.
C. Prior to any member operating an aerial ladder truck or triple combination engine during an emergency
without supervision, the Company Commander shall ensure that the member has completed the
Certification Program for Aerial and/or Pumping Operations in the Drivers Training Manual, Book 8, Section
3.
D. Apparatus traveling either emergency or non-emergency shall be operated with due caution, with particular
emphasis placed on defensive driving. Any time apparatus or quarters are changed, station commanders
shall cause a careful check to be made of height, length, width and angles of entry and departure for
clearance and safety. Special attention shall be paid to parking markers which shall be moved as needed
to fit newly assigned apparatus.
.40 TRACTOR TRANSPORTS: Surface streets shall be used by tractor transports carrying D-7 dozers when they
are operating non-emergency.
The Equipment Engineering Unit will obtain the necessary permits from the City and County of Los Angeles
allowing the tractor transports with D-7 dozers aboard to legally operate non-emergency on surface streets.
(Manop14) Page 1

7/1-01.42
A 03-01
-01. GENERAL (Continued)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
.42 OFF-STREET PARKING: If it becomes necessary to use off-street parking facilities for heavy duty apparatus during
non-emergency operations, concerned members shall give consideration to the following: The condition of the paving on
the lot, congestion within the lot, sufficient room for safe maneuvering of apparatus, and any inconvenience caused to the
public.
Members using off-street parking facilities with any Department vehicle shall park only in areas designated for public parking,
avoid parking in a cramped or misaligned slot, and use good defensive driving tactics while maneuvering within parking lots.
.44 PARKING AT FIRE DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE SERVICE/SUPPORT ORGANIZATIONS: Members shall not use Department
emergency apparatus for visits or business at Fire Department employee service/support organization offices or facilities.
Emergency apparatus includes heavy apparatus, rescue ambulances, and light vehicles equipped with “emergency light bars”.
In all cases, members utilizing Department non-emergency vehicles, shall operate and park them in accordance with
Department procedures and motor vehicle laws.
.48 SAFETY BELTS: Seat belts shall be used by drivers and passengers during ALL driving operations.
.54 SAFETY STRAPS: Safety straps shall be used by personnel riding on apparatus tailboards.
.60 APPARATUS OFF-DUTY: Station Commanders shall not allow apparatus to be taken off duty without first receiving
permission from their Battalion Commander and OCD. Apparatus is not considered off duty under conditions where response
could be made without a delay of more than 60 seconds.
.72 LOGBOOKS: Operational and/or Service logbooks, where furnished for apparatus, shall be maintained according to
instructions set forth in the logbook. Service records for apparatus not provided with logbooks shall be maintained in accordance
with the system in effect at their places of assignment. An accurate, complete and up-to-date record of tires,
lubrication, inventory, battery condition, mechanical work done and all other pertinent information concerning the history
of the apparatus shall be maintained in the Service logbook.
Changes made to apparatus which cause information in the logbook to become obsolete or in error shall be reported
promptly. Officers concerned shall immediately notify Supply and Maintenance Division, Bureau of Support Services, using
the Form F-225.
F-225
Forward: As indicated
To: Supply & Maintenance Division, Bureau of Support Services
Number of Copies: One
Routing:Forward to the Supply & Maintenance Division, Bureau of Support Services
Information Required: A factual statement of the circumstances that caused the logbook instructions or information to
become obsolete.
Completed logbook record sheets which are not necessary to retain as part of apparatus history will be discarded.
.84 LOGBOOKS - WHERE CARRIED: Logbooks will not be carried on apparatus, but will be kept in quarters at a place
designated by the Station Commander.
EXCEPTION: Logbooks shall accompany apparatus when assigned to relief duty, when going to the Shops for annual pump
or ladder test, or when transferred.
.90 LOGBOOKS - LOST: Station Commanders shall request replacement of lost logbooks by submitting an F-225.
F-225 Forward: As indicated
To: Bureau Commander, through channels
Number of Copies: Two
Routing:Bureau Commander to Supply and Maintenance Division, duplicate returned to point of origin.
Information Required: The circumstances surrounding the loss, the make, year and type of apparatus covered.
Page 2 (Manop14)

7/1-12.01
A 12-87
-12. ACCIDENT
.01 ACCIDENT PROCEDURE PACKET - F-620
APPARATUS/GENERAL
An F-620 packet shall be carried on Department apparatus at all times. Each fire station will have two extra packets. A
member using a privately owned vehicle in a manner which may be considered as Department business shall carry one
of the extra packets.
.14 ACCIDENT PROCEDURE- Reports are required whether apparatus is damaged or not.
TYPE OF ACCIDENT REPORTS REQUIRED REPORTS INITIATED BY
a. Department apparatus or personal car 1. Form Gen. 68 (fill
1. Driver
used on Department business
out completely at scene)
b.
Involved with civilian car, domestic
animal, or property, of a third party; or;
Department apparatus involved with
Fire Department property and with
injuries to personnel.
2.
3.
Form Gen. 84B
F-150
2.
3.
Civilian-Witness (License
number, if name not
available)
Investigating Officer
a. Department apparatus involved
with Fire Department property and
no injuries to personnel, or
b. Department apparatus or personal
1 car used on Department business
involved with a non-domestic
4. F-80 (See E below) 4. Station Commander
1. F-225 (Bureau Cmdr.) 1. Driver
2. F-225 (Bureau Cmdr.) 2. Commanding Officer
if at scene of accident
3. F-150 3. Investigating Officer.
animal. 4. F-80 (See E below) 4. Station Commander
A. CALL O. C. D. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING
1. Exact location of accident.
2. Shop number, type and assignment of apparatus.
3. Number of injured no matter how slight. If injury is serious or fatal, call on land line
only. Give names and assignments of injured Department personnel (refer to Vol. 2,
4/6-80.84).
4. Amount of damage.
5. Type of assistance needed.
6. Request Commanding Officer to be notified.
7. Request Fire Department investigating officer.
8. Request Police traffic investigation for all third party accidents.
(6203R) Page 3

7/1-12.14
A 12-87
-12. ACCIDENTS
.14 ACCIDENT PROCEDURE PACKET - F-620: (Continued)
B.MOVING APPARATUS INVOLVED:
APPARATUS/GENERAL
1. Members shall use good judgement in moving vehicles prior to the arrival of the investigators.
Normally apparatus will not be moved until pictures have been taken by Police investigating
officers.
2. If an accident occurs during an emergency response and members and apparatus are in a safe
condition to proceed, response may be continued. Leave member to obtain necessary information
and to give assistance. Advise O.C.D. of your action.
C.Obtain data for reports (refer to F-620 Accident Procedure Packet).
D.ASSIST INVESTIGATORS:
1. Cooperate fully with Fire, Police or City Attorney investigators.
2. Make no statements either written or verbal to anyone except authorized investigators.
3. Necessary photographs of the accident will be taken by police officers dispatched to the scene.
The Fire Department investigating officer may, in unusual circumstances, request a Fire
Department photographer to respond if additional photographs of the accident would be
beneficial for Department training, planning, etc.
4. If the other parties involved in the accident refuse to remain at the scene after being requested to
await the arrival of responding investigators, obtain as much information as possible, but do not
threaten nor attempt to forcefully restrain them.
E.In all cases, where Fire Department apparatus is damaged, a requisition must be forwarded with other
required reports (refer to Volume 4, 8/3-40.45).
F.Form F-225 will be used for any accident involving a Department vehicle with Fire Department Property,
provided there are no injuries to Department personnel. It is also to be used in cases involving injuries
or death to non-domestic animals.
Page 4
F-225
Forward:As indicated
To: Bureau Commander, Concerned Bureau
Number of Copies: One
Routing: Concerned Bureau to Bureau of Fire Suppression and Rescue for investigation then to
Personnel Services Section.
Information Required:
A factual statement of the circumstances of the accident. If a police investigation was
made, include names, units, and police report numbers.

-12. ACCIDENTS (Continued)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-12.72
A 7-87
.72 TESTING EQUIPMENT AFTER ACCIDENTS: Apparatus damaged in an accident, other than body or fenders, shall
be placed temporarily off-duty pending a thorough examination of any working parts which may have been involved.
This examination shall be made by the Company Commander or a Chief Officer. When possible, apparatus may be moved
to a more convenient location for this examination.
If a Department vehicle is involved in an accident with a third party, the Chief Officer will, depending upon the extent of
the damage, take one of the following courses of action:
A.If vehicle remains operable and does not jeopardize the safety of members involved with its use, vehicle will be returned
to its quarters and the Supply and Maintenance Division will be notified. The Supply and Maintenance Division shall
send a representative to make a cost estimate of the damage.
B.If, however, the vehicle is damaged to the extent that it may jeopardize the safety of the members involved, it will be
driven or towed to the Supply and Maintenance Division for cost estimate and repairs.
.96 DEPARTMENT OF MOTOR VEHICLES NOTICE (SR-1C): Members who are involved in a traffic accident while driving
in the course and scope of their employment and who receive communications from the Department of Motor Vehicles
regarding that accident (Form SR-1C) shall not complete or sign any form or response.
Any forms or correspondence from the D.M.V. shall be sent through channels, to the Adjutant, Bureau of Fire Suppression
and Rescue, for forwarding to the office of the City Attorney. The member shall not take any further action unless/until
contacted by the Fire Suppression Adjutant or the City Attorney.
(Manop14) Page 5

7/1-24.01
A 7-87
-24. EQUIPMENT ON APPARATUS
APPARATUS/GENERAL
.01 GENERAL: Members shall not change or alter the arrangements of firefighting equipment on apparatus, nor
otherwise rearrange the system in effect without approval of the Chief Engineer.
.12 DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Defects in equipment shall be reported immediately by all members concerned to their
immediate superior.
Repair or replacement of equipment shall be made in accordance with procedures in Vol. 4, 8/3-00.00, Services &
Supplies/Services.
.24 PRIVATE USE OF EQUIPMENT:
Department tools and equipment, i.e., rectifiers, hydraulic hoists, air compressors, etc., shall be used for Departmental
purposes only.
.36 MARKING EQUIPMENT: Refer to Vol. 3, 6/11-50.00, Equipment/General.
.48 INVENTORY OF EQUIPMENT ON
APPARATUS: Refer to Vol. 4, 8/8-55.40.
.60 REQUIRED OPERATIONAL CHECKS:
The following equipment shall be checked as required. The result of such checks shall be recorded on the F-973,
Apparatus and Equipment Check Record.
A.PORTABLE RADIOS: Portable radios shall be checked in accordance with instructions set forth in Vol. 2, 4/7-90.60,
Routine Operations/ Communications.
B.PORTABLE GASOLINE ENGINES: All portable gasoline engines shall be started and run until heated at least once each
week. Detailed instructions for checking most equipment having gasoline engines can be found in the apparatus
log book of the apparatus to which the equipment is assigned.
C.DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHERS: Dry chemical extinguishers shall be maintained and serviced as set forth in Vol. 3,
6/11-01.90, Equipment/General.
D.CO 2 EXTINGUISHERS:
CO 2 extinguishers carried on apparatus shall be checked in accordance with instructions in Vol. 3, 6/2-03.00, Tools
and Equipment. The weight will be entered in the appropriate column of the F-973.
E.COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS:
Combustible gas indicators shall be checked monthly in accordance with operating instructions.
F.RADIOLOGICAL INSTRUMENTS:
Radiological instruments shall be checked monthly in accordance with instructions in Vol. 3, 6/11-75.00,
Equipment/General.
G.RUBBER GAUNTLET GLOVES: Rubber gauntlet gloves shall be fieldtested after each use and weekly, as part of the
Monday checks as set forth in Vol. 3, 6/2-01.52. In addition, every 60 days gloves are to be tested with 10,000 volts
of electricity by the Department of Water and Power.
Page 6 (Manop14)

-24. EQUIPMENT ON APPARATUS (Con't)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-24.72
A 5-96
72. TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIALS: Any member who transports material or equipment in a Department vehicle
will be held responsible for the safety of the vehicle and the items being transported. Items being transported shall be
tied or otherwise secured to prevent damage to materials, equipment or vehicle.
.80 MOVING APPARATUS - DISLODGED ITEMS: Whenever an equipment item is dislodged or dropped from moving
apparatus, members shall at that time cause the officer or member in charge to be notified of the loss. The officer or
member in charge will consider the urgency of the situation and the significance of the lost item and, if possible, stop and
retrieve the item.
.84 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For additional information regarding equipment, refer to Vol. 3, 6/2-00.00, Tools and
Equipment.
-36. DRIVER TRAINING
.01 DEPARTMENT DRIVER'S TRAINING
SPECIALIST: One Captain assigned to the In-Service Training Section shall be designated as the Department Driver's
Training Specialist. Duties will be to advise and support the designated Department Driver's Training instructors. The
In-Service Training Section Engineer and Apparatus Operator shall assist with development and implementation of
training programs for the safe operation and driving of Department apparatus.
.20 DEPARTMENT DRIVING INSTRUCTORS: The following persons shall be designated Driving Instructors:
A.One Captain from each Division on each Platoon.
B.One Captain from each Battalion on each platoon to coordinate Driver's Training sessions with the Division Driver
Training Coordinator on the same platoon.
C.One Captain from the Bureau of Fire Prevention.
D.One member from the In-Service Training Section to be responsible for the Bureau of Support Services and the Bureau
of Administrative Services.
E.One Tractor Operator from the Bureau of Fire Suppression and Rescue on each platoon to be responsible for Class "A"
driver training and examination.
.30 DIVISION DRIVER TRAINING COORDINATOR: Division Driver Training Coordinators shall:
A.Administer and coordinate the Driver's Training Program for their respective Division.
(Manop14) Page 7

7/1-36.30
A 5-96
-36. DRIVER TRAINING
.30 DIVISION DRIVER TRAINING COORDINATOR: (Con't)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
B.Coordinate the evaluation and testing of new members for Class B licenses and recommend initial issuance of Class A licenses to
the Commander, Bureau of Fire Suppression and Rescue, with the assistance of the Battalion Driver Training Instructor.
C.Evaluate and make recommendations to member's Company Commander for remedial Driver's Training.
.36 BATTALION DRIVER TRAINING INSTRUCTOR: The Battalion Driver Training Instructor shall:
A.Implement the Department Driver Training Program within their respective battalion and perform duties as specified in the Driver's
Training Manual.
B.Train members in their respective battalion at least once each year.
C.Administer driving exams for the issuance of Class "B" licenses and Passenger Transport Endorsements.
.38 CLASS "'A" DRIVER TRAINING INSTRUCTOR: The Tractor Operators assigned as Driver Training Instructors shall:
A.Implement the Department Driver Training Program as it relates to Class "A" vehicles.
B.Train approved members in the operation of Class "A" vehicles.
C.Administer driving exams for the issuance of Class "A" licenses at the direction of the Commander, Bureau of Fire Suppression and
Rescue.
.40 STATION COMMANDERS: Station Commanders shall conduct training sessions for the purpose of maintaining proficiency of
members under their command in:
A.Safe Driving practices. As needed, ask for assistance from the Battalion Driver Training Instructor, Division Driver Training
Coordinator or the Department Driver Training Specialist and provide opportunity for behind-the-wheel practice and instruction.
B.Safe aerial or pumping operations. Certification of members to perform aerial ladder or pumping operation shall be done in
accordance with 7/1-01.36 C.
.50 DRIVER REACTION APTITUDE TESTING: The In-Service Training Section, upon request of supervisors, will schedule driver
reaction, aptitude and visual defects testing. The Driver Training Specialist is also available to assist in driver training research and
in the development of specialized programs for driver training instruction.
.60 APPARATUS TILLER TRAINING: When a member is learning to tiller, a minimum of three training sessions shall be held with
the trainee placed in an observer position behind a Firefighter certified to tiller. This will enable the trainee to get more of a feel of
what is expected of the Tiller position before being actually placed in the position of tillering the aerial.
It shall be the Captain's responsibility to personally ascertain the readiness of a member to progress in the learning phase of driving
and tillering in traffic situations.
When the Captain determines the member is ready to tiller after at least three observer rides, the Captain shall ensure that a
Firefighter certified to tiller is in the position of observer.
While in the observer position, the member shall be secured to the truck by means of a safety belt.
New members are naturally under greater pressure to do well than a Firefighter who is off probation. This "extra" pressure and the
member's ability to handle it shall be taken into consideration before a probationary Firefighter is allowed to tiller.
Page 8 (Manop14)

-36. DRIVER TRAINING (Cont.)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-36.70
A 3-93
.70 OFF-DUTY PRACTICING ON RESERVE HEAVY APPARATUS: Any member who desires to make use of the
Department's fleet of reserve apparatus for training purposes, while off-duty, must be under the direct supervision of a
volunteer member certified on the requested apparatus. Members having held or currently holding the rank of Apparatus
Operator or Engineer are deemed to be certified to drive all heavy apparatus. Requesting members shall:
1.Schedule practice sessions with the concerned Station Commander.
2.Be thoroughly familiar with F-620 Accident Packet, Apparatus Log Book, and apparatus procedures as stated in the
Manual of Operation and the Apparatus Operator's Training Manual.
3.Perform appropriate preventative maintenance checks before and after each session.
4.Be responsible for proper cleaning of apparatus upon completion of each session.
5.Be wearing the work uniform and have full protective gear in their possession.
Station Commanders will have the authority to grant or deny requests according to criteria developed between all shifts
with the first consideration being the safety of personnel and apparatus. The second consideration will be providing
equal opportunity for all members. Station Commanders shall:
1.Journalize the name, assignment and certification of the volunteer member and the name and assignment of the
members practicing.
2.Ensure that a certified tillerman is utilized when operating aerial ladder trucks.
3.Ensure that any member receiving permission to operate a vehicle can do so in a safe manner.
Each training session shall be limited to one hour per member and confined to the first alarm district of the Station where
the apparatus is housed.
(Manop14) Page 8A

7/1-48.01
A 3-93
-48. MAINTENANCE OF APPARATUS
APPARATUS/GENERAL
.01 DEFECTIVE APPARATUS: Defects in apparatus will be promptly reported by all members concerned. If the defect
has not been remedied by the time of platoon change, the Station Commander concerned shall make a written
memorandum concerning the defect and hand it to the oncoming Station Commander, supplemented by any verbal
instructions necessary.
.06 REPAIRS: Care and operation of apparatus shall be in accordance with Department manuals, log books and
instructions received from the Supply and Maintenance Division. No other repairs, adjustments or alterations shall be
made by company members without authorization from the Supply and Maintenance Division. For repairs, alteration,
maintenance, or additional information, refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-00.00, Service and Supplies/ Services.
.13 PAINT: Painting of engines, pumps, under frame and running gear of apparatus with the use of commercial spray
equipment shall not be done at the fire station. Spot painting with aerosol cans is permitted at the fire station.
.16 ENGINE HEATERS: Engine Heaters of apparatus so equipped shall be operated at all times in quarters and in service.
.19 ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED: Members shall not apply paint to any part of the apparatus or tools, if such painting
might hinder their operation.
Examples:
A. Magnetos or parts of magnetos
B. Distributors
C. High tension wires
D. Spark plugs
E. Timing marks on flywheels
F. Adjustment threads on brake rods
G. Brake cables and yokes
H. Clutch linkage and adjustment nuts
I. Carburetors
J. Radiator Hose
K. Bright Work
L.Working parts of governors and relief valves, and any linkage thereof.
.26 CLEANING APPARATUS: Cleaning of apparatus under carriage, running gear, and engines.
Responsible members are encouraged to clean the underside of apparatus with a "hands on" approach. The use of red
rags and Department approved cleaners allows for additional preventive maintenance to be performed as the cleaning
takes place.
High pressure (hot water) sprayers may be used as long as pressure is adjusted to preclude any damage or paint removal.
Members should be reminded that the use of high pressure washers can remove lubrication from critical areas of the
undercarriage such as steering gear, king pins and drive line. In all cases, when high pressure washers are used, the
affected components shall be properly lubed no later than the next day.
Steam Cleaners
The use of industrial steam cleaners by station personnel is prohibited. The only steam cleaning allowed will be done at
Supply and Maintenance by Supply and Maintenance personnel.
Inspection
Chief Officers are encouraged to schedule monthly inspections prior to the 15th of the month.
Page 8B (Manop14)

-48. MAINTENANCE OF APPARATUS
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-48.32
A 12-99
.32 APPARATUS PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE: Station Commanders shall ensure that sufficient time is allotted on
a routine basis for the proper care and maintenance of apparatus.
Station Commanders of stations housing reserve apparatus shall develop a schedule of apparatus preventative
maintenance and lubrication and shall forward to Battalion for approval. Once approved, the schedule shall be posted
as an element of the station's apparatus maintenance schedule and included in the Apparatus Log Book.
All preventative maintenance and lubrication shall be accomplished during the first two weeks of the appropriate month.
F-377's and F-377RA's shall arrive in the Battalion Office no later than the day prior to battalion inspection, or the 15th
of the month, whichever comes first. The Battalion Commander shall initial the F-377/ F-377RA and shall return it to the
station on the day of inspection for inclusion in the log book.
A. Front-Line Emergency Heavy Apparatus
Heavy Apparatus have an engine displacement of 465 cubic inches and greater.
Lubrication and F-377 Preventative Maintenance
Heavy Apparatus shall be lubricated based on the company's annual mileage, not the apparatus' annual mileage.
If the company travels more than 12,000 miles annually, the apparatus currently in use shall be lubricated monthly
during the first two weeks of the month. Companies that travel less than 12,000 miles annually shall be lubricated
once every two months on the even months.
An F-377 shall be completed bi-monthly on even months during the first two weeks of the appropriate month and
shall arrive in the Battalion Office no later than the day prior to Battalion inspection or the 15th of the month,
whichever comes first. The F-377 shall be returned by the Battalion Commander at inspection for inclusion in the
apparatus log book.
Oil Change
Heavy Apparatus shall have the oil changed every 4,000 apparatus miles.
Oil Filter
The oil filter shall be changed annually by Supply and Maintenance during the Annual Pump or Aerial Ladder Test.
Aerial Ladders
Aerial ladders and related components shall be lubricated a minimum of every two months or sooner if needed due
to high use, i.e., high activity, training, apparatus operator practicals, etc. One of the lubrications may be in
preparation for the Annual Ladder Test. Battalion Commanders shall be notified on the shift before the ladder is to
be lubricated so that it may be inspected during the lubrication process.
Manop14 Page 8C

-48. MAINTENANCE OF APPARATUS
.32 APPARATUS PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE:
APPARATUS/GENERAL
B. Front-Line Emergency Light Apparatus
Emergency Light Apparatus have an engine displacement of less than 465 cubic inches.
7/1-48.32
A 12-99
Lubrication and F-377 Preventative Maintenance
Emergency Light Apparatus shall be lubricated based on the company's annual mileage, not the apparatus' annual
mileage. If the company travels more than 12,000 miles annually, the apparatus currently in use shall be lubricated
monthly during the first two weeks of the month. Companies that travel less than 12,000 miles annually shall be
lubricated once every two months during the first two weeks of the month on odd months.
An F-377 shall be completed on front-line Emergency Light Apparatus bi-monthly on odd months during the first
two weeks of the appropriate month and shall arrive in the Battalion Office no later than the day prior to Battalion
inspection or the 15th of the month, whichever comes first. The F-377 shall be returned by the Battalion
Commander at inspection for inclusion in the apparatus log book.
F-377RA
An F-377RA shall be completed monthly on all rescue ambulances, both front-line and reserve, during the first two
weeks of each month. The F-377RA shall be forwarded to the appropriate Battalion Commander and arrive in the
Battalion Office no later than the day prior to Battalion inspection or the 15th of the month, whichever comes first.
Oil and Filter
The oil and filter on Emergency Light Apparatus shall be changed every 4,000 apparatus miles.
C. Reserve Apparatus and Non-Emergency Light Apparatus
Station commanders of stations housing reserve apparatus and non-emergency light apparatus, i.e., plug buggy,
etc., shall develop a schedule of reserve apparatus preventative maintenance and lubrication and forward to the
Battalion Commander for approval. Approved copies shall be posted as an element of the station's apparatus
maintenance schedule, one copy filed at Battalion, and one copy filed in the apparatus log book. At no time shall
apparatus preventative maintenance (F-377) or lubrication exceed four months except with the approval of the
Battalion Commander.
ANYTIME A RESERVE APPARATUS IS PLACED IN RELIEF, IT SHALL BE MAINTAINED AND LUBRICATED
ACCORDING TO THE SCHEDULE OF THE FRONT-LINE APPARATUS IT REPLACED.
Lubrication
Both Reserve Heavy and Reserve Light Apparatus shall be lubricated every four months.
Oil Change
Reserve Heavy and Reserve Light Apparatus shall have the oil changed every 4,000 miles or 6 months.
Oil Filter
Reserve Heavy Apparatus shall have the filter changed annually at the Pump/Aerial Test.
Reserve Light Apparatus shall have the filter changed at each oil change.
F-377RA
An F-377RA shall be completed on all reserve rescue ambulances each month. See "Front-Line Emergency Light
Apparatus" for specific instructions.
(Manop14) Page 9

7/1-48.32
A 12-99
-48. MAINTENANCE OF APPARATUS (con't)
.32 APPARATUS PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE:
APPARATUS/GENERAL
F-377
An F-377 shall be completed on reserve apparatus once every two months according to the schedule developed
by the Station Commander. At no time shall apparatus preventative maintenance (F-377) exceed two months
except with the approval of the Battalion Commander.
Aerial Ladders (Reserve)
Aerial ladders and related components shall be lubricated every two months, one of which may be in preparation
for the Annual Ladder Test. Battalion Commanders shall be notified on the shift before the ladder is to be lubricated
so that it may be inspected during the lubrication process.
D. Non-Emergency Light Apparatus
Non-Emergency Light Apparatus shall be maintained according to the following requirements utilizing the schedule
developed by the station commander.
Lubrication
Non-Emergency Light Apparatus shall be lubricated once every four months.
Oil and Filter Change
The oil and filter shall be changed every 4,000 apparatus miles.
E. Specialized Apparatus
Station Commanders requesting modified maintenance schedules for specialized apparatus shall forward written
requests direct to the Supply and Maintenance Division Commander, with recommendations and justifications.
Approved copies shall be maintained in the Apparatus Log Book, posted as an element of the station's apparatus
maintenance schedule, and a copy at the Battalion Office.
.35 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION: Heavy apparatus equipped with automatic transmissions shall be serviced in
accordance with instructions in the log books and as follows:
A. Transmission fluid and filter will be changed by the Shops annually at the scheduled aerial ladder and pump test,
or at any time requested, if debris, discoloration, or a burnt odor indicate fluid deterioration.
B. Transmission fluid level and condition shall be checked weekly and in compliance with instructions in the F-377,
Bi-Monthly Preventive Maintenance Record Instructions.
.36 COOLING SYSTEM COOLANT: Heavy apparatus cooling system coolant will be diagnostically tested by the Test
Engineer as a part of the Annual Pump and Aerial Ladder Tests. If the test results indicate substandard or unfit coolant,
a complete cooling system flush will be done and fresh coolant added.
Heavy apparatus cooling system coolant shall also be tested bi-monthly in accordance with the F-377 Bi-Monthly
Preventive Maintenance Instructions and the station test kit instructions. Diluted cooling system coolant shall be reported
to the Shop Office (Ext. 6111). They will arrange for coolant additive to be sent to the station. Proper concentration of
coolant additive shall be ensured by a subsequent coolant test.
At any time coolant is found to exhibit scale, rust, oil film, or other contaminants, the condition shall be reported to the
Shop Office (Ext. 6111) and arrangements made for a cooling system flush.
Page 10 (Manop14)

7/1-48.38
APPARATUS/GENERAL
APPARATUS LUBRICATION AND PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
NON-EMER.
LT. APPAR.
EMERGENCY RESERVE
HEAVY & LIGHT
EMERGENCY
LIGHT APPARATUS
EMERGENCY
HEAVY APPARATUS
OIL & FILTER
CHANGE
LUBRICATION &
F-377
LUBE AERIAL
OIL & FILTER
CHANGE
F-377 R.A.
LUBRICATION
OIL & FILTER
LUBRICATION:
More than 12,00
annually
F-377 R.A.
LUBRICATION:
More than 12,00
annually
LUBE AERIAL
OIL CHANGE
LUBRICATION:
More than 12,00
annually
LUBRICATION:
More than 12,00
annually
INSPECTION
RESPONSIBILITY
F-377
F-377
F-377
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
EVERY 4,000 Apparatus Miles
EVERY 4 MONTHS
EVERY 4 MONTHS
EVERY 2,000 Apparatus Miles-Heavy Filters Annually
EVERY 2.000 Apparatus Miles
EVERY 2,000 Apparatus Miles
B
C
A
B
C
EVERY 4 MONTHS
EVERY 4 Months
EVERY 4 MONTHS
Lubrication is based on Annual Company miles not apparatus miles. F-377’s shall be completed during the first 2 weeks of the appropriate month or the
day before Battalion inspection, whichever comes first. Notify B/C when lubricating Aerial.

7/1-48.39
A 12-99
-48 MAINTENANCE OF APPARATUS
APPARATUS/GENERAL
.39 AIR BRAKES: Apparatus equipped with air brakes shall be serviced in accordance with instructions in log books and
as follows:
A.Air tanks shall be thoroughly bled on a weekly basis, preferably on each Monday morning.
During inclement weather, tanks may need to be drained daily.
B.Repair for leaking air brake systems shall be requested when the low pressure warning device operates when the
apparatus has not been run for 12 hours or less.
C.System shall be checked at least each 2 months to determine if an adjustment is needed. Refer to "Service Log Book"
for proper procedure.
.45 BATTERIES: Members shall use good judgment and initiative in conserving batteries during periods of extended
operation, taking into consideration the capabilities of alternators and conventional generators. When a battery becomes
discharged beyond use during emergency operations, the fact will be reported to the incident commander.
Batteries for in service rescue ambulance apparatus should be connected to chargers at all times when the apparatus is
in quarters.
.52 TIRES - CARE OF: Tires shall be brushed following each daytime run. Tires must be examined closely for damage.
If they are muddy or dirty, they should be washed with a minimum of water. For additional information regarding tires,
refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-40.80.
.58 APPARATUS WATER TANK - FILLING: Before water tanks are filled, the caps must be removed. Damage to water
tanks can be eliminated if they are filled slowly.
.65 FLUSHING: Pumping mechanisms, engine cooling systems, or any other equipment in which salt water or foam has
been used, must be thoroughly flushed or cleaned with fresh water after use.
.71 DRAFTING DRILLS: Before engaging in drafting drills, pump operators and Company Commanders shall determine
that water does not contain sand or other abrasive material, and that the suction strainer is free from obstructions.
Strainer end of suction shall be kept at least 12" from bottom of reservoir and 24" or more below the surface of the water.
At fires where this cannot be done, reasonable precautions will be taken, if at all possible, to draw only clean water into
the pump.
(Manop14) Page 10B

-48. MAINTENANCE OF APPARATUS (Con't.)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-48.84
A 8-95
.84 APPARATUS CHECKS - ROAD CHECKS: The following apparatus shall be road checked at least once each month:
A. Reserve apparatus
B. Service utilities
C. Foam carriers
D. Transportation rigs
E. Light utilities
F. Gasoline truck
G. Buses
H. Field command truck
I. Communications truck
J. Air utility truck
K. Helicopter tenders
L.Seldom used on-duty apparatus as determined by the Station Commander.
The F-973 shall be used to record road checks for the apparatus listed in the previous column. Refer to Vol. 5, 9/7-00.00,
F-973.
.86 APPARATUS CHECKS-POWER ACCESSORIES: Pumps, aerial ladders, and other power operated features shall be
operated on all apparatus at least once each thirty days. The F-974 shall be used to record these checks.
.89 ANNUAL SERVICE TESTS: Members will be notified of the time and place they are to report with apparatus for the
annual service test.
.91 ELECTRICAL: Members shall adhere to the following policy regarding electrical components on automotive apparatus:
A.Repairs may be made by members, but they shall be reported to the Supply and Maintenance Division and a follow-up
inspection may be made by a Department mechanic. Such repairs of work normally consists of the following:
1. Loose or broken wires.
2. Replacement of fuses other than radio fuses.
B.Installation of light bulbs from the stock maintained at quarters may be made by members.
C.Maintenance of spark plugs is to be done by replacement when needed and at annual performance test.
D.Members shall not adjust distributor, breaker points or ignition timing.
(Manop14) Page 11

7/1-60.01
A 8-95
-60. GAS AND OIL
APPARATUS/GENERAL
.01 GENERAL: A Company Commander shall personally supervise the filling of the house supply tanks. In addition, each
Monday morning a Company Commander shall cause the house fuel storage tank to be checked and shall reorder fuel
when necessary. Refer to Vol. 4, 8/7-80.01.
This procedure shall be followed to prevent water and contaminants in station fuel tanks:
A.Always refuel all apparatus prior to receiving a new load of gasoline or diesel fuel.
B.After a fuel delivery has been made, wait twelve hours before pumping gasoline, and twenty-four hours before pumping
diesel fuel.
C.Clear the cavity around the fill pipe of all dirt and water prior to refilling the station fuel tank.
D.If water is suspected in a station fuel tank, handle as an emergency repair. Public Buildings will make a check of the tank
using water detecting paste. Refer to Vol. 4, 8/3-80.12 B.1.
.10 AQMD AND WASTEWATER COMPLIANCE INSPECTIONS: Each Monday fuel dispensers and oil separator/clarifiers
shall be inspected. Contact Fire Facilities for repair and Underground Tank Unit for technical advice on fuel systems.
A.Dispenser and nozzle assembly - Check vapor hose to ensure that it is not torn, cut or crimped. The retractor operates
correctly and the boot is not torn or missing. Also check for loose spouts, latching devices, nozzle leaks correct signs,
etc.
B.Underground storage tanks - Check the tank fill, poppet valve and vapor caps for serviceability, gaskets and water leaks.
Also check to ensure that the tank fill tube is in place and tank vents are not damaged. The gasoline overfill container
should be checked to ensure it is not dirty or full.
C.Stations with oil separator/clarifiers - must be reset after each rain. Notify Building/Administration when wastewater
needs to be removed.
.25 GASOLINE: In addition to its recognized fire hazard, all gasoline used in Department operations contains tetraethyl
lead which is poisonous by skin absorption and vapor inhalation and has a cumulative effect. It shall be used for motor
fuel only.
.59 REFUELING AT FIRE STATIONS: During refueling of apparatus, extreme caution shall be exercised. Smoking shall
not be permitted within 25 feet of gasoline pumps or the motor vehicle being refueled.
No petroleum supplies in Fire Department custody shall be dispensed to other than Fire Department vehicles or
equipment.
Exception: If city vehicles belonging to other Departments are out of fuel, officers may provide a sufficient quantity for
the vehicle to reach its own garage.
When gasoline is dispensed directly from the gasoline pump to a gasoline tank of a motor vehicle, the entire apparatus
shall be removed from the building. If this is impossible, the vehicle shall be removed from the building so the fuel tank,
and as much of the apparatus as possible, are outside.
Page 12 (Manop14)

-60. GAS AND OIL (CONTINUED)
.59 REFUELING AT FIRE STATIONS (Continued):
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-60.75
A 8-95
When gasoline is dispensed to a chain saw engine, generator, or like equipment, the filling of the gasoline tank shall be
done outside of buildings. Whenever a container is used to dispense gasoline, it shall be a safety can.
When gasoline is dispensed from a gasoline pump to a safety can, the can shall be outside of the building.
If it is impossible to follow the above orders in any manner, a request for the deviation shall be made in writing to the
Chief Engineer.
.75 USED OIL & OTHER WASTE PETROLEUM PRODUCTS:
A.Used engine oil and other petroleum products shall not be put into the same waste drum.
B.Used engine oil only shall be put in waste oil drums.
C.Other waste petroleum products shall be disposed of in a separate waste product drum. This drum shall contain the
label(s) of all products put into it.
D.Disposal - Arrangement for the disposal of all hazardous waste generated by Department facilities will be handled by
Supply and Maintenance. When waste oil drums or other miscellaneous hazardous waste containers are filled,
Station Commanders shall call the "Storeroom Counter" (5-6124) at Supply and Maintenance and request that a pick
up be made.
.80 SMALL ENGINE GASOLINE USE: Responsible officers shall ensure that all fuel used in small portable gasoline
engines meets the following criteria.
A. 4-cycle engine - gasoline only
B. 2-cycle engines - gasoline and 2-cycle 40-to-1 oil premix only
C.Hurst Rescue Tool power units - gasoline and Hurst "Piston Lube" oil premix only
D.Engines shall have fuel tanks drained every 30 days and replenished with fresh fuel. NOTE: Disposal of unused fuel shall
be accomplished by pouring it in the fuel tanks of gasoline powered vehicles.
E.Fuel tanks of small engines shall be drained before sending the equipment to S & M for repair.
.82 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTAINERS:
Responsible officers shall ensure that fuel safety containers for small engines are identified in accordance with the
following policy:
A. 4-cycle: All 4-cycle safety containers shall be painted red and marked "4-CYCLE".
B. 2-cycle: All 2-cycle safety containers shall be painted yellow and marked "2-CYCLE".
C.Hurst Rescue Tool: All Hurst Rescue Tool safety containers shall be painted aluminum (silver) and marked "HURST".
All safety containers shall be marked with the word "flammable" in 3/4" letters, contrasting in color with the
container.
.84 GASOLINE-POWERED EQUIPMENT FUEL TANK IDENTIFICATION: All fuel tanks on gasoline-powered equipment
shall be painted and marked to correspond with the gasoline and storage container identification delineated in 7/1-60.82.
(Manop14) Page 13

7/1-60.87
A 8-95
-60. GAS AND OIL (CONTINUED)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
.87 TWO-CYCLE OIL: Company Commanders shall personally see that two-cycle portable gasolinepowered equipment
carried on apparatus use the 40-to-1 oil and gasoline mixture provided by Supply and Maintenance. The following
procedures must be adhered to:
A.For greater engine efficiency, fresh 40-to-1 fuel shall be mixed every 30 days and placed in the portable equipment.
EXCEPTION: HURST 2-Cycle Rescue Tool power units shall use gasoline and Hurst "Piston Lube" oil premix only.
.88 FUEL MIXTURE (40-TO-1 OIL): With five gallons of gasoline, add 16 ounces of 40-to-1 oil. With one gallon of
gasoline, add three ounces of 40-to-1 oil.
A.Required mixing method: Use the required container and fill it half full with gasoline, then add the 40-to-1 outboard
oil. Complete the operation by filling the container with gasoline, securing the cap on the container and shaking it
vigorously to obtain a compatible mixture.
B.Supply: Single fire stations should mix a one-gallon supply at a time and hold the remaining oil in reserve. Task Force
stations should mix a five-gallon supply at a time and hold the remaining oil in reserve.
.89 PORTA-POWER UNIT: Type A (Dextron Automatic Transmission Fluid) shall be used in this unit. This fluid is
compatible with portapower hydraulic oil.
.90 HURST TOOL: Hurst Brand "Aero Safe-2300" or "RT. 23" fluid shall be used in Hurst Rescue Tool hydraulic systems,
only.
Page 13A (Manop14)

-72. RESERVE AND RELIEF APPARATUS
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-72.01
A 1-87
.01 DEFINITIONS: "Reserve Apparatus" - A piece of apparatus maintained on a stand-by basis to temporarily replace
or augment firstline apparatus.
"Relief Apparatus" - A reserve apparatus which is temporarily assigned to replace a piece of first-line apparatus.
.15 IDENTIFICATION: Reserve apparatus shall be identified in numerical sequence regardless of where they are regularly
assigned.
1.Reserve Engines - "400" series numbering (i.e., Engine 401, 402, Engine 403, etc.).
2.Reserve Trucks - Numbered starting with "500" (i.e., Truck 501, Truck 502, Truck 503, etc.).
3.Reserve Ambulances - Numbered starting with "600" (i.e., Rescue 601, Rescue 602, Rescue 603, etc.).
4.Reserve Aircraft Firefighting Apparatus and Special Reserves - Numbered starting with "700" (i.e., Foam 790, Crash 780,
Heavy Utility 788).
Note: Any apparatus in the Shops for repair may be activated (as needed) during large scale emergencies. Before
activating, apparatus shall be determined mechanically sound and safe to operate by Shops' personnel and
will be identified by numbering "701" through "712" (i.e., Engine 702, Rescue Ambulance 711).
5.Anytime a "reserve" apparatus is placed into "relief", the visual ID signs from the first-line apparatus will be placed on
the relief apparatus. The signs from the reserve apparatus will be stored in a safe location in quarters where the
reserve apparatus is normally assigned. Responsible officers shall insure that when the relief apparatus is returned
to reserve status, the visual ID numbers are replaced.
EXAMPLE: "RESERVE 411" in relief for "ENGINE 11" will be identified as "11". The apparatus going to the Shops for
repair will not be identified with visual ID signs.
.25 ROSTER: A roster of all reserve apparatus in the Department and its current location is maintained at the Operations
Control Division. O.C.D. shall be notified whenever reserve apparatus is assigned as relief or of any other circumstance
that may alter its status. In addition, each Monday morning before 0800 hours, any commander or individual having a
reserve apparatus in service as a relief, or the commander of any station having a reserve apparatus in quarters in reserve,
shall so notify O.C.D.
.50 CARE OF: When reserve or special apparatus is placed in service or returned to its regular quarters, it shall be
inspected to determine that the equipment is complete and that the apparatus is clean. Entries shall be made on the
logbook copy of the F-974. In addition, when it is found that the apparatus is damaged, dirty or that the inventory is not
complete, Station Commanders concerned shall make an immediate report by telephone to their Battalion Commander.
(4664R) Page 14

7/1-84.01
A 11-03
-84. APPARATUS IDENTIFICATION
APPARATUS/GENERAL
.01 GENERAL: Front line apparatus shall be identified with numbers using white
reflective adhesive material affixed directly to the apparatus as follows:
a. Front: 7 ½”
b. Rear: 7 ½”
c. Side: 9”
d. Top: 15 ¾”
Supply and Maintenance Division shall be the sole reflective number, lettering, striping
provider for Department apparatus. Fire Stations shall not alter apparatus number,
lettering or striping.
Magnetic numbers shall continue to be used to identify reserve apparatus placed in
relief.
Community titles designating areas served will also be solely provided by Supply and
Maintenance. Reflective lettering used for this purpose shall be 4 ¼” tall, contrasting
color, and be placed on the 6” reflective stripe on each side of the apparatus.
Community designators shall be pre-approved by the Commander of the Bureau of
Emergency Services. (Requests shall be forwarded in F-225 format through channels).
.50 SYMBOLS:
A. The following symbols will precede company numerical designation and/or
assignment number (*except where indicated):
AR Arson Investigation Unit
BP Brush Patrol
CP Command Post – Community Activity Resource
CR Airport Crash Rescue
D Dozer (* designated as D1, D2,)
DT Dozer Tender (* designated at DT1, DT2,)
E Engine
FM Airport Foam
FT Foam Tender
HR Heavy Rescue
RA Rescue Ambulance (Paramedic or Basic Life Support)
RAT Rehab Air Tender (replaces Emergency Air & Food Service Utility)
SQ Hazardous Materials Squad
SW Swift Water Rescue Team
T Truck
TP Tractor Transport (*designated as TP 1, TP 2…)
TT Triage Trailer
TU Tunnel Utility
UR Urban Search & Rescue
WT Water Tender
Page 15

-84. APPARATUS IDENTIFICATION
.50 SYMBOLS: (Continued)
APPARATUS/GENERAL
7/1-84.01
A 11-03
Apparatus not identified as exceptions to assignment identification above, (e.g., D1, D2),
shall be identified with assignment number as follows:
Aerial Trucks (example): T1
Ambulances: RA1
Battalion Commanders: B1
Engine Companies: E1
Engine (second triple): E201
Reserve Engines: “400” series numbering, E401
Reserve Trucks: “500” series numbering, T501
Reserve Ambulances: “600” series numbering, RA601
Misc.: Identification numbering for specified combinations of resources, (e.g., Strike
Teams, Tactical Task Forces, etc.) is referenced in Manual of Operations, Emergency
Operations/General, Resource Types.
Page 16

APPARATUS/GENERAL
-90. SCHEDULING NON-EMERGENCY HELICOPTER FLIGHTS
7/1-90.01
A 10-00
.01 GENERAL: The Fire Chief is the authority to approve non-emergency use of Fire Department helicopters. For
specified purposes, that authority has been delegated to appropriate levels within the Department.
The following identifies the approving authority for various non-emergency uses of the Department's helicopters:
A. Fire Chief:
1. Requests for all flights that include civilians, elected officials, or other City personnel shall be directed to the
Office of the Fire Chief for approval. This does not apply to Fire Department civilian employees.
2. Mayor's Directive No. 7 states, "In cases when any other City department may want to use a Fire Department
helicopter because of its specialized equipment, passenger capacity, or lift capability, such use must be
authorized in advance by the Mayor or his designee." The Fire Chief or Acting Fire Chief would approve all
requests after authorization per the Mayor's directive. All such requests shall be submitted to the Fire Chief or
the Acting Fire Chief for review and final approval.
3. All other requests not otherwise identified in this policy shall be directed to the Fire Chief for consideration.
NOTE: After business hours, OCD must be contacted to obtain approval for these flights from the Fire Chief or
Deputy Department Commander.
B.Assistant Bureau Commander, Bureau of Emergency Services:
1. The Assistant Bureau Commander, Bureau of Emergency Services, is the approving authority for requests
originating within the Department for needs arising out of the conduct of Department business. These flights
will only be approved for uniformed and civilian members of the Department who have a specific need to
perform their duties, i.e., drills, surveys, aerial photographing, mapping, etc.
2. Officers/members shall obtain permission from their Division Commander, Section Commander, or civilian
supervisor prior to requesting authorization for these flights from the Assistant Bureau Commander, Bureau of
Emergency Services.
3. After business hours, OCD must be contacted to obtain approval for these flights from the Deputy Department
Commander.
C.Commander, Air Operations:
The Commander of Air Operations is the approving authority for all flights originating as a result of pilot and/or
helitac training.
(Manop14) Page 17

7/1-90.10
A 10-00
APPARATUS/GENERAL
-90. SCHEDULING NON-EMERGENCY HELICOPTER FLIGHTS
.10 REQUESTS:
A.Telephone, verbal, and written requests (submitted at least five (5) days prior to the requested flight) shall include the
following information:
1. Date and time of flight.
2. Pickup location.
3. Name and rank of requesting member.
4. Name and rank of approving authority.
5. Names and title of passengers, if not Department members.
6. Number of passengers.
7. Destination.
8. Mission.
9. Location of any landings.
10. Estimated duration of mission.
In order to permit proper planning of helicopter operations, verbal approval for verification of helicopter availability may
be obtained prior to submission of requests.
Helicopter flights, once approved, may be coordinated directly with Air Operations.
When notified of flight approval, Air Operations will place the flight on the flight schedule. Air Operations shall be notified
of any cancellation or change of flight plans as soon as possible.
Page 18